'< ^ as I- 
 
 ^ 11 N r; ^_^ -' » ft S ^ ^\0 
 
 <> 'o, ,-* ^'\ 
 
 -v^' 
 
 "\ '' 
 
 
 d' 
 
 
 o 
 
 . >; 
 
 '■ . -7 
 
 
. y.-^ ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
/ 
 
 % 
 

 MANUAL 
 
 OF 
 
 Physical Exercises 
 
 COMPRISING 
 
 GYMNASTICS, 
 
 ROWING, 
 
 SKATING, 
 
 FENCING, 
 
 CRICKET, 
 
 CALISTHENICS, 
 SAILING, 
 SWIMMING, 
 SPARRING, 
 BASE BALL. 
 
 TOGETHER WITH 
 
 RULES FOR TRAINING and SANITARY SUGGESTIONS. 
 
 By WILLIAM ^yOOD, 
 
 INSTRUCTOR IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION. 
 
 tSS&itt) ®nc l^untireH nrCQ SCtoents^^filie Xllusttations. 
 
 JV£JV YORK: 
 
 HARPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS, 
 
 FRANKLIN SQUARE. 
 
Cvioi 
 
 . W6S" 
 
 Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year one thousand eight hundred 
 and sixty-seven, by 
 
 HARPER & BROTHERS, 
 
 In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the Southern District of New Yorli. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 In presenting to the public this work, I feel very sensi- 
 bly my inadequacy in appearing in the capacity of an 
 author. Trained almost from infancy to a profession 
 which rendered mental study impossible, and having only 
 by dint of perseverance got Avhat little education has 
 fallen to my share in much the same manner that a chick- 
 en gets his breakfast — picking up a kernel of information 
 in one corner and another in the next — all the acquii'e- 
 ments which I pretend to claim are based alone upon the 
 common branches of English learning and common sense. 
 Yet, it seems to me, a man who has mastered any thing 
 worth knowing may, if he will simply tell what he has 
 learned, write something which it will be of advantage 
 to others to read. I have written what I know, and 
 what I judge would be well for others to know. 
 
 I have been for many years engaged as an instructor in 
 Gymnastic and Athletic Exercises. Very many of the 
 first families of the City of New York have been mem- 
 bers of my institution. The young, the middle-aged, and 
 the old can testify to the benefits derived while they 
 were members of the same. 
 
PEEFACE. 
 
 My chief design in writing tliis work is to promote a 
 love for physical culture. Is not such culture needed? 
 Look at the great number of our young men and women, 
 and see what a narrow-chested, sallow-complexioned, 
 slight-formed race they are. But, thank God, this will 
 soon j)ass away. Institutions for Physical Education ai-e 
 springing up in all parts of our country. Our great men 
 of learning, presidents of nearly if not quite every col- 
 lege or university in the land, have lent their aid to pro- 
 mote the good work. Our students hereafter will gradu- 
 ate not only with clear heads hut with sound bodies. 
 
 Far be it from me to advise less attention to be paid 
 to the mind. But it is certain that an unhealthy body 
 will sooner or later affect the mind. Moreover, no man 
 lives for himself alone. The present generation are 
 fathers and mothers of generations to come. By the 
 fixed laws of nature, the present gives impress to the 
 future, as the past has given form to the present. The 
 children of healthy parents will, as a rule, be healthy. 
 The children of infirm parents, as a rule, will be infirm. 
 
 Every one should therefore feel that the strength and 
 character of future generations depend upon the more 
 frequent use of Gymnastic and Out-door Exercises. Ath- 
 letic culture is intended to restore the just proportion of 
 the two principal parts of human Education — Mental and 
 Physical. It is the bounden duty of every person to 
 take care of the Body, and develop it as well as the 
 
PKEFACE. 7 
 
 Mind : consequently Gymnastic Exercises should form an 
 essential part of Education. 
 I Where man exists, there Athletic Games have or at 
 I least ought to have a place. They are the property of 
 mankind ; not confined to any nation or country. They 
 will, of course, assume a different form in different cli- 
 mates and different states of civilization, etc., but the 
 essence remains the same — culture of the human body. 
 In conclusion, I venture to express the hoj)e that this 
 * work may foster a taste for Physical Culture, to the end 
 that the Body and Mind may both be improved. 
 
 All good works that we do in this world inspire us with 
 a love that is pure in thought, beautiful in expression, 
 
 and moral in tendency. 
 
 WM. WOOD. 
 
 New York, Aut/ust, 1867. 
 
CONTENTS, 
 
 CHAPTER I.— Peeliminary 11- 16 
 
 CHAPTER II. — Sanitary Benefits oe Gymnastics 17- 28 
 
 CHAPTER III. — Prepaeatoky Exercises 29-73 
 
 IVith Fifty Illustrations. 
 
 CHAPTER IV.— Indian Club Exercise 74- 88 
 
 With Twenty Illustrations. 
 
 CHAPTER v.— Rowing 91-124 
 
 With Two Illustrations. 
 
 CHAPTER VI.— Sailing 125-132 
 
 CHAPTER VII.— Record OP Matches 133-141 
 
 CHAPTER VIIL— Rules POR Regattas 142-151 
 
 CHAPTER IX.— Savimming 152-160 
 
 With Six Illustrations. 
 
 CHAPTER X.— Skating 161-166 
 
 CHAPTER XL— Cricket ,^. 169-182 
 
 With Six Illustrations. 
 
 CHAPTER XII.— Base Ball 185-202 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. —Fencing 205-225 
 
 With Seventeen Illustrations. 
 
 CHAPTER XIV.— The Broadsavord 226-234 
 
 With Twelve Illustrations. 
 
 CHAPTER XV.— Salutes 235-236 
 
 With Eight Illustrations. 
 
 CHAPTER XVI.— Sparring OE Boxing 287-253 
 
 CHAPTER XVII.— Te-uning 257-283 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. —Rules pok Health 287-290 
 
 CHAPTER XIX.— Suggestions UPON Health 291-306 
 
 CHAPTER XX.— Recoed of Time 307-316 
 
1. 
 
 (ipnnstirs ml €tiM^mm. 
 
CHAPTER I. 
 
 Peeliminaky 11 — 10 
 
 CHAPTER n. 
 
 Sanitaky Benefits of Gymnastics IT — 2S 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 PKErAKATORY ExEKCISES IN GYMNASTICS 29—73 
 
 With Fifty Illustrations. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 Indian Club Exekoise *. 74— 8S 
 
 With Tioenttj Illustrations. • 
 
MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 
 PKELIMIKAET. 
 
 • I PROPOSE in the outset to give a brief general resume of 
 the toj^ics which will be presented at length in the succes- 
 sive chapters of this work : 
 
 Gymnastics and Calisthenics. — One thousand different 
 and distinct exercises, from the simplest motion suitable for 
 children and injalids, to the most difficult for the gymnast 
 and athlete. These will be fully illustrated in the proper 
 place. 
 
 Mowing and Sailing. — Upon these beautiful and invigor- 
 ating exercises, pastime and amusement, I flatter myself that 
 I am fully competent to speak and instruct, having had much 
 practical experience. To the beginner I promise that row- 
 ing will be made easy, and to many who have become more 
 or less proficient, that their skill and science in handling the 
 oars or sculls will be enhanced. The correct position of 
 the body, the position of the hands upon the oars or sculls, 
 the stroke, the placing of the oar in the water, the " feather- 
 ing," or finishing of the stroke, will be fully explained. I 
 shall give full and ample directions as to what should be 
 done, and when and how to do it. I shall present sugges- 
 
12 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL :5:XEECISES. 
 
 tions for the management of crews of foui*, six, and eight 
 oars. I shall give plain and simple rules for the manage- 
 ment of sail-boats. I shall show how to control and work 
 them without the use of rudder or oar. I shall give a 
 record of boating in the United States, from 1824 to the 
 present time ; shall note the contests between the English 
 universities of Oxford and Cambridge for the last thirty- 
 six years; shall give the "time" of each crew, and also that 
 of "Professionals," whether with sculls or oars, with the 
 weight of each man. I shall furnish such other information 
 upon this subject as may seem advisable. 
 
 Fencing. — ^This art stands unrivaled both as an accom- 
 plishment and as an exercise. It is scientific and at the 
 same time graceful ; and it is in this sense that it will be 
 treated. Fencing causes more muscles to act at the same 
 time than almost any other exercise. It promotes the ex- 
 pansion of the chest and improves respiration, whereby the 
 functions of the most important organs of the body are 
 more perfectly performed. The French and German schools 
 will be explained and made easy by eighty different exer- 
 cises ; it will be so plain and so well illustrated, that passing 
 through the school will be a pleasant exercise and the prac- 
 tice a pleasure. The illustrations in this chapter will be 
 copies from photographs taken from experts in actual 
 position. They will therefore show every movement and 
 attitude involved in the art. 
 
 €ricJcet. — The game of Cricket is one of the noblest of 
 English pastimes. It combines athletic power, grace, quick- 
 ness of eye and of hand, nimbleness of leg, and scientific 
 skill. In England it is played by high and low, rich and 
 poor, man and boy. I shall describe the origin of the game 
 of single and double wicker ; shall show the arrangement 
 of the field ; shall lay down the recognized laws of the 
 
PEELIMINAEY. 13 
 
 Igame ; shall note the duties of umpires ; and shall append 
 (general hints upon dress and the like. 
 I Swimming. — I shall explain the first practice before en- 
 tering the water ; shall treat of aids to swimmiug ; striking 
 out; plunging and diving; of swimming under water, on the 
 side or on the back, without using the feet; of floating; of 
 treading water ; of the fling on the back ; of the double 
 thrust, to imitate the swimming of a dog ; of the wheel back- 
 ward and forward. I trust that this chapter will be of special 
 service. This is an accomplishment so easily acquired, and 
 so invaluable to every one, whether as a means of personal 
 preservation or of saving others, that no one can be justified 
 in neglecting to acquire it. Next after reading and writing, 
 every youth of either sex should be taught to swim. 
 
 Skating. — In this chapter will be found general direc- 
 tions to be followed by those learning to skate : the for- 
 ward roll, back roll, and the Dutch roll ; inside edge and 
 the outside edge ; the Figure 3, Figure 8, I shall also give 
 directions for the modes of exercise adapted to strengthen 
 the lower limbs, to give firmness and balance to the body, 
 and how to obviate the danger of taking cold while engaged 
 in this fascinating exercise. 
 
 The Indian Club. — ^This is a very gi-aceful and beneficial 
 exercise. It is easily acquired, and can be practiced at the 
 office or dwelling of every person. The whole upper part 
 of the body from the waist is called into action ; and these 
 are the very parts that require practice, especially in those 
 who lead a sedentary mode of life. To all, this exercise 
 will be found to do good service in strengthening and im- 
 proving the system. In this exercise very little muscular 
 exertion is required at first. The clubs range in weight 
 from four to forty pounds. The beginner will of course 
 commence with the light club, or those in proportion to his 
 
14 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEECISES.. 
 
 strength ; and as he improves in skill and power, he will in- 
 crease the weight. I shall give fifty separate and distinct 
 motions. Many of the plainer ones ladies might practice, 
 and find them of immense good in expanding the chest and 
 improving the form and carriage. The explanations will be 
 so plain and the illustrations so perfect, that any one will 
 be enabled to use the clubs without the least trouble or in- 
 convenience. 
 
 Jiase Ball. — This may be truly called the American Na- 
 tional Game. There is scarcely a city or town or village in 
 the United States where 'this invigorating and manly exer- 
 cise is not to some extent enjoyed. I shall describe the rise 
 and progress of Base Ball ; shall give the Rules and Regula- 
 tions of the National Association, with a diagram of the 
 ground and correct measurements, and the position of each 
 player. I shall give full instructions for batting, and set 
 forth the duties of umpires. In brief, I j^ropose that this 
 chapter shall be in itself a Manual of our National Athletic 
 Game. 
 
 Boxing or Sparring. — It is only within a few years that 
 this exercise has with us been practiced to any extent. I 
 wish it to be distinctly understood that I shall treat of it 
 only as an exercise in gymnastics, although I am satisfied it 
 has other advantages, the principal one of which is that it 
 gives self-confidence in one's own ability in the hour of trial 
 or danger. The practice of it renders every part of the 
 body quick, active, and capable of preserving the balance in 
 almost every position. And instead of feeling timid in time 
 of danger, as many nervous men are apt to do, one Avho has 
 acquired this art, even to a moderate degree, will remain 
 cool and collect*ed, for the exercise that he has taken will 
 not only have strengthened his muscles, but will also have 
 improved his whole nervous system. He will not be apt to 
 
PEELIMINAEY. 15 
 
 lose presence of mind at the moment it is most needed. 
 Take for example, a man of weak nerves, possessing no 
 knowledge of sparring or how to defend himsQjf : he would 
 be so frightened at the appearance of danger as to be utter- 
 ly unable to make any resistance. I assert without the fear 
 of contradiction that the knowledge of sparring even to a 
 limited extent would, if walking with wife, mother, sister or 
 friend, and bein^ insulted by a rowdy, make him feel more 
 confidence that he was able to stand up like a man, and pro- 
 tect those in his charge, and hand the bully over to the 
 hands of the proper authorities. 
 
 Every physical accomplishment is, like every other good 
 thing, liable to abuse or misuse. The accomplished penman 
 may become a forger; but that is no reason why a man 
 should 4iot learn to write neatly or elegantly. A gentleman 
 AYill use but never abuse the knowledge of the art of self- 
 defense ; and I write only for gentlemen. I speak from 
 personal knowledge when I say that many of our first men 
 in this country have taken lessons and acquired the knowl- 
 edge of sparring well. Among these are statesmen, minis- 
 ters, physicians, lawyers, and besides many of the most 
 wealthy and respectable men in the city ; and they will all, 
 without exception, acknowledge that they have been bene- 
 fited and much pleased Avith the exercise. It strengthens 
 and .gives tone to the muscles, quickens and improves the 
 eye, and in fact invigorates the whole body. 
 
 Corpulency. — In this chapter will be found hints on corpu- 
 lency, and directions how to prevent and how to remove it. 
 
 The foregoing are mere hints as to the general scope of 
 the topics which will be treated in this work, which I shall 
 aim to render what its title imports : A complete " Manual 
 of Physical Exercises," and therefore in no inconsiderable 
 degree a Guide to Health. 
 
16- MANUAL OP PHYSICAL p;XEECISES. 
 
 To give instruction upon these subjects has been the oc- 
 cupation of my life. I look upon it as a profession, which 
 if worthily pursued is eminently worthy, adding as it does 
 to the sum of human happiness and well-being. 
 
SANITARY BENEFITS OF GYMNASTICS. 17 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 SANITARY BENEFITS OF GYMNASTICS. 
 
 The introduction of gymnastic exercises into the system 
 of education will constitute a remarkable epoch in the an- 
 nals of history. The social order has long claimed securi- 
 ties which the real interest of nations Avill no longer admit 
 of being deferred, as there are not only laws but institu- 
 tions which reason and the wants of the age imperiously 
 demand. 
 
 The great object of exercise during infancy and youth is 
 to promote the growth and strength of the body and to 
 render the perceptions more acute. The games and diver- 
 sions of children, therefore, should be directed toward good 
 and useful habits, and against the introduction of bad ones. 
 Nature has implanted in the young an earnest desire to 
 romp, to run, to play at ball, and to use other bodily exer- 
 cises. The construction of the human body proves indeed 
 that it needs exercise in order to enjoy perfect health. 
 Physical exercise is as necessary in the early stages of life 
 as mental education. It i^ j\§tonishing how many perish by 
 what may be fitly termed the disease of education. Multi- 
 tudes die every year of this disorder. It should never be 
 forgotten that the human being consists of body as well as 
 of mind, and that both, being the work of the Creator, de- 
 serve our utmost care. In order of time, indeed, the cul- 
 ture of the body takes precedence of that of the mind j after 
 a while they go on together. The grand secret of educa- 
 
18 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 tion is that the exercise of the body and that of the mind 
 should be so continued as always to serve as a relaxation 
 from each other. 
 
 The exercises of youth should promote the circulation 
 of the blood and strengthen the nerves and muscles ; they 
 should accustom the body to a variety of positions and ren- 
 der it adroit and agile; they should inspire presence of 
 mind, and excite and cherish activity. By them, not only 
 personal strength and mental energy, but also the beauty 
 of the form should be promoted. It is well known that by 
 the forcible respiration which exercise induces, narrowness 
 of the chest, which is so injurious to the lungs, may be pre- 
 vented. 
 
 On the subject of agreeable exercises in general, it has 
 been justly mentioned as a subject of regret, that in this 
 city, with its immense and growing population, gymnastic 
 exercises are so little practiced. Thirty minutes each day to 
 exercise would be of the greatest service to those who are 
 not under the necessity of laboring for their support. As 
 active diversions lose ground, those of a sedentary kind 
 come to prevail. The latter, however, are of no use but to 
 consume time. Instead of relieving the mind, they often 
 require more thought than either study or business. In 
 fact, every thing which induces young persons to sit still, 
 unless it be necessary employment, ought to be avoided. 
 The ancients, in general, had so hi^h an opinion of gymnas- 
 tics, that Plato, Aristotle, Cicero, Csesar and others con- 
 sidered a commonwealth defective in which they were neg- 
 lected. They reasoned thus : As the improvement of the 
 inind, which ought to be our constant aim, can not be ac- 
 complished without the aid of the hody, it is incumbent 
 upon us to jDromote the health and strength of the one, that 
 it may be capable of serving ihe other. Hence Plato calls 
 
SANITAET BENEFITS OF GYMNASTICS. 19 
 
 Lim a "cripple who, cultivating his mind alone, suffers his 
 body to languish through inactivity and sloth." 
 
 If only some of the many advantages resulting from phys- 
 ical exercise were to be procured by any one medicine, 
 nothing in the world would be in so much esteem or more 
 anxiously sought after. But we too often slight the advan- 
 tages which are to be procured by other means than medi- 
 cine, when they can not be obtained without trouble. Hence 
 exercise is neglected, though by attending to it, many of 
 these disorders to which mankind often fall a sacrifice 
 might be prevented. 
 
 There Avas a time, we are told, when diseases were little 
 known; when age was the great infirmity, and death the 
 sole physician. That could only be the case when men by 
 labor or abundant exercise promoted a regular and com- 
 plete circulation of the blood, or by gi'eat exertion freed 
 their bodies from impurities ; or by constant exposure to 
 the open air, were hardened against the changes of the sea- 
 sons, and sufiered no inconvenience from them. By such 
 means as these Ave might consider ourselves completely se- 
 cured against three-fourths of the usual catalogue of diseases. 
 
 The necessity of labor or exercise to promote the regular 
 and complete circulation of the blood is evident from the 
 circumstance that the strength of the heart and arteries 
 alone in a sedentary course of life is by no means suffi- 
 cient to keej) up and perpetuate with sufficient efficacy that 
 circulation throughout the smaller blood-A^essels. The as- 
 sistance and combined force of all the muscles of the body 
 acting at proper intervals are essential for that purpose. 
 Without this extraordinary aid, which can only be procured 
 by exercise, the smaller vessels are in pi'ocess of time choked^ 
 and the delicate springs of our frail machines lose their ac- 
 tivity and become weakened, from which numberless evils 
 
20 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 of the chronic kind, and every species of nervous disorders 
 take their origin. 
 
 Every physician will inform you that the principal source 
 of our well-being arises from the circulation of the fluids, 
 especially the blood. A brisk circulation animates tlie 
 whole man. Even the phlegmatic person is exhilarated 
 when any thing puts his blood in motion. These effects are 
 well known. Continued inactivity weakens the circulation, 
 until at length the blood creeps feebly through its channels, 
 for the heart is not of itself sufficient to give it due impulse 
 to accomplish this necessary result. Muscular movement is 
 likewise requisite. Rest of the body for any great length 
 of time relaxes the muscles, diminishes the vital heat, checks 
 perspiration, injures digestion, enfeebles the whole frame. 
 And thus numberless diseases are induced. There is not 
 a single part of the human machine which a sedentary mode 
 of life does not debilitate ; but the nerves more especially 
 suffer from this cause. 
 
 Sedentary life is the prolific source of a great jDart of 
 those diseases which physicians call Cachectic, the number 
 of which in our country is very great. To prevent these, 
 exercise is the best means : it will strengthen all the ves- 
 sels, preserve the fluids in a healthy state, and in fact give 
 vigorous strength to all the vital powers. The " Cordials," 
 " Balms of Life," " Braces," « Blood Purifiers," " Strength- 
 euers," and so forth, that are so extensively advertised and 
 circulated in and through every large city, only tend to 
 arouse an increased circulation for a few hours ; but their 
 action soon subsides : the stimulus ceases : and they must be 
 repeated in increased quantities, and continued during life. 
 
 The circulation of the blood indeed can only be properly 
 carried on through the medium of exercise or labor. No 
 Art in the shape of medicine can ever become equal to Na- 
 
SAKITAEY BENEFITS OF GYMNASTICS. 21 
 
 ture in this most salutary of all her operations. That 
 sprightly vigor and alacrity of health which we feel and en- 
 •joy in an active course of life; that zest of appetite and 
 refreshment after eating, which sated luxury seeks in vain 
 from art, is entirely owing to new blood made each day 
 from fresh food, prepared and distributed by the joint 
 action of all parts of the body. Not only must the blood 
 be duly circulated, but it must also be cleared from im- 
 purities; and this can only be done or effected by exer- 
 cise. The digestive powers arc strengthened, and by per- 
 spiration the acrid humors are dissipated, which when re- 
 tained in the blood, occasion obstructions arid many other 
 disorders. 
 
 There are no means by which health can be more effect- 
 ually secured than by accustoming the body to be duly 
 exercised, and the muscles properly and regularly exerted ; 
 indeed the advantages resulting from a continued course of 
 gymnastics can not be too highly appreciated. The indo- 
 lent may be compared to rusty macbines, which are soon 
 corroded and desti'oyed: whereas, the active (though they 
 also must ultimately perish), may be said to be always 
 bright and polished, and constantly ready to fulfill any pur- 
 pose for which they were destined. 
 
 It has been observed that what are called " liver com- 
 plaints," and other glandular obstructions, are. much more 
 frequent now than formerly. This is chiefly owing to in- 
 activity, and nothing but exercise can prevent them, ^o 
 long as the liver, the kidneys, and other glands of the body 
 duly perform their respective functions, health is seldom 
 imj^aired, but when they fail it is very difficult to restore it. 
 'Not only is the necessity of exercise in general to be en- 
 forced, but certain and particular exercises are herein laid 
 down, well calculated to prevent xliseases that are at present 
 
22 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 most prevalent. And first, I would mention nervous com- 
 plaints in particular. Nothing but exercise can brace and 
 strengthen the nerves, or prevent the endless train of dis- 
 eases which proceed from a relaxed state of the organs. 
 Persons with feeble arms, weak hips, and weak backs are 
 earnestly recommended to take first, calisthenic exercises, 
 by which means all parts will be improved and strengthen- 
 ed by degrees. This is certainly the surest means of im- 
 parting to them the proper degree of strength necessary to 
 perform with ease and facility the various functions allotted 
 to them. How seldom it is we hear the active or laborious 
 complain of nervous diseases ; these are reserved for the 
 sons of ease and aiSuence. 
 
 It is farther to be observed that the more luxuriously 
 any individual lives, the more he requires exercise ; and 
 that not only of the passive or even of the active, but also 
 of the violent kind. It is impossible for him otherwise to 
 preserve his health, and at the same time indulge in luxuri- 
 ous gratifications. To persons in such a sphere of life, the 
 subject of exercise is of peculiar importance, and requires 
 the most exact attention which they can give it if they are 
 so inclined. Indeed I sometimes think the farmer or me- 
 chanic has no just ground to complain of the extent of his 
 labor, or the hardness of his fate ; for he enjoys a thousand 
 times more real happiness than the inhabitant of the 
 gilded palace who rolls in luxury, and who, for want of la- 
 bor or exercise, is courted in vain by every enticement 
 to repose. 
 
 The effect of the want of bodily exercise upon the mind 
 is a circumstance well entitled to peculiar attention, bad 
 health so often resulting therefrom. Many, as Plato ob- 
 serves, extinguish the divine flame of genius. And it can 
 hardly be doubted that if the body labors under disorders. 
 
SANITARY BENEFITS OF GYMNASTICS. 23 
 
 the mind will be unable to achieve any thing that is great 
 and noble. 
 
 If any thing can at the present day rouse an anxiety in 
 favor of regular exercise and its due application, it must be 
 the effect it had on two of the most celebrated characters 
 of ancient times — Cicero and Caesar, who, without the ad- 
 vantage of a close attention to exercise, might have perish- 
 ed unknown and unregarded. 
 
 Cicero is described by Plutai'ch as being, at one period 
 of his life, extremely thin and slender, and having such a 
 weakness that he could eat but little — in fact he could re- 
 tain scarcely any thing on his stomach : his whole frame 
 being so extremely weak. He traveled to Athens, however, 
 for the recovery of his health, where his body was so 
 strengthened by gymnastic exercises as to become firm and 
 robust; and his voice, which had been harsh, was thorough- 
 ly formed, and rendered sweet, full, and sonorous. 
 
 And of Julius Coesar, the same author informs us that 
 he was originally of a slender habit of body ; his flesh being 
 extremely soft and of a sickly hue ; he was troubled with 
 violent pains in his head, and was subject to epilepsy ; but 
 influenced by the example of Cicero, and a great many oth- 
 ers of his contemporaries, he found in exercise the best 
 medicine for his indisposition, as after them he went through 
 long marches, bore coarse diet, frequent sleej)ing in the fields, 
 and continued for many years exposed to the hardships of 
 Avar. 
 
 With such examples before us, who would not be ani- 
 mated to take exercise, particularly that communicated to 
 the body by means of gymnastics, without which Cicero 
 might never have triumphed at the bar, nor Caesar in the 
 field. It is absurd to imagine that a due attention to exer- 
 cise requires too much time, and is inconsistent with elevated 
 
24. MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 situations or literary fame. By whom Avere greater actions 
 performed and works more conspicuous for mental ability 
 written than by the two distinguished characters above al- 
 luded to ? 
 
 There can be no doubt that exercise, communicated to 
 the whole frame by means of gymnastics and calisthenics, 
 is highly efficacious in many disorders, and the great physi- 
 cian, Hoffinann, in a special treatise on that subject, justly 
 celebrates it as the best of medicine ; and the celebrated 
 poet Dryden asserts that 
 
 "The wise for cure on exercise depend : 
 God never made his work for man to mend." 
 
 There are many instances recorded by ancient authors 
 of the great efficacy of gymnastic exercises in the cure of 
 diseases. Plato tells us that Herodicus was cured of hypo- 
 chondriacal disease by that means. Pausauias relates that 
 Hysmoneus was relieved from great weakness of nerves by 
 addicting himself to similar exercise, and thereby acquired 
 such a degree of vigor as to obtain many prizes at the 
 Olympic Games : and Plutarch says that Laomedon was so 
 perfectly cured of an obstinate disease by the practice of 
 gymnastics, as to excel in running. 
 
 As females are no less subject to hypochondriacal affec- 
 tions than men, and still more to weakness of the nervous 
 system owing to the difference in the habits in which they 
 are educated from their childhood, and to a train of disor- 
 ders incident to the sex, it becomes necessary, in order to 
 counteract the effects of these maladies, and to lay the 
 foundation of sound health, that they should at an early 
 period supply the want of that exercise which the male part 
 of the community is accustomed to take, by those exercises 
 which we call "Calisthenics," as they are better ada2:)ted 
 
SANITARY BENEFITS OF GYMNASTICS. 25 
 
 to their natural delicacy of the frame and constitution. It is 
 not absolutely necessary that all should attend a gymnasi- 
 um ; those who prefer it can take the exercise at home : the 
 apparatus is Very simple and occupies but little space. My 
 " book of instructions will explain to you in the briefest pos- 
 sible form precisely the thing to be done and how to do it ; 
 each and every exercise will be illustrated. By this simple 
 means ladies may thus avoid those evils which, in mature 
 age, so often prove fatal to themselves, and frequently to 
 their progeny, it being impossible for the offspring of an im- 
 healthy mother'to enjoy strength and vigor of constitution. 
 
 Females of the higher classes of society being subject to 
 a variety of complaints from which the lower classes are 
 \(owing to the exercise their situation compels them to take) 
 generally free, it is to them in particular we recommend 
 those exercises as the most effectual means of preventing or 
 removing whatever debilitating tendency there may be in 
 their constitutions. 
 
 In many branches of medicine the ancients were certain- 
 ly inferior to the moderns ; but they treated diseases with 
 great success, for they applied tliemselves with extraordi- 
 nary diligence to acquire a 'thorough knowledge of the 
 symptoms of every disorder, and called in the aid of corpo- 
 ral exercises, by which means they supplied what was want- 
 ing in other remedies. 
 
 The particular diseases in the cure of Avhich gymnastic 
 exercises have been found the most effectual are, 1st, Gout ; 
 2d, Hheumatism ; 3d, Consumption y' Ath, JVervous Disor- 
 ders _; 6th, JBilious Colic ; 6th, Dropsy ; Yth, Palsy ; 8th, 
 Diseases of the Mind ; besides many others. 
 
 Gout. — Sydenham affirms that nothing so effectually pre- 
 vents that disorder of the humors which he considers to be 
 the principal cause of the gout, and consequently strength- 
 
 B 
 
26 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 ens so much the fluids and solids, as exercise. The exercise, 
 however, should be moderate, because those who are chiefly 
 subject to the gout have their spirits too much wasted and 
 their digestive powers are injured, which regular and gentle 
 exercise would strengthen. 
 
 Rheumatism. — The beneficial efiects of gymnastic exer- 
 cises upon this disease, more particularly in its chronic form, 
 have frequently been shown by me in a most satisfactory 
 manner after every other remedy had been tried in vain. 
 Several ladies, who had for a long time been afflicted with 
 that disorder, resolved to try the effects of'calisthenic ex- 
 ercise, and after having persevered in them for a short time 
 they were effectually cured ; their appetite increased, their 
 general health improved, and they became less sensible to' 
 cold or of variation of temperature. 
 
 Consumption. — In most chronic diseases, but especially 
 in consumption, exercise has given relief in a manner almost 
 incredible. Not long since a gentleman whose son was 
 troubled with pains in his left side, and seemed to be 
 threatened with consumption, if it had not actually begun, 
 thought that it might be owing to want of exercise. He 
 was sent to my gymnasium, and I carried him through a 
 complete course, which continued about twelve months, 
 when it became no longer necessary, as his health was per- 
 fectly restored, and all tendency to consumption removed. 
 It is almost unnecessary for me here to observe that the 
 chest became much broader than probably it otherwise 
 Avould have been, in consequence of these exercises. 
 
 Nervous Disorders. — Nothing can surpass the efficacy of 
 exercise in nervous diseases. As the laboring classes of the 
 community are seldom afflicted with these, it is natural to 
 suppose that a resolute course of exercise would be an ef- 
 fectual remedy ; many have been cured by persevering in 
 
SANITARY BENEFITS OF GYMNASTICS. 27 
 
 it ; indeed, before they had practiced it many days, the 
 complaints of several have been removed. 
 
 Bilious Colic. — ^There is no remedy so effectual in this 
 disorder as exercise. By it the morbific matter is brought 
 to the surface of the body, and the blood broken and divided 
 by continual motion, undergoes, as it were, a new depura- 
 tion. The bowels also are greatly strengthened and re- 
 freshed by this mode of rousing the natural heat. 
 
 Dropsy. — There is a species of the dropsy of the ana- 
 sarcous kind, for which exercise is an effectual remedy. The 
 ancients, it would appear, relied much on exercise for the 
 cure of this complaint ; and it is a system which ought 
 more to be attended to now in our day. This subject is 
 very fully treated of in Fuller's Medicina Gymnastica. 
 
 Palsy. — A person threatened with the palsy was order- 
 ed to take a journey to a watering-place for cure. In going 
 dlbwn, he thought he would try the effect of Avalking, 
 haA^ing it always in his power to get into his carriage when 
 he was fatigued ; but he derived so much benefit from the 
 exercise he t^us took, that he was greatly relieved of the 
 disorder before he reached the place of destination. The 
 reader may consult Fuller's Medicina Gymnastica, where he 
 will find that immense numbers with this disease have been 
 cured by vigorous exercise. 
 
 Diseases of the Mind. — The celebrated Hoffmann cured 
 idiotism by exercise ; and according to Descrates the mind 
 depends so much on the constitution and state of the bodily 
 organs, that if any means of increasing sagacity were to be 
 found, they must necessarily be sought for in the art of 
 Medicine, accompanied by a due proportion of exercise. A 
 well-framed and well-exercised body is precisely what fa- 
 cilitates and secures the proper performance of the mental 
 functions ; and a healthy organization of the bodily powers 
 
28 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 is the best foundation for that noble endowment known un- 
 der the name of common-sense (however uncommon in 
 fact it is), or a sound understandmg. 
 
 A number of cures in various other disorders have been 
 performed by exercise. An eminent physician of this city 
 — a friend of the writer's — has collected several cases in 
 which it has been of the highest service, not only in the 
 complaints already mentioned, but also in nervous pains of 
 the stomach, in languor, fever, and the like. 
 
 With regard to the choice of exercise for curing dis- 
 eases, it has been justly remarked that there are many 
 points to be attended to. Every kind of exercise, and every 
 degree of it, is not fit for every constitution ; far less in 
 every complaint, or at all times. Which is the proper sort of 
 exercise to be recommended, must depend upon particular 
 circumstances of habit, age, constitution, or disorder ; and in 
 cases where the whole frame is enfeebled, the advice of an 
 intelligent teacher is not to be neglected. 
 
 Exercise is well entitled in various respects to be consid- 
 ered as a common aid to Physic, — to use a phrase which ^s- 
 culapius originally used ; in fact, when the body is, by ex- 
 ercise, brought into a good state of health, and all the humors 
 are wholesome, should it be attacked by disease it will be 
 more easily restored ; hence it is well observed that we ought 
 undoubtedly to attribute the wonderful success of the ancient 
 physicians in curing diseases with such indifierent materials 
 as their pharmacy afibrded, to th'e patient having his blood 
 in general pure, and his body healthy by an attention to ex- 
 ercise. 
 
PKEPAEATOET EXERCISES. 
 
 29 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 PREPAEATOET EXEECISES IK GYMNASTICS. 
 
 All preparatory exercises have for their object to 
 strengthen and to render pliable the lower extremities, and 
 to accustom the body to a good carriage in general, as well 
 as in single exercises. All instructions in gymnastic exer- 
 cises should begin with them, and every individual have 
 acquired some facility and persistence in performing them, 
 before he passes to the more difficult ones. They are the 
 more valuable because they can be practiced without any 
 instruments, and by a large number at one time. I have 
 given but very few of the motions, from the fact of there 
 being two very excellent works de\^ted entire- 
 ly to this system of exercise : that of Dio Lewis, 
 and " Watson's Calisthenics." 
 
 Posture. — (Figure 1.) Feet and knees close 
 as possible ; body perfectly erect ; breast out- 
 ward. Particular care must be taken to main- 
 tain a correct posture of the upp^r part of the 
 body ; in this way alone the back can be drawn 
 in, the shoulders recede, and a firm and noble 
 posture of the whole body be effected ; hands 
 flat upon the hips, the thumbs backward, fingers 
 forward. Keeping the hands so prevents an 
 unsteady, varying motion of the body ; lips 
 closed. 
 
 ^'s- 1- 1. Stcmding on the fore part of the foot, 
 
 raise the heels from the floor, the joints of the toes strongly 
 
30 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 bent, and the knees stretched. This is to be practiced a 
 number of times. 
 
 2. Walking on tiptoe. The knees must not bend, and 
 the joints of the feet are to be extended considerably; then 
 move to the right, to the left, forward and backward to 
 place. 
 
 3. Ho]pping with the knees stiff. The body is raised by 
 the elastic motion of the joints of the toes — with the knees 
 slightly bent, but are stretched as soon as the toes have left 
 the floor ; both kinds of hopping are to be practiced on the 
 spot — forward, backward, to the right, to the left. 
 
 4. Kicking. — (Figure 2.) Striking the breech \i^th the 
 heels. This motion promotes the flexibility of the knees still 
 more than hopping. First with the right, then with the 
 left, then with both at the same time on the spot, moving 
 from the place with short jumps and good carriage of the 
 body, to right, to left, forward, backward, standing upon 
 one foot, aifd striking the breech with it. 
 
 6. The contracted posture of the body, the knees ap- 
 proaching the breast ; the upper part of the body is perpen- 
 dicular, the thighs horizontal, aiKl the heels close to the 
 breech. Move from place to right, to left, forward, back- 
 ward. This exercise is very fatiguing on account of the 
 strong bend of the knees ; but at the same time it very 
 much increases their flexibility. The same exercises with 
 one knee" drawn up toward the breast. Endeavor, if possible, 
 to preserve the balance of the body. 
 
 6. Hopping on onefoot^ with the right foot, the left car- 
 ried ; the left, right carried behind the left. The move- 
 ments are made forward, backward, to the right, and to the 
 left. This exercise can be practiced (1st) over a certain 
 width ; (2d) over a certain height ; (8d) upon or from an 
 elevation. 
 
PEEPAKATOEY EXEECISES. 
 
 31 
 
 Fig. 2. 
 
 Fig. 4. 
 
 Fig. 3. 
 
 Exercises of the arms. — (Figure 3.) Raise 
 the arms sidewise to a perpendicular posi- 
 tion, back to place — directly in front the 
 same. Each motion should be done a num- 
 ber of times with the hands close to the 
 chest, elbows near the body; thrust both 
 arms out in front ; back to the chest ; out 
 sidewise ; to the chest ; straight up ; to 
 chest ; down by the side. Close the' right 
 hand, and whirl it round a number of times ; 
 left the same ; now both, first right, then 
 left. 
 
 Raise (Figure 4) the arms, as in Figure 4 ; 
 now bend to the right, then to the left, for- 
 ward, backward. Be sure and keep the 
 knees straight, bending only the hips — this 
 is a splendid exercise for the liver. 
 
 Bring the hands up over the head, elbows 
 
32 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 straight ; now bend forward and touch the floor with the 
 hands. Do it a number of times ; the arms in front, elbows 
 straight, hands closed ; swing them first to the right, then 
 to the left, twisting the body in the hips at 
 the same time. Hands upon the chest; 
 raise on the toes, then lower the body; 
 at the same moment extend the arms over 
 the head ; now raise the body, and bring 
 the arms down to the chest. Repeat a 
 number of times. 
 
 Next (Figure 5) place the hands upon 
 the hips ; lower the body until the heels 
 Fig. 5. touch the breech, and hop. This is an ex- 
 
 cellent exercise for the ankles and knees. 
 
 The Cane or Wand Exercise. 
 The plain or ordinary motions of the wand are so well 
 known that I will content myself with giving a few of the 
 more complicated or difficult ones. To do those motions 
 well, you ought to have acquired 
 sufficient strength to preserve the 
 balance on one leg Avithout chang- 
 ing the position of the body, for 
 they require peculiar flexibility 
 and ease in the motions of the 
 muscles. Holding the wand in 
 the hands (as in Figure 6), take one 
 step forward with the right foot, 
 throwing the weight of the body 
 on it ; raise the left leg from the 
 floor. Raise the wand to the 
 height of the breast ; pass the left leg in front, without touch- 
 ing the floor; raise the Avand at the same time above the 
 
 Fig. 0. 
 
PEEPAEATOEY EXEECISES. 33 
 
 head, and lower it on the shoulders ; raise it again and pass 
 the leg behind to place. Repeat the same with right leg. 
 It should be performed at first very slowly. 
 
 The same movement should now be performed with the 
 arms ; Jbut in place of the foot going in front, it goes side- 
 wise, with knee straight ; first right, then left. 
 
 Right foot in front; raise the left l^g; pass the wand 
 over the head behind, and touch the small of the back; 
 bring the hands in front again. Do the same Avith the left 
 foot. 
 
 Right foot in front ; raise the left leg behind ; stretch 
 the arms over the head; now bring the right hand down 
 to the right side, the left straight up. The wand must be 
 perpendicular. The same with the other foot, changing the 
 wand to the other side. 
 
 Raise the wand over the head, the arms stretched ; lower 
 behind on a line with the shoulders ; turn to the left, bring- 
 ing the left leg forward with the left shoulder ; continue 
 without bending the arms ; same with the other leg, taking 
 care to keep the arms straight, and not to touch the floor 
 with the foot. 
 
 Right foot in front ; raise the left behind ; lower the 
 left hand, and raise the right ; pass the wand over the head, 
 and .touch the small of the back. Then raise the left hand, 
 and bring the wand to its place ; change the foot and per- 
 form the same movement. This makes a complete revolu- 
 tion of the body with the arms. Do this a number of times. 
 It is excellent for the shoulder muscles. 
 
 Raise on the right foot, the left arm being bent, and the 
 fore-arm in front, the right arm stretched at full length. 
 Raise the left leg, knee bent ; now extend the left arm and 
 left leg at the same instant. Do the same Avith the right 
 arm and right leg. 
 
 B* 
 
34 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 Holding the wand as in Figure 6, the right foot in front, 
 rise on it, at the same time bringing up the hand to a hori- 
 zontal position in front; extend the left hand and arm at 
 full length to the left side ; bring the right hand against the 
 breast ; raise the left leg, the knee bent ; lower the left arm, 
 turning the body a little ; lower the right arm, and bring 
 the wand to place^ Do the same with the other foot and 
 arm. 
 
 The arms extended, right foot in front ; raise the left leg, 
 with the wand to the height of the eyes ; then lower it to 
 the right, bringing the right arm extended behind at full 
 length, and the left hand opposite the right shoulder ; lower 
 it at full length in front ; raise the right arm, passing it 
 against the left slioulder and over the head. Repeat the 
 same motion with the left leg, taking care to extend well 
 the body every time the arms go behind. 
 
 These exercises can be performed in walking, as when 
 the arms make the backward motions the feet make the for- 
 ward, and the reverse. Also to the right and left ; asjthe 
 right foot goes to the right sidewise, the left arm will' go to 
 the left. 
 
 Exercises for the Tipper Part of the Body and 8>pine. 
 
 First Position. — You lie on the back, keeping the body 
 stiff, the arms extended and close to the sides, the legs and 
 heels in the same line, without moving the latter. Then 
 very slowly raise the upper part of the body in a perpendic- 
 ular line, and remain seated ; then resume the former posi- 
 tion without moving the lower extremities. The same ex- 
 ercise may be performed crossing the arms on the breast, 
 arms folded ; also, with the arms extended above J^he head. 
 The arms are brought forward at the same time, and in a 
 line with the shoulders. Resume the first position. 
 
PEEPAKATOEY EXEECISES. 
 
 35 
 
 Loioer Extremities. — From tlie former position raise the 
 right leg perjaendicularly, without moving any other part of 
 the body, and lower it again to first position. Now the 
 left leg; both legs at the same time. Practice this a 
 number of times, and when you have acquired sufficient 
 strength in the dorsal region, you should endeavor to raise 
 gently the lower extremities, and the back, and touch the 
 floor behind the head with the toes, keeping both arms ex- 
 tended, and resting on the floor. Again return to first 
 position ; then by allowing the legs to descend gently, 
 the knees continuing stretched, you remain seated on the 
 floor. 
 
 After having thus exercised the muscles of the anterior 
 part of the body, you will next exercise those of the poste- 
 rior part by contrary efforts, which I will here describe. 
 
 Descending and resting, being placed with the face 
 downward, extended and supported by the strength of the 
 arms and toes (as in Figure 7), the hands turned inward must 
 
 allow the body to 
 sink slowly, bending 
 the arms gently, and 
 still keeping the 
 body extended, 
 without, however, 
 permitting the stom- 
 a's- 7. ach to touch the 
 floor. Now kiss the right hand, then the left, and return 
 to the first position very slowly. This should be repeated 
 several times, and quite gently. 
 
 Being in the same position as in the former exercise, 
 place the right hand under the right hip, keej)ing the left in 
 its place, the ends of the fingers inward. Now allow the 
 body to sink toward the floor gently, bending the arms. 
 
36 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 and keeping the Ibody extended on the toes, and touch the 
 left hand with the Hps. Return to the first position, and 
 perform the same with the other hand. This exercise calls 
 into action many of the anterior and posterior muscles that 
 upright exercises fail to touch. 
 
 From the first position draw up the knees, straighten 
 the arms, and pass the legs between them ; come to rest upon 
 the heels ; the hands must not move from the spot. Now 
 back again on the toes and hands. 
 
 Dumh-Bell Exercises. 
 
 These exercises have many advantages. They occupy 
 little space, and can be used at any time. For improving 
 the biceps and shoulders, there is perhaps nothing better. 
 The first motions should be with bells not exceeding five 
 lbs. in weight. 
 
 Position. — Heels together, knees straight, shoulders 
 square, head erect, arms hanging naturally by the sides ; 
 bell in each hand. 
 
 Motions. — (1.) Bring the arms up in front to a horizon- 
 tal position ; back to place. (2.) Sidewise to a horizontal. 
 Place. (3.) Straight up in front to a perpendicular. Place. 
 (4.) Sidewise to a perpendicular. Place. (5.) Both bells 
 to the chest ; strike out in front, right, left ; then with both 
 at same time. (6.) Strike out sideways. Place. (7.) 
 Straight up over the head, first right, then left, then both. 
 (8.) Bells to the side. Now bring them to the chest ; thrust 
 them out sideways ; back to the chest ; up over the head; to 
 the chest ; out in front ; to the chest. Repeat a number of 
 times. (9.) Bend the knees until the bells touch the floor ; 
 rise, bringing the bells to the chest, and from there straight 
 up over the head. When the arms are up, the body should 
 be on the ball of the foot. (10.) Bells by the side. Rise 
 
PEEPAEATOKY EXEECISES. 
 
 37 
 
 on the toes and swing the bells up (as in Figure 8), bending 
 well the back. This can also be done by bending forward, 
 .^■<-.t\jrVv-. ^1^*^ permitting the bells in the loAver 
 
 '-^\ \ \ "\ swing to go well behind ; also by pass- 
 
 \ \' \ inn the bells between the legs. (11.) 
 
 \ Bells at the side. Swing them first to 
 \ the right, then to the left, without 
 1 moving th^ feet. The body should 
 / turn at the hips only. (12.) Place 
 two ten or fifteen pound bells at the 
 feet ; face to the left, the feet at right 
 angles ; step back with the left foot 
 from sixteen to eighteen inches, the 
 left hand upon the hips. Remember 
 the toe of the righffoot must point 
 toward the bell. Now stoop and 
 grasp the bell with the right. Curl it 
 and put it up over the head (Figure 
 9), down again and touch the floor. 
 In stoopmg forward, the left 
 knee should be straight. Re- 
 peat five or ten times ; then 
 change the position by fac- 
 ing to the right, the left foot 
 taking the place of the right, 
 and the left hand perform- 
 ing the same movement the 
 same number of times. 
 Again change to the left, 
 and grasp with each hand. 
 Put up over the head ; turn 
 to the right, and do the same. 
 These are the very best mo- 
 
38 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 tious with the bells, as they exercise all the muscles of the 
 arms, chest, and legs. 
 
 Exercise with One Sell. 
 (13.) Bell from five to tweut}Maounds in weight, accord- 
 ing to natural strength. Bell in right hand ; back of hand 
 touching the thigh, right foot advanced slightly in front. 
 Bring the bell to the shc^ulder by the strength of the arm, 
 without swinging the arm or body. Repeat from five to 
 fifty times ; then change, and perform the same with the 
 left, the left foot advanced. (14.) Bell in right hand, the 
 hand touching the shoulder ; thrust it straight up five or 
 fifty times ; the same with the left. Remember the hand 
 that is not exercising remains fixed 
 upon the hip. (15.) Bell in right 
 hand, arm extended ; bring it to the 
 shoulder, then straight up, down to 
 the shoulder and thigh ; the same 
 motion with the left hand. There 
 must be no swinging of the body. 
 
 Suspended Rings. 
 
 (1.) Rings as high as you can 
 reach. 'Swing with the arms ex- 
 tended, as in Figure 10. (2.) Place 
 the arms in the rings as far as the 
 elbow, clasping the hands in front, 
 and swing. (3.) At the shoulder 
 or armpits, with arms bent or ex- 
 tended ; swing. (4.) Body hang- 
 ing straight, bring the legs up until 
 the body forms a letter L. (5.) 
 Rings as high as the shoulder, toes 
 
 Fig. 10. 
 
PKEPAEATORY EXERCISES. 
 
 39 
 
 touching the floor. Swing to 
 the front, to the rear, to the 
 right, to the left. The toes 
 must not be moved from the 
 spot ; now revolve to the right, 
 to the left. (6.) Kings as high 
 as you can reach. Keep the 
 body straight, and draw up as 
 high as possible five times, let- 
 ting down very slowly. (7.) 
 Rings the same as in Figure 1 ; 
 turn completely over and back, 
 as in Figure 11. (8.) From 
 position of Figure 11 extend 
 
 the legs so that the body will be 
 
 straight, the head down ; now 
 
 shorten the arms, and lower the 
 
 body by straightening them 
 
 again. (9.) Grasp the rings. 
 
 Swing the feet up, and as they 
 
 reach the rings put the toes into 
 
 them, bend the knees, extend the 
 
 arms, and curve the back. 
 
 (10.) Draioing up. — This re- 
 quires strength and some little 
 
 degree of skill. The rings sliould 
 
 be as high as one can reach ; draw ,-' ;' 
 
 up from the hang-grasp below the \ I \ 
 
 rings to the support-grasp above, 
 
 as in Figure 12. 
 
 (11.) Forward and hack hori- 
 zontal.— (j;X2i%^ the rings from 
 
 the outside ; swing the body up ; Fig. 12. 
 
40 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 now set every muscle in the arms and body. Keep tlie 
 whole body perfectly straight, and come down to the posi- 
 tion seen in Figure 13. This is the forward. Next swing 
 up and hold the same with the face down. This is some- 
 times done without any swing, but the effort is much greater 
 and requires a greater degree of strength. 
 
 (12.) From the support, as in Figure 12, push one of the 
 rings from the 
 body sidewise ; 
 the ring close to 
 the body sustains 
 three -fourths of 
 theweight of the 
 body. First the 
 right hand, then 
 the left. (13.) 
 From the sup- 
 port, as in Fig- 
 ure 12, bring the legs up, without bending the knees, un- 
 til they form a right angle with the body ; now let them 
 down slowly. Repeat. This same movement should* be 
 
 made with the rings 
 at the elbow, keeping 
 the ropes close in to 
 the shoulder; also 
 with head below, the 
 rings being supported 
 by the elbows, and 
 again from the shoul- 
 der. Position, 
 
 (14.) Rings as high 
 ^'s- 14. jjg ^-j^Q i-each. Swing 
 
 strong, and change from the hang-grasp below the rings to 
 
PEEPAEATOKY EXEECISES. 
 
 41 
 
 the suiiport above, as in Figure 14. (15.) Rings as high as 
 the reach. Take the high swing by throwing the legs up as 
 in Figure 11, when the swing is backward ; and out, with 
 full force, when forward. If this is done right you may touch 
 a twenty feet ceiling in three springs. 
 
 Leaping or JFwnping. 
 
 The jump is to be taken from the ball of the foot, never 
 by the whole foot. In starting 
 the feet should be closed, and in 
 coming down the shock is to be 
 broken by bending the joints of 
 the knees, hips, and feet, and by a 
 slight inclination forward. 
 
 The Leap from the sp>ot, or Stand- 
 ing Jump loith Running. — In per- 
 forming this, you bend the knees 
 quickly; then rise, drawing the 
 knees toward the breast. 
 
 The Leap loith a Preparatory 
 Spring. — You stand two paces 
 from the place of leaping ; leap first 
 "with feet closed upon that place, 
 and then spring in the manner de- 
 scribed in the preceding exercise. '^' 
 
 The Leap loith Running. — ^You take a run of ten or fifteen 
 paces. The run can be taken swiftly or slowly. At the 
 moment of reaching the place of leaping, one foot is placed 
 upon it, the other thrown forward. The first gives the 
 start from the ground, and joins the other as quickly as 
 possible, so that both feet are joined before one-half of the 
 leap is accomplished. The body should rise after each step 
 like a spi'ing. No exercise increases the elasticity of the 
 
42 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 lower limbs more than this. Good level ground is re- 
 quired. Dexterity, swiftness, duration, and good appear- 
 ance, are the principal objects. 
 
 The High Leap. — Two leaping stands are required, six 
 feet high, and about the same distance apart. The stands 
 have holes with iron pegs, over which a cord is placed. 
 The different degrees of height may be arranged by the fol- 
 io win sr scale : 
 
 The hei 
 
 ght of the knees. 
 
 
 C t( 
 
 thighs. 
 
 
 « " 
 
 hips. 
 
 
 i u 
 
 jDit of stomach. 
 
 
 I If 
 
 f If 
 
 shoulders, 
 chin, 
 mouth, 
 eyes. 
 
 
 f 11 
 
 crown of head. 
 
 Most persons learn by little practice to jump as high as 
 the pit of the stomach; but very few as high as the crown 
 of the head. 
 
 Long and High Jumping. — This is composed of the 
 two preceding kinds — only increase the distance of the 
 place of s^Dringing. Lower or raise the cord accordingly, 
 but it must be practiced with great care, witli sloAV increase 
 of height and length. 
 
 Breast Liars. 
 
 These are excellent for expanding the chest. Place the 
 hands upon the bars (as in Figure 16), the feet close together, 
 and from twelve to fifteen inches to the rear. Throw the 
 body forward upon the arms, rising on the toes at the same 
 time ; the knees being kept straight, the stomach drawn in, 
 the breast out. Repeat this movement from fifty to 
 
PEEPAEATOET EXEECISES. 
 
 43- 
 
 five hundred times. Climbing movements can also be prac- 
 ticed on these bai'S, going up hand 
 over hand — with both hands at a time 
 with the knees bent — with the body 
 bent at the hips, knees straight, etc., 
 etc. 
 
 Inclined Poles. 
 
 Grasp each pole as high as the 
 reach, throw the right leg over the 
 right pole, the left over the left, and 
 raise the body by moving first the 
 right hand, then the left. Climb with 
 thehands alone, the body kej)t straight; 
 with both hands at the same time ; 
 upon one pole, hand over hand ; right 
 hand and left leg ; left hand and right 
 log ; both hands moving up at the same 
 instant ; uj)on both bars, body bent at 
 the knees, hand over hand ; bent at the 
 hips, hand over hand. Raise the body until the arms are 
 bent; then swing through and come to stand on the out- 
 side of the bars ; to the right ; to the left. The same mo- 
 tion except when the swing is over the right bar. Hold on 
 with the right hand and revolve around without touching 
 the feet to the floor ; the same with the left. 
 
 rig. 10, 
 
 Exercises on the Single Har. 
 (1.) Hanging on hands or arms before the body (Figure 
 19). The arms being extended or bent on the lower part 
 of the arms at the same time ; first the right, then the left — 
 upper part of the arms (Figure 20) as in the figure or 
 straight out in front ; grasping from either side, the arms 
 being either stretched or bent. It is well to practice these 
 
44 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 different kinds of hanging in order to ascertain your coni- 
 
 ng. IT. Fig. IS. 
 
 parative strength. By this means the ujpper or more diffi- 
 cult motions will come much easier. 
 
 From the position of cross-hanging, touch the feet to the 
 bar, hanging close to the bar as in Figure 19, throw the 
 legs up and touch the bar with the toes. From the same 
 position touch the knees. From the same throw the legs 
 over the bar. As the legs go up, shorten the arms, as in 
 Figure 21. 
 
 I think it quite unnecessary to enumerate all the exer- 
 cises of hanging close to the bar, because they are so easily 
 taken from former motions. 
 
 I may however mention the hanging with one arm, with 
 one hand, and one leg, as in Figure 22 ; hanging with arms 
 
PEEPAEATOEY EXEECISES. 
 
 45 
 
 extended (Figure 19). The body is entirely turned, so that 
 
 the stomach is toward the 
 floor or ground. Change 
 the hands on the bar, keep 
 the knees straight, and re- 
 turn to the first position. 
 This motion of hanging 
 on should be practiced a 
 number of times, in order 
 to obtain confidence. 
 
 Position of Figure 19. 
 Swing on the bar; change 
 the hands ; straighten the 
 arms ; place the right knee 
 upon the bar and swing 
 back to place. The same 
 motion with left knee; 
 with both knees -at same 
 time ; the same motion in 
 swinging up, but instead 
 of the knee, place the right ankle upon the bar ; back to 
 place. Then the left, then both. The first motion again ; 
 swing up ; straighten well the arms, the hands well enough 
 only to admit the body to pass through ; place the ball of 
 the right foot upon the bai", and return to place. The same 
 with the left ; then with both. The feet in the last motion 
 are on the outside of the hands, hanging with arms bent 
 and moving to the right, to the left. 
 
 Similar to these are hanging by the knees and moving to 
 the right, to the left; swinging from position in Figure 19, 
 and changing the grasp. You swing on one side of the bar, 
 and make a half revolution around its axis by the revolu- 
 tion of the body and changing of the hands. 
 
46 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 In all kinds of exercise on the bar in the hanging position, 
 great care should be taken by the beginner to keep the legs 
 stretched and closed, and the toes pointed. 
 
 The pi-actice of raising the body as high as possible by 
 
 Fig. 20. Fig. 21. 
 
 drawing up must not be forgotten ; for herein, without 
 
 some dexterity, no exercise, without first starting from a 
 
 spring, can be well performed. 
 
 In grasping,Vas in 
 Figure 19, by the 
 strength of the arms 
 alone, one must 
 raise' the body to 
 the eyes, to the 
 mouth, to the chin, 
 to the breast. The 
 Fig. 22. body, during this 
 
 exercise, can be bent in one knee, bent in both knees, and 
 
PREPARATORY EXERCISES. 47 
 
 hips, or bent in the hips alone, which is by far the most dif- 
 ficult. 
 
 Those who wish to learn the difficult feat of raising the 
 body by one arm, will first practice the hanging with one 
 hand, the arm being bent, and letting down slowly. This is 
 the correct exercise preparatory for it. The feat consists in 
 drawing the body up, which is one of the most difficult of 
 exercises. The practice is to let the body down from that 
 position. 
 
 In exercises with the upper part of the body above the 
 bar, the arms are straight; lower the arms until the fore-arm 
 touches the bar; then raise them or straighten them one 
 after the other; next straighten both at the same instant; 
 now move from the right to left, with arms straight. 
 
 The body being suspended, swing the right knee on the 
 bar, the left leg being straight ; take a strong swing, bring- 
 ing the right thigh upon the bar. You are in a sitting po- 
 sition. Now change the hands ; crook the knee ; grasp the 
 bar firm, and make a revolution around the bar. This may 
 be done forward or backward, with right, left, and both 
 knees hanging on the bar. 
 
 Loioering and liaising . — Resting on the arras before the 
 body, bend gradually so low that the mouth touches the 
 bar, as in Figure 23. Place. Arms behind the body ; bend 
 gradually so low that the lower part of the shoulders touch- 
 es the bar, extending the right arm along the bar ; then the 
 left arm. 
 
 The swinging up on the bar can be varied so that the 
 upper arms, lower arms, hands, one or both, rest upon the 
 bar, on the right or left side, close together or separated by 
 the hanging leg, with the grasp from above, beneath, or on 
 either side. Thus over one hundred difierent kinds of ex- 
 ercises in this particular branch are possible. 
 
48 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 Two more kinds of swinging up, not described above, 
 should be mentioned. These are : with arms crossed ; with 
 taking hold of the knee beneath the bar, to the right, left, 
 
 Fig. £3. Fig. 24. 
 
 and both. The motion is performed forward and backward. 
 Hanging close to the bar, arms behind the body, small of 
 the back touching the bar, with a strong swing with the 
 legs make a complete revolution around the bar, once or 
 several times forward, or backward, which is much more 
 difficult. 
 
 Swinging round. — The arms being before the body as in 
 Figure 24, the stomach must be as close to the bar as pos- 
 sible. In swinging round by taking hold of the thighs, 
 lean on the stomach, the hands take hold of the thighs, the 
 bar between the arms and body. Another kind of swing- 
 ing round is by the arms being behind the body, the lower 
 part of the arms on the bar, as in Figure 25. Swing one or 
 several times around the bar, forward and backward. 
 
 In swinging round from the position of Figure 20, for- 
 ward or backward, bend the arms at the elbows — right 
 
PEEPARATORY ' EXERCISES. 
 
 49 
 
 fore-arm over left, and grasp firmly the bar ; swing the legs 
 and revolve around. Hanging down from the knees (Figure 
 26), move the body by means of a swing ; loose hold of 
 
 from the seat on the bar 
 
 Fig. 25. Fig. 20. 
 
 the knees, and drop oh the feet. This can also be done 
 
 also from the seat the " knee- 
 will" is performed, revolving 
 around the bar by catching the 
 knees and swinging. 
 
 Sioinging through. — Take 
 hold of the bar, as in Figure 
 19; carry the legs up under 
 the bar between the hands or 
 arms ; shorten the arms, stretch 
 the body as in Figure 27, and 
 the small of the back will be 
 upon the bar. Now straighten 
 the arms, and you will be seat- 
 ed upon the bar. Change the hands upon the bar, and let 
 
 C 
 
 Fig. 2T. 
 
50 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 the body glide from the bar, bendiug the arms as much 
 as possible. Now straighten them again and regain your 
 seat upon the bar. Being seated upon the bar, hands in 
 front, throw back strongly, catching the knees on the bar, 
 and revolve. Change the hands, the knees the same ; swing 
 to the front, and revolve. 
 
 In swinging by the knees, as in Figure 26, and when the 
 position is reversed, the head above the bai', let go the 
 knees and catch with the arms, as in Figure 25. In the 
 same exercise with the knees, swing strongly, and when the 
 shoulders are above the bar, let go the knees ; make a half 
 turn quickly, and catch the bar with the hands. 
 
 From the position in Figure 1 9, work the hands well 
 over the bar, and draw up until you come to rest upon the 
 hands above. The body must be kept close to the bai', the 
 elbows on a line with the shoulder. Now bring the hands 
 close together, the elbows touching the body, and force the 
 legs up. This is the start for the Giant Swing, and with some 
 practice you will also be enabled to balance yourself there. 
 
 From first position swing up on the bar ; change the 
 hands, placing them between the legs ; elbows near the 
 body. Straighten the arms, and spread the legs as wide as 
 possible. Swing forward, catching the ankle on the bar, 
 and revolve around. The arms should be kept straight. 
 
 Swinging backward, grasp the bar, as in Figure 19, and 
 swing strongly the legs and body. As the body is level 
 with the bar on the backward swing, let go the hands, and 
 gi-asp again. Then strike the leg with right hand ; grasg 
 again ; left hand the same ; then both. This is a very quick 
 motion, and requires much practice in order to do it well. 
 Another motion is by changing from forward to backward. 
 To do this well the back must be drawn in, and the grip 
 made quick and sure. 
 
PKEPAEATOET EXERCISES. 
 
 61 
 
 I have enumerated and described some of the more sim- 
 ple and easy exercises on the single bar, but those who are 
 able to do them well will find no difficulty in performing 
 others that are perhaps more complicated. The Giant 
 Swing is perhaps the most difficult motion that is perform- 
 ed on the single bar. It is to make the revolution with 
 arms and body perfectly straight, forward and backward. 
 
 Exercises on the Parallel Bars. 
 1st Motion. — Standing at the end. of the bars, each hand 
 taking hold of one bai', as in Figure 28, the performer 
 
 Fig. 29. 
 
 springs up so that the arms are stretched as in Figure 29 ; 
 descends as soon as he has reached that height ; starts again, 
 and so on a number of times. 
 
 2c? Motiofi. — Rest on the arms as in Figure 29. Falling 
 forward of the upper part of the body is to be avoided. 
 The whole body should form a perpendicular line. 
 
MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 Sd Motion. — Lowering and raising the body slowly, 
 bend the arras at first a very little ; by degrees so low that 
 the arm-pits approach the hands ; then rise again. Prac- 
 tice this a number of times. 
 
 4th Motion. — Lowering and touching the mouth to the bar, 
 to the right, to the left ; behind the right arm, behind the left. 
 5th Motion. — Position as in Figure 29. Draw uj) the 
 right leg horizontal with the bar, the knee straight ; then (6) 
 the left ; then both at the same time. From same position 
 pass (7) the right leg, keeping it straight, over left bar ; left 
 leg over right bar ; now (8) both over each bar. This is a 
 very difiicult exercise, but excellent for the spine. (9.) The 
 lowering and rising motions can also be done with the 
 thumbs on the outside, and fingers on the inside. 
 
 10th Motion. — Lowering upon the elbows from j)osition 
 of Figure 29, bend one arm after the other so as to rest 
 with the whole lower part of the arras on the bars. Now 
 rise again, one arm after the other. Sink first with right, 
 then left. (11.) Now bend both arms at the same time. 
 Rise again to the starting position. 
 
 12i;A Motion. — ^Take position as in Figure 29, in the mid- 
 dle of the bars ; raise both legs 
 forward; draw the stomach 
 in, and rest them on the bars 
 in a straddling position, as 
 in figure (13). Now move 
 through the bars with the for- 
 ward swing, then the back- 
 ward (1 4) . In the latter the legs 
 come behind the arms. Next. 
 (15) swing with the legs closed, 
 over the right bar, over left — 
 ^'^^■^^- forward— backward. (16.) Li 
 
PREPAEATOKY EXERCISES. 53 
 
 swinging fi'om the bars, (I'J) when the legs are raised above 
 the bar, they pass over it and you alight on the outside of the 
 bars. It is to be practiced over the right bar, over the left 
 bar. (18.) When the legs are raised backward they pass 
 over the bar, and you alight on the outside, the same as the 
 forward motion. 
 
 19th Jlotion. — This consists in moving along upon the 
 hands. This motion should be performed without bending 
 or shaking the legs, or drawing up the back, but only by 
 the elastic movement or spring of the joints of the hands. 
 The body should be kept perfectly straight and steady 
 during the whole movement. 
 
 20t/i Motion. — Take position of Figure 29. Keep 
 the elbows stiff. Now move the right hand, then the left, 
 then both at the same time. This can be done with arms 
 bent, but is more difficult ; also (21) with the legs bent at 
 the hips. This exercise is sometimes performed, the legs 
 (22) being raised above the bar. But before this can be 
 done, much practice must be taken in the previous motions. 
 
 23f? 3£otion. — This consists in changing the seat. From 
 position of Figure 29, the legs, closed and stretched, are 
 thrown from one bar upon the other, or on the same bar 
 from before the hands to behind them. Now (24), bend 
 the arms and perform the same motions ; again bend them 
 still more, (25) the elbows reaching over the shoulders. 
 
 The arms bent (26), the lower part of them resting on the 
 bars, from the right bar before the hands to the left behind 
 the hands. The arms bent (27), the legs closed, swing over 
 the bar before the arms; the hand opposite to the side 
 where the descent is made pushing strongly off, so that you 
 come to stand on the outside of the bars. This is done also 
 (28) with the fore-arm resting upon the bars. In swinging 
 off make the arch as high and as far from the bars as possible. 
 
54 MANUAL OP PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 29^/i Motion. — Position as in Figure 29. Put the lower 
 limbs in a vibrating motion. In swinging forward the 
 stomach is drawn in and the hips bent. In swinging back- 
 
 rig. 31. 
 ■ward the back is drawn in ; an upright and unaffected car- 
 riage of the head, pressing down, and keeping back the 
 shoulders, are the principal points to be attended to. 
 
 There are very many kinds of swinging, but I shall men- 
 tion only tbose that give the" most exercise, and at the same 
 time bring the greatest number of muscles into action. 
 
 Swinging forward and back with arms stretched ; with 
 bending the arms. The moment when the body, swinging 
 backward, has passed between the arms, they begin to bend 
 as soon as can possibly be done without turning over, and 
 stretch again as soon as the legs begin to swing forward, 
 so that the arms are stretched just when the body passes 
 between them. With bending the arms forward and back- 
 ward (30) a combination of the preceding. In order to 
 perform this exei'cise, it is necessary to have the arms 
 stretched each time w^hen the body is passing be^tween 
 them. With bending the arms (31) in the middle of the 
 swing backward and forward ; particular attention must be 
 paid to having the arms stretched at the beginning and end 
 of each swing. With straddling (32) at the end of each 
 swing, forward and backward, touching the feet each time. 
 
PREPARATORY EXERCISES. 
 
 55 
 
 With kicking (33) at the end of each swing. The legs are 
 bent at the knees and hips, and thrown out when the swing 
 has reached the highest point. It must be practiced at first 
 with caution, because the kicking gives a violent shake to 
 the whole body, especially the arms. 
 
 It is well to practice the difficult kinds of swinging at 
 first at the end of the bars. 
 
 34:th Motion. — Consists in moving along upon the hands 
 with swinging from position of Figure 29. Swing forward, 
 and at the same time move the hands along the bars ; con- 
 tinue this movement till you reach the end. The fewer 
 strides the better. The same (35) backward with arms 
 
 Fig. 32. 
 
 straight. The same (36) forward with arms bent, back- 
 ward with arms bent, as in figure 32. 
 The position (37), Figure 29, at the end of the bars, theface 
 
56 MAjq-UAL OP PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 outward; take a strong swing backward, so high as to 
 turn over, and to come to stand before the bars. This exer- 
 cise should at first be performed with the assistance of some 
 person to take hold of the arm. 
 
 (38.) From position of Figure 29 lower the body, 
 both fore-arms coming on the bars. Now reverse the body, 
 swinging the feet up, the head down, the arms remaining 
 the same Avith firm grip of the. hands. 
 
 (39.) Standing between ; the bars, extend both arms 
 over each bar at the armpits ; swing the legs, and so move 
 along. 
 
 (40.) From position of figure 29. swing backward, toes 
 turned out, catching the bars on the inside of both feet, 
 keeping the knees and arms stiff. Now bend the arms, 
 straighten them again a number of times ; also by kissing 
 the right and left bar. 
 
 (41.) From the same position swing backward, bringing 
 the right leg around the right arm, and on the inside of the 
 bar, the arms remaining in the position, and the body 
 parallel with the bars. 
 
 (42.) Grasping the bars from beneath, hands on outside, 
 draw the body up until it forms a letter L. 
 
 (43.) From the same grasp, draw the legs up ; turn the 
 toes out, and catch them on each bar, the stomach being 
 toward the floor. 
 
 (44.) The same grasp. Draw the. legs up, and turn com- 
 pletely over, touching the feet to the floor, and return to place. 
 
 (45.) Perform the same motion with knees straight, feet 
 in front, arms extended, over and back. 
 
 (46.) Stand upon the outside of the bars; shorten the 
 arms; swing thejegs up through and over the opposite bar, 
 coming to a stand with the back to the bar ; or by catch- 
 ing the arms on the bar, before the feet touch the floor. 
 
PREPAEATOET EXEECISES. 57 
 
 (47.) From the seat on the bar, the body being parallel, 
 l^ut the toes under the opposite bar and bend backward. 
 The back can be so strengthened by this motion, that in a short 
 time a heavy weight can be raised by the hands from the 
 floor to the sitting position, and back, a number of times. 
 
 (48.) Standing at the bars as in Figure 28, lower the body 
 until the bands receive all the weight, then raise up slowly 
 until you come to rest above the bars, up&n t-he hands, with 
 arms straight, as in Figure 29. 
 
 (49.) Being seated on the bar, the body parallel, place 
 the hands upon the opposite bar; set th-e muscles of tlie 
 arms and shoulders ; draw up the knees ; slide down until 
 the shoulders take the bar, and throw the feet straight up, 
 the head being upon the outside of the bar. From this po- 
 sition, bend the legs until the feet are on a line with the 
 head. Back to place. 
 
 (50.) Legs upon the outside of the bars; bend forward, 
 doubling up well ; place the arms upon the bars, between 
 the shoulder and elbow ; throw the head down, and revolve 
 along the bars a number of times. 
 
 (51.) From position of Figure 29 swing over the right 
 bar, keeping the hands fixed in their place ; bend slightly 
 the arms, the elbow of the right coming under the body ; 
 the knees straight, toes pointed ; hold there, first to the 
 rightj then to the left. 
 
 (52.) The most diificult horizontals to hold are as fol- 
 lows : Those above the parallel bars, with arras placed along 
 the bars from the shoulder, forward and backward. The 
 body should be on a line with the bar. 
 
 WalJcing through the bars upon the hands, feet up, head 
 down ; the knees and arms must be perfectly straight, the 
 body perpendicular. 
 
 Climbing hj means of the arms alone. The body is 
 C* 
 
58 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEKCISES, 
 
 raised by means of the hands alone ; the legs and the rest 
 of the body must be kept as quiet as possible. Climbing 
 with a grasp, where. the plane of the hand is perpendicular, 
 is always done with one hand grasping after the other. 
 The elbows must be as close to the body as possible. The 
 body can be perfectly straight, bent in, the legs bent in the 
 knees and hips, or bent in the hips alone, which is very 
 difficult. A swinging pole is often used for climbing, and 
 is very good. 
 
 Fig. 34 
 
 Fig. 35. 
 
 Fig. SO. 
 
PBEPAEATOEY EXEECISES. 
 
 59 
 
 Shipping loith the Hope. 
 The rope should be from one-hajf to three-quarters of an 
 inch thick, and long enough to reach the hips on both sides, 
 as in Figure 37. When standing upon it for cross-skip- 
 ping, it must be a little longer. 
 The arms, bent a little, are brought 
 near the body, the hands near the 
 hips. The swinging of the rope 
 is performed merely by turning 
 the wrist-joints. The arms should 
 move either not at all, or but very 
 little. There are many modes of 
 this exercise, such as — 
 
 Simple 8M2yping^ straight skip- 
 ping ; on the spot, from before, 
 from behind ; with running, gal- 
 loping, trotting. 
 
 Crossed /Skipping, when the 
 
 ^^°'^^' lower arms are crossed. Go 
 
 through the same motions as before directed, with 
 
 changed crossing; one time the right arm over the left, 
 
 the next time the left over the right, and so on. 
 
 Double Shipping, when the rope at every spring 
 passes twice under the feet, turning, in oi:der to change the 
 skipping from before into that from behind, you swing the 
 rope, and at that moment pass it from before to behind un- 
 der the feet, by the right side upward. Now turn quick to 
 the right, and skip from behind to before. This should be 
 practiced at first slowly, then as quick and as long as possi- 
 ble. In practicing the crossed and double skipping, it is 
 well to render it easier by changing with the simple. It is 
 a beautiful and invigorating exercise to change in order 
 with different kinds of skipping. All these exercises may 
 
 i 
 
60 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEKCISES. 
 
 be done with the knees being stretched or bent ; touching 
 the breech with the heels ; hojjping on one foot, or chang- 
 ing the foot at every spring. 
 
 Vaulting. 
 Vaulting on and over the bar or wooden horse. One of 
 the most important exercises. It has a salutary effect upon 
 almost all parts of the body, particularly the arms, legs, 
 muscles of the stomach and back. It increases the agility 
 and improves the carriage. It is to be practiced over a bar 
 or vaulting-horse. 
 
 Take position, as in Figure 38. From this position the 
 body is forced upward by means of a spring, and with the 
 assistance of the hands, so high that the arms are stretched 
 when the body has reached that height, as in Figure 38. 
 
 Sink again in a perpendicu- 
 lar line ; touch the floor for a 
 moment, and then repeat the 
 motion a number of times. 
 Common faults in this exer- 
 cise are : falling forward of 
 the upper part of the body ; 
 throwing back the legs; not 
 stretching the arms ; and a 
 sinking of the elbows; instead 
 of merely pressing down- 
 ward and keeping the body 
 straight. Spring up, arms 
 straight ; raise the right leg, 
 sidewise, to the right. Back 
 to place. Up again ; now 
 left leg the same, then both together. 
 
 Pushing off. — Spring up, legs against the bar ; as soon 
 
 Fig. 38. 
 
PEEPAEATDEY EXEKCISES. 
 
 61 
 
 as the arms are stretched the legs are pushed off, both at a 
 time, merely by a sudden move, proceeding from the back. 
 Be sure not to bend the knees. Tliis motion should be sev- 
 eral times repeated. 
 
 Spring up, throw one leg over so as to sit. Place both 
 hands upon the first saddle-hold, the thumbs forward, the 
 elbows as near to each other as possible without being bent. 
 Now throw the weight of the body on the hands, raise the 
 legs, separating them, and keeping them straight. You are 
 now in a suspended position, from which you raise the body 
 by drawing in the stomach as high as possible ; then lower 
 again by bending the elbows so much that you almost 
 touch the saddle with your thighs. This movement should 
 be repeated slowly, without any sudden start or spring. 
 
 Sioinging. — From the suspended position described 
 above, the liands placed so that they almost touch, bring 
 
 the legs into a swinging motion, drawing in the back, as in 
 Figure 39, when swinging backward — the stomach when 
 forward. The higher and more uniform the swinging, 
 
62 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 the better it is. After some little practice, you will be 
 able to strike your feet together behind and before. The 
 legs must be constantly kept straight in vaulting. Every 
 thing should be practiced right and left. A perpendicular 
 position of the head and body should be maintained in all 
 movements ; likewise the stretching of the joints of the 
 knees and feet, if their bending is not necessary for the 
 spring. Now spring up, pass the legs through the hands, 
 push off, and descend with your back to the horse. Per- 
 form this over the right side, over the left side, also with ^ 
 run. 
 
 Vaults with one Hand. From behind. Take a short run, 
 mounting with the left hand and right foot, with the right 
 hand and left foot. From the side, the same ; the foot that 
 does not make the vault executes the spring. Many mo- 
 tions in vaulting can be practiced over the single bar : to 
 the right, to the left ; through the hands, by straightening 
 the arms, and drawing the knees close to the chin. This 
 vault can be increased by practice until the bar is as high 
 as one can reach. 
 
 Continued Vaults consist in performing repeatedly the 
 same vault, and require not only strength and agility, but 
 also perseverance. If it should be difficult to start imme- 
 diately after the descent, a double spring may be taken. 
 
 Spring to the position seen in Figure 39; draw the knees 
 toward the breast so that the legs will pass through be- 
 tween the arms, and make the descent on the opposite side ; 
 then, without letting go, spring back again to the first po- 
 sition. 
 
 Next, spring up, and come to rest, with both knees 
 upon the saddle; raise the hands above the head, and spring 
 from the knees, alighting on the opposite side. 
 
 The hands being firmly placed upon both saddle-holds. 
 
 /: 
 
 / 
 
PREPAEATOET EXEECISES. 
 
 63 
 
 spring into first position, elbows close to the body ; draw 
 the knees up in front, throw the head forward, the feet up 
 backward, as in Figure 40, and turn over, alighting upon 
 the feet with back to the horse. Just 
 before the feet touch the floor, the 
 hands must push off strongly. This 
 exercise must not be attempted at first 
 without the assistance of one or two 
 persons. 
 
 Both hands upon the forward pom- 
 mel, thumbs on the outside ; spring 
 up, keeping the elbows close to the 
 body ; the legs pass forward on each 
 side of the horse, until the heels reach 
 the horse's head, as in Figure 39 ; the 
 hands all the while remaining firm. 
 Now swing back, extending the arms 
 until the body is nearly in a hori- 
 zontal position. Again to the front, 
 and so on several times. 
 
 Then both hands on the back pom- 
 mel, fingers on the outside, hands and 
 elbows close together, the latter touch- 
 ing the body — raise the legs, with knees straight, until the 
 body forms a horizontal line. This can be done with one 
 hand, the elbow being well under the body. 
 
 Hunning Vaults — Are made at a distance of from five 
 to fifteen yards. Feet taking the jalace of the hands ; to 
 the saddle ; to the neck ; to the right ; to the left ; to the 
 knees ; to the feet on the horse, by turning of the body to 
 the right, to the left. All those are simple and excellent 
 motions for improving the wind and giving agility. They 
 can not be too often practiced. 
 
 Fig. 40. 
 
64 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEKCISES. 
 
 Inclined Ladders. 
 
 (1 .) Face the ladder ; grasp as high as the reach ; place 
 the right foot on the round, raise the right hand and left 
 foot, and alternately ascend to the top. 
 
 (2.) The back to the ladder, the hands upon the sides, 
 the feet on the first round ; ascend to the top. 
 
 (3.) Keep the hands close to the outside of the ladder, 
 and ascend with the feet alone, forward and backward. 
 
 (4.) Grasp the sides, legs upon the outside ; draw the 
 body up by the strength of the arms. 
 
 (5.) Hands upon the sides, body straight. Feet upon 
 the outside ; draw up. 
 
 (6.) Feet in the same jDosition ; hands on the rounds, on 
 a line with the hips ; push the body up. The knees must 
 be kept perfectly straight, as in Figure 42. 
 
 (7.) From the inside of the ladder grasp the highest 
 round ; place the feet on the first, and ascend to the top. 
 Movement, right hand., left foot, or left hand, right foot. 
 
 (8.) Grasp the round with left hand, high up ; the 
 right hand up-on the outside as in Figure 41. Draw up, and 
 move the left hand to the round above, the right hand 
 gliding after. The body must be kept straight ; feet closed, 
 and toes pointing to the floor. 
 
 (9.) The same motion on the opposite side of the ladder, 
 the right hand grasping the round. 
 
 (10.) Grasp high up, and ascend by placing one hand 
 after the other. Many in this exercise twist and kick their 
 feet ; this is quite unnecessary, and makes the movement 
 much more fatiguing. 
 
 (11.) The hands high up ; ascend hand over hand, or by 
 putting the hands on difierent rounds. 
 
 (12.) The hands high up, palms turned toward the 
 body ; ascend, one hand after the other, on same round. 
 
PEEPAKATOKY EXERCISES. 
 
 65 
 
 (13.) Hands the same ; ascend hand over hand. 
 
 (14.) Place both hands high up, raise the body by the 
 muscular spring of the arms, and. grasp the round above. 
 The arms should be kept close to the body, and the ascent 
 
 Fig. 41. 
 
 Fig. 42. 
 
 made by a jerk. The beginner should never ascend beyond 
 three rounds. 
 
 (15.) Both hands on the outside ; ascend by moving 
 fii'st right, then left. 
 
 (16.) Hands on the outside ; ascend by je'rks, or mov- 
 ing both hands at the same time. 
 
 (17.) The same movement, except that one hand is 
 placed on the round, the other on the outside. 
 
 The Inclined^ Ladder is one of the most valuable imple- 
 ments in a gymnasium. 
 
66 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 Horizontal Ladders. 
 
 (1.) Hands upon the outside; move along, first with 
 right hand, then left. 
 
 (2.) Hands the same ; move backward. 
 
 (3.) Hands uj)on the first two rounds ; draw the body 
 up until the head touches the hand or round. 
 
 (4.) Hands upon the first and third rounds ; draw up as 
 strongly as possible. 
 
 (5.) Hands upon the first and fourth rounds, and so 
 
 rigr43. 
 
 on, extending as far as your strength will permit you to 
 draw up. 
 
 (6.) Hands upon the outside ; swing the body forward, 
 at the same time glide the hands along the sides. 
 
 (7.) The same movement backward. 
 
PKEPARATOET EXERCISES. 67 
 
 (8.) Hands upon the rounds ; move along, by placing 
 one hand after the other. 
 
 (9.) Hands the same; swing. Move first the right hand 
 forward, then the left. 
 
 (10.) Hands the same ; swing ; but omit one round on 
 each movement. 
 
 (11.) The same, only omit first two rounds, then three, 
 or as many as the length of the arm or strength will per- 
 mit. 
 
 Single Trapeze Exercise. 
 
 The exercises on this small single swinging bar develop 
 the muscles of the arms, shoulders and chest in a remarka- 
 ble degree. It is supported by two hooks firmly fixed in 
 the ceiling or to a bar, from which two ropes are suspended, 
 at the extremities of Avhich a bar is fastened thirty inches in 
 length, and one inch and a quarter in diameter. The bar 
 should be made of hickory, and suspended six inches above 
 the reach, so that you spring to catch it. 
 
 (1.) Raise the body by the strength of the arms until 
 the head is above the bar. In the grasp the thumbs 
 should be under, and the hands from sixteen to twenty 
 inches apart ; the legs straight, heels touching, and toes 
 pointed toward the floor. Repeat this exercise a number 
 of times. 
 
 (2.) The same movement, except that the palms of the 
 hands are turned toward the body. The elbows should 
 be kept close together. 
 
 (3.) Grasp the bar as in Figure 44 ; throw the legs for- 
 ward and upward, and as you swing back, shorten or draw 
 up the arms. 
 
 (4.) Raise the body until the head is on a line with 
 the bar ; then throw the legs up, forward, and pass over the 
 
68 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 bar as in Figure 45, Be sure to maintain a firm hold, and 
 keep the arms bent on making the descent. 
 
 (5.) Grasj) as in Figure 44 ; throw the legs up ; bend 
 the knees, and pass them through between the arms, and 
 descend slowly to the floor. 
 
 (6.) The same movement, except that the legs must be 
 brought back again after hanging in the position seen in 
 
 Fig. 46. 
 
 Figure 46. With some practice, the body may hang per- 
 fectly straight after passing through backward. 
 
 (7.) Grasp as in Figure 44 ; throw the legs up and over 
 the bar, and come to rest on the stomach; place the right 
 hand on the right hand rope as high as the reach ; raise the 
 body by drawing up with the right hand, and straightening 
 
PEEPAKATOKY EXEECISES. 
 
 69 
 
 left arm; pass the legs through and over the bar, and come 
 to sit on it, as in Figure 47. The descent is made by drop- 
 ping the body backward, the hands gliding down the ropes, 
 catching the bar at the knees, passing the legs under, 
 and come to stand on the floor. Kej^eat the same exercise 
 with the left hand. 
 
 (8.) From first position 
 tlirow the legs up ; pass 
 them between the hands, 
 and bring the thighs on 
 the bar ; grasj) the ropes 
 with both hands and come 
 to sit on the bar. Now 
 take hold of the right 
 roj)e with the left hand, 
 the right hand on the bar ; 
 raise the body by .the 
 strength of the arms, and 
 turning the bar under with 
 the right hand, return to 
 the sitting position. Re- 
 peat the same exercise 
 with the left hand. In 
 descending, employ the contrary movements. 
 
 (9.) Grasp the bar as in the first position ; pass the legs 
 through the hands ; keep the legs straight ; bend the back, 
 keeping it close to the bar; draw up with the arms, and 
 come to sit on the bar, 
 
 (10.) Slip the hands up the ropes ; shorten the arms and 
 stand upon the b.ar, the hands on a line with the hips with 
 a firm hold. Bend the body forward and backward. 
 
 (11.) Glide the hands high up, and reverse the position 
 of the body ; the feet up, head down. 
 
 Fig. 4S. 
 
70 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 (12.) From the seat on the bar swing, but very slightly; 
 then drop to the knees on the bar, and, as the swing is for- 
 ward, unhook the knees, and come to stand on the floor. 
 
 (13.) The exercises of the swinging motions, suspended 
 by the arms, are very good, but require great power of grip 
 and strength of arm. First, Swing with body suspended, 
 as high as possible. Second, Swing and revolve over the 
 bar each time it goes forward. Third, Swing high, and 
 pass the legs through the hands, and place the small of the 
 back upon the bar, keeping the body perfectly straight. 
 This requires some practice in order to balance the body. 
 You may also turn a somersault from the forward swing. 
 
 (14.) Horizontal position. This can be done by placing 
 
 Fig. 49. 
 
 the hands on the ropes above the bar (Figure 49), or the 
 hands on the bar, which is much easier. 
 
 Throwing the Hammer or Weight. 
 This kind of throwing, performed by swinging the arm 
 stretched forward or backward, can be practiced at a mark 
 as well as a distance. The foot, on the side of the arm 
 throwing, should be back, and nearly at right angles with 
 the other, and from 18 to 24 inches apart. The hand grasps 
 the weight, and after swinging one or more times, leaves the 
 
PKEPAEATOEY EXERCISES. 
 
 71 
 
 hand. Care must be taken that it has the proper angle at 
 
 the moment of parting from the hand. 
 
 There is a modification of this exercise, "which consists in 
 throwing by stretching the arm which 
 was before bent. Cannon-balls or 
 round stones are the best implements 
 for this kind of exercise, because they 
 are easily held. The position is about 
 the same as in the preceding exercise, 
 but the arm throwing is bent in a 
 sharp angle to the height or a little 
 above the shoulder, as in Figure 60. 
 The weight is placed in or on the 
 open hand, and after one or more mo- 
 tions of the body, forward and back- 
 ward, the arm is extended, and the 
 weight thrown off. 
 
 Home Exercises. 
 
 There are many simple exercises which can be practiced 
 at home as well as in the gymnasium. I shall indicate 
 about a score, although the number might be increased 
 almost indefinitely. 
 
 (1.) Jumping through or over a cane, handkerchief, or 
 the hands, forward and backward. 
 
 (2.) Entire turning around one's own axis in a jump, on 
 the spot, to the right and left. 
 
 (3.) Sitting down and rising without the use of the 
 hands, the legs bent and crossed. 
 
 (4.) One leg stretched out in front, which must not 
 touch the floor or ground. In sitting down or rising on 
 one foot, it is to be practiced right and left. 
 
72 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 (5.) Lying down, arms crossed over the chest; rise with- 
 out the assistance of the arms. 
 
 (6.) Taking hold with the left hand of the right ear, and 
 passing the right arm through! 
 
 (7.) Drawing out a knife stuck in the ground or floor 
 near or in advance of the little toe ; the hand of the oppo- 
 site side passing around behind the feet, which must stand 
 fast, to tlie right and left. 
 
 (8.) Touching the floor with the fingers or wrist, the 
 knees being kept stifi". 
 
 (9.) Taking up with the mouth from the floor a eane or 
 similar light thing at a distance less than one's own length, 
 without touching the body to the floor. 
 
 (10.) Leaning against a wall in a straight position, the 
 feet removing gradually from the wall, and pushing off the 
 head from the wall. The elastic power here proceeds from 
 the back and neck; the arms to be kept straight and close 
 to the body. 
 
 (11.) Two persons stand with their backs against each~ 
 other, hook their arms, and lift each other in turns. 
 
 (12.) Bend the joints of the wrist, the fingers being in- 
 terlaced, and the elbows pressed against one another ; tlie 
 pressure should be continued only until the joints of the 
 Avrists bend. This may be performed left against left, right 
 against right, or with both at a time. 
 
 (13.) There are many tests for the strength of the ai'ms. 
 Thus : one person stretches out his arm, keeping it as stiff 
 as possible, the fist firmly clenched ; the other takes hold 
 of the arm above the wrist from without. He who en- 
 deavors to bend stands on the outside of the stretched ai'm; 
 if the pressure is strong enough to bend the wrist, the elbow 
 yields. 
 
 (14.) Two persons sit at a narrow table, both resting 
 
PREPARATOKY EXERCISES. 73 
 
 the same elbow on it so that the lower arm and hand in- 
 cline forward ; both join their hands, and each endeavors, by 
 a uniform pressure, to jDress down the other's arm. The 
 other hand should remain under the table, resting on the 
 thigh. This is to be practiced left against left, right against 
 right. 
 
 (15.) The wrists are placed on the sides, so that the el- 
 bows form sharp angles ; the elbows are moved forward 
 until they touch ; then backward. 
 
 (16.) Moving along on the hands, when sitting on the 
 floor, the arras are stretched so that they raise the body to 
 a suspended positiofi, and then move along, the legs being 
 kept straight, forward and backward. 
 
 (17.) Sitting sideways on a chair, place one hand on the 
 back, the other on the front of the same in the centre, and 
 pass the legs through. 
 
 (18.) The body extended upon the hands and toes, face 
 down, feet near the wall, cai'ry the hands slowly backward, 
 one after the other, raising at the same time the legs up the 
 wall with the whole part of the body, until you reach a 
 perpendicular position, the weight of the body being sup- 
 ported on the arms. Then bring the head so that the lips 
 or chin Avill touch the wall ; descend slowly, keeping the 
 knees straight. This exercise should be performed with 
 much care, and at first with some assistance. 
 
 D 
 
MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 INDIAN CLUB EXEECISE. 
 
 In this exercise, although but little more than two-thirds 
 of the body, that is, from the hips upward, are called into 
 operation, its importance should be estimated by the fact 
 that they are precisely those requiring constant artificial 
 practice, being naturally most exempted from exertion on 
 the part of those who lead a sedentary life. There is noth- 
 ing in the whole round of gymnastic performances that will 
 be found of more essential service than this exercise with 
 the clubs. It demands but little muscular exertion, and 
 such as it does require calls chiefly upon that portion of the 
 system which it finds in a state of comparative repose. 
 
 In every exercise with the Indian Clubs, the right arm 
 performs the first motion, then the left, then both ; each 
 movement being executed several times. In order to per- 
 form every motion with accuracy — by which means it is 
 made interesting to ^he performer, as well as the observer 
 — you should take great pains to execute the motions cor- 
 rectly. As for instance, if the movement is with the arm 
 straight and the club horizontal, be careful not to get it 
 above that point ; and when the motion is perpendicular, 
 be sure to get it as near that position as possible. The 
 same rule is to be observed through all the different mo- 
 tions. 
 
 Take the position as in Figure 1 ; body erect, breast 
 outward, back drawn in, knees straight, toes turned slightly 
 
INDIAN CLUB EXEECISE. 
 
 75 
 
 outward ; club in each hand, hanging pendent at the sides. 
 The hand grasping firmly, but not too rigidly, raise the 
 right arm in front, elbow straight, to a horizontal position 
 five or ten times. Place the left arm the same way ; then 
 both.' 
 
 Raise the right arm in front to a perpendicular position ; 
 left the same ; then both ; right hand sidewise to a horizon- 
 tal; left the same; then both. 
 
 Fig. 2. 
 
 Fig. 3. 
 
 Right hand sidewise to a^ perpendicular ; left the same ; 
 then both, as in Figure 2. 
 
 Right hand directly in front ; swing the club over the 
 right shoulder until it hangs pendent behind, as in Figui-e 
 3, the thumb of the hand touching the shoulder ; the sanie 
 with the left hand ; then with both hands. 
 
 Swing the right hand in front to the left, as in Figure 4 ; 
 then to the right, passing the club over the right shoulder 
 
76 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 sidewise until it hangs pendent behind ; the same with the , 
 left ; then with both alternately. 
 
 Holding the clubs as in Fif^ 
 ure 5, without moving the arms 
 at the elbows, but bending only 
 the wrist, let the club come 
 down slowly to lie on the 
 arm ; first with the right arm, 
 then the left ; then both at the 
 same time. Then go through 
 the same motion with the arms 
 directly in front. 
 
 Swinging motion in front, 
 
 as seen in Figure 6 ; the arms 
 
 should be swung well up, and 
 
 come close down in front, first 
 
 to the right, then the left. Be 
 
 ^^°-^- careful not to let the clubs 
 
 strike each other. This is a preparatory motion for more 
 
 difficult ones in which the clubs pass behind. 
 
 Standing as in Figure 1, swing the left hand in front, the 
 right behind at the same time ; arms not above a horizon- 
 tal position. In this motion the body turns at the Avaist. 
 (Figure 1.) 
 
 The clubs hanging pendent at the side, the right hand 
 will make a complete circle directly in front ; left hand the 
 same. 
 
 From first position, the right hand will make a circle at 
 right angles with the body, left the same ; alternately, first 
 right, then left. 
 
 First position. Raise the right hand opposite the chin, 
 the large end of the club upward, as in Figure 8. Now 
 raise the hand on a line with the right shoulder, and let the 
 
 , 
 
INDIAN CLUB EXEECISE. 
 
 77 
 
 outer end of the club fall toward the left shoulder, as in Fig- 
 lU'e 9. Making a full circle behind, bring it to the starting 
 point before the face. The same with the left hand, the 
 right hanging pendent ; now with both bands alternately. 
 
 In first position, bring 
 the club up in front, arm 
 bent, and elbow close to 
 the body. Now straight- 
 en the arm out in front, 
 at the same moment the 
 outer end of the club 
 makes a circle. This is 
 done wholly with the 
 wrist ; it is an excellent 
 motion for the w-rist and 
 fore-arm. The same with 
 the left hand ; then al- 
 ternately or simultane- 
 ously with both. This 
 motion can be reversed 
 by letting the clubs fall 
 to the rear or reverse 
 Avay. This you will find more difficult. Remember the 
 clubs go at right angles with the body. 
 
 In first position. Bring the clubs as in Figure 2, let them 
 make the short circle behind, and a wide one in front. As 
 it passes in front the arm is extended, the elbow straight. 
 Same with the left hand ; then with both hands alternately, 
 as in Figure 10. 
 
 First position. Pass the right hand over the head, club 
 passing the left shoulder, and hanging pendent behind. 
 Keep the hand in this position. Now pass the left hand 
 over the right shoulder, until the club hangs pendent. 
 
 Fig. 5. 
 
78 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 Now raise the hands straight over the head, as in Figure 11, 
 the elbows or arms stretched. Drop tliem again in their 
 position. Repeat, first with the right, then with the left. 
 
 Fig. 6. 
 
 From the first position swing the right hand to the 
 right, until the club reaches a horizontal position, then by a 
 turn of the wrist drop it downward and backward. This 
 will make the small circle behind. IsTow bring it in front 
 with the arm extended to its full length, and make the 
 large circle in front, as in Figure 12. The same with the 
 left hand, then with both alternately, as in Figure 13. 
 
 There are many motions performed with the arras ex- 
 tended, the clubs being held vertically either directly in 
 front or at the sides, from which they are dropped to the 
 right, to the left, the outer ends toward each other, then 
 
INDIAN CLUB EXERCISE. 
 
 V9 
 
 from each other, so that the handles touch. Those motions 
 are no doubt good for strengthening the wrists and fore- 
 arm. But as I exercise the same muscles in light Dumb 
 Bell practice with less liability of straining, I simply refer 
 to them here as not altogether calculated for new beginners. 
 
 Fig. 7. . 
 
 From the first position swing the club to the right, and 
 over the right shoulder behind ; turn the face to the right, 
 the feet being at right angles. Now swing the club in 
 front, turning the body to the left; and when the club 
 reaches a horizontal position, let it drop from you, turning 
 it by the wrist alone. It will here perform a small circle. 
 Do the same with the left hand, and then with both simultane- 
 ously, as in Figure 14. This is a splendid motion if done well ; 
 it exercises all parts of the body. Remember that when you 
 are looking to the right, the clubs hang behind ; when to the 
 left, they make the same circle, by the action of the wrist. 
 
 Simultaneous Movement. — From first position, swing 
 
80 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 the clubs up, as in Figure 2. Now extend the right arm 
 sidewise to the right ; at the same instant throw the left 
 hand behind the head, the club making the short circle be- 
 
 Fig. 8. 
 
 Fig. 9. 
 
 hind the back, while the right is performing the large one 
 in front. Make the same over the left shoulder, alter- 
 nately. This motion is also performed from a three-quarter 
 circle ; or, in place of starting the clubs from a perpendicu- 
 lar, commence from the right horizontal. They are both 
 very graceful motions. 
 
 Spine Motion. — In this you can nse a larger club. Both 
 hands grasp the club firmly, and as you spring the club up, 
 face to the right, the arms passing over the head, the hands 
 just touching the back of it, the club hanging pendent be- 
 hind, as in Figure 15. The feet should be eighteen inches 
 apart, and at right angles with each other. Now swing the 
 
INDIAN CLUB EXERCISE. 81 
 
 club in front, being careful not to separate or close the feet, 
 but simply turning on both heels as you face to the right or 
 left. 
 
 Next separate the legs, toes turned out ; the club hang- 
 ing in front between them ; arms extended. Now swing 
 the club over the back, head between the arms as in the 
 former motion ; then in front, passing the club between the 
 legs, and bending the body well forward, the upper part 
 nearly forming a horizontal. These are two excellent mo- 
 tions for the spinal and abdominal muscles. Being so per- 
 fectly simple, they can be jDei-forraed at the first trial. 
 
 Fig. 10. Fig. 11. 
 
 Simultaneous Movement. — From first position swing the 
 clubs np as in Figure 17 ; turn the face slightly to the right ; 
 move both hands in the same direction, the right hand club 
 making the circle behind, and the left the circle in front. 
 The left arm is kept perfectly straight, while the right is 
 
82 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 bent at the elbow, as in Figure 16. By alternating this mo- 
 tion you will find it more difficult. 
 
 Now .reverse the position of the hand on the club. In- 
 stead of the hand grasping with thumb downward, it is close 
 to the end of the handle. From this manner of grasping 
 the club the exercise becomes more difficult. You will 
 therefore use more precaution, and practice the motions 
 very slowly at first. 
 
 Fig. 12. 
 
 From first position bring the clubs as in Figure 17. 
 Now bend the left arm at the elbow, and bring the hand of 
 the same to the right breast, as in Figure 18. Now 
 
INDIAN CLUB EXERCISE. 
 
 83 
 
 Fig. 14. 
 
84 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 straighten th-e left arm, and bend the right so that the hand 
 touches the left breast. Clubs grasped as in the preceding ; 
 bring them up in front ; elbows near the body, clubs hang- 
 ing pendent. Raise the right 
 hand to that side, and on a 
 line with the shoulder. The 
 outer end of the club will 
 make an oblique circle by a 
 slight movement of the wrist 
 and elbow. The same with 
 the left hand ; then with both 
 alternately, as in Figure 19. 
 
 Simultaneous Motion. — 
 First position. Swing the 
 clubs up as in Figure 17. 
 ISTow raise" them together, 
 keeping them at a distance 
 of from six to eight inches 
 ^''°"^°" apart. Let them drop be- 
 
 hind, over the right shoulder, both arms being bent. Now 
 swing them in front, both arms extended as in Figure 20 ; 
 then behind ; arms bent, and so on. Alternate this motion 
 also. 
 
 Simultaneous Motion. — First position. Put both arms 
 in motion, clubs passing close to the legs. Swing upward, 
 the left hand passing back of the head, and the club making 
 a circle behind and over the right shoulder ; the right hand 
 following, and performing the circle in the same place. The 
 left hand now makes the wide circle before the body, the 
 right hand immediately following the same over the left 
 shoulder ; then alternately. This motion can bo performed 
 by making the club behind execute two short circles while 
 the one in front is making one. 
 
INDIAIS^ CLUB EXERCISE 
 
 First position. With, the right hand swing the club, 
 hanging pendent, around the left shoulder, making a com- 
 plete circle around the body. The left the same ; then 
 alternately. The above motion reversed, starting with the 
 right hand. In place of passing it in front of the body, let 
 it make the circle behind by a turn of the wrist and elbow. 
 The same with left hand ; then with both alternately. This 
 you will find more difficult than the former; but it is, how- 
 ever, only a simple motion. 
 
 Fig. 16. 
 
 Simultaneous Motion. — From first position, raise the 
 clubs as in Figure 2 ; then carry the hands up over tl^ 
 
86 
 
 MANUAL OP PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 head, being careful to keep both hands perfectly even. 
 When the hands reach the top, and a little behind the head, 
 drop the clubs in opposite directions ; the right making a 
 circle behind the right shoulder, the left ' behind the left 
 shoulder. 
 
 Simultaneous Double Motion. — The upper motion the 
 same as the previous, both clubs performing the circle be- 
 hind at the same instant. Now cross the hands in front, 
 making a wide or large circle ; then behind again, and so on 
 a number of times. 
 
 Fig. IS. 
 
 Simultaneous Triple Motion, — Hold the clubs as in Fig- 
 ure 2. Raise them over and back of the head, keeping the 
 hands close and even. Now cross them, and make the 
 small circle behind ; next the large one in front, with arms 
 Intended, bringing the clubs again to the head. But in 
 
INDIAN CLUB EXERCISE. 
 
 87 
 
 place of the hands going behind, they are both thrown out 
 straight sidewise, and the outer ends of the clubs make a cir- 
 cle on a line with the shoulder. This motion you continue 
 in the time of one — two — three. 
 
 Fig. 19. 
 
 You may make a combination of four motions by adding 
 the reverse forward to the three previous motions. 
 
 Clubs hanging pendent as in first position ; swing the 
 arms directly past the body toward the right side, where 
 they are held horizontal, the right hand club laying on the 
 right arm, with the large end toward the head, the left arm 
 Avell across the body and on a line with the right. Now 
 swing them to the left alternately. 
 
 Simultaneous Motion. — Clubs held as in Figure 15. 
 
MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 Throw the right hand to the front, the club making a circle 
 at right angles with the body ; the left performing the cir- 
 cle behind the back ; first, the right in front, left behind ; 
 then left in front, right behind. 
 
 Clubs hanging pendent, 
 swing them past the body 
 to the right. When they 
 arrive at a horizontal posi- 
 tion, the right hand club 
 will make a small circle in 
 front of the arm, of Avhich 
 the elbow must be straight. 
 The left hand makes the 
 large circle in front. Now 
 to the left, the left hand 
 making the small circle, 
 and so on alternately. 
 
 Siinultaneoiis Motion. — 
 Holding the clubs as in Fig- 
 ure 15, extend both arras 
 i^ig-20. sidewise at the same time, 
 
 the clubs dropping from you and making a circle in front of 
 the arras. Arriving at the j)roper position, they will make 
 the circle behind the arms ; and so on, first in front, then 
 behind. 
 
 From the position of Figure 2, throw the left hand out 
 sideways, the club making the small circle behind the arm, 
 the right hand following over and back of the head ; the 
 left hand in the mean time passing in front ; the right also 
 making the same motion, commencing with right hand ; 
 then alternately. 
 
 From position of Figure 1, the right hand will make the 
 small circle behind, then the left, then both alternately. 
 
2. 
 
 Ipntirs. 
 
. CHAPTER V. 
 Rowing 91—124 
 
 Witli Tioo Illustrations. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 Sailing 125—132 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 Reooeb or Rowing Matches anb Regattas 133 — 141 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 Rules fos Regattas 142 — 151 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 Swimming 152—160 
 
 With Six Illustrations. 
 
 CHAPTER X. ' 
 Skating .' 161—160 
 
RO^VING. 91 
 
 CHAPTER Y. 
 
 EOWING. 
 
 In New York, more than in any other city in the 
 Union, are ont-door sports indulged in. This metropo- 
 lis has always felt justly proud of her pre-eminence in that 
 respect. New Yorkers enter into those sports with a zest 
 and spirit not found in any other part of the States. 
 Known all over the world for their energy and their go- 
 aheadativeness, it is said abroad that Americans live on 
 excitement which they th«mselves furnish; and whether 
 rowing or sailing on the smooth bay or river, j^racticing 
 on the base ball ground, the skating pond, or the race- 
 course, New Yorkers ably sustain the acknowledged su- 
 periority of their country. 
 
 There is certainly no out-door amusement superior to 
 boat-rowing, or any with a greater number of advantages. 
 It adds vigor and strength to the arms and shoulders, ex- 
 pands the chest, and can riot fail to impart health and 
 beauty to all who practice it. Under those circumstances 
 it affords the writer great j)leasure to see so many of our 
 young men enjoying this delightful and invigorating ex- 
 ercise. 
 
 Clubs are now formed or formmg in all parts of the 
 States where the opportunity offers to enjoy this exercise. 
 The students of Yale and Harvard have done much to in- 
 spire others to engage in this beneficial amusement. 
 Taking a deep interest in all that pertains to the well- 
 
92 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 being of man, and knowing that rowing is one that tends, 
 to promote his health and strength, I wish to impart to 
 the beginner some knowledge of the Art or Science of 
 Rowing, for it is well known that in the race-boat of the 
 present day, no man can do justice to himself or the boat, 
 unless he possess some skill in the art of handling the oar. 
 The explanations that I am about to give will be plain and 
 brief, and coming from one who has acquired them by close 
 application and practice, can be relied on as being in all 
 probability nearly if not quite right. 
 
 The two greatest yearly " events" which take place in 
 England are the " Derby" horse-race and the " University 
 boat-race." They are alike mainly in respect to the in- 
 terest which they excite among the best classes in Great 
 Britain. The interest in rowing is almost entirely free 
 from the injurious influences wkich are so often to be found 
 upon the race-course. It is true bets are sometimes made, 
 but the amount is generally small, and they do not con- 
 stitute, as in the case of the horse-races, the real occasion 
 of the excitement. 
 
 Rowing is popular because it is a manly and healthful 
 sport and pastime. There is a fascination which clings 
 about the practice of this difiicult and beautiful art be- 
 tween the rival universities in England. It is the best 
 blood, the best culture, and the best physical develop- 
 ment that go to make up the two crews. There is perhaps 
 no, sport or exercise in the world which alFords a fairer or 
 better. trial of the finest qualities of manhood. To be one 
 of a first-class crew, you must possess skill, patience, self- 
 control, and above all, " game" or " pluck." This is needed 
 in every walk of life, but more especially in athletic con-- 
 tests. There is always profound respect for the man who 
 will endure and row a "game" race. The victory in a 
 
ROWING. 93 
 
 well contested boat-race is something to be proud of; and 
 hence it tends to promote health if jDroperly indulged in ; 
 the ])i\Ye air breathed into the lungs when rowing proves 
 this to be not only strengthening to the muscular system, 
 but also to the respiratory organs. 
 
 In ordinary breathing, the rate is, for a healthy man, 
 from sixteen to twenty insj)irations per minute, while the 
 racing stroke is from forty to forty-four per minute. Now 
 it should be understood that the breathing is regulated by 
 the stroke ; therefore the rate of respiration is axigmented 
 by both power and quickness. When a man is in a coui'se 
 of training, the muscles regulating respiration and circula- 
 tion are suddenly called upon to do three times their cus- 
 tomary amount of work. Often they fail, and this failure 
 is set down to want of strength or endurance. But in my 
 judgment it is caused more frequently by obstructions 
 from internal fat. It must be remembered that training 
 for strength and training for " wind," which is the second 
 essential in rowing, are different things, to be attained by 
 different means. All depends upon the work to be done. 
 For lifting, a man's muscles — especially those of the arms, 
 chest, and shoulders — must be powerfully developed. This 
 is not so absolutely required in rowing, although it is cer- 
 tainly an advantage, providing the respiratory power is in 
 keeping with the muscular. 
 
 Let us see for a moment how the law which regulates 
 development affects the respiratory organs. Take the man 
 who is strong, and anxious to become an oarsman. Why 
 can not he keep pace with the man who has had adequate 
 practice in rowing? Simply because he has not yet a 
 rowing heart, lungs, arteries, and vems. His heart, lungs, 
 and blood-vessels — the whole respiratory and circulatory 
 system — have been trained for other circumstances and to 
 
94 MANUAL OP PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 other occupations, and are fitted to perform their functions 
 in another way than that called for in rowing. In rowing, 
 the heart has to contract from 100 to 110 times in a minute ; 
 in ordinary life it is about 75 times. Just as occupation 
 has made these organs what they now are, so will other 
 occupations and exercises alter them, and the change will 
 cause an increased activity in all the organs. 
 
 The health and ability of every organ in the human 
 body is in relation to its activity. One might just as well 
 set a cripple to run or jump, as to set a man who has led 
 a sedentary life, with a narrow, flat, or defective chest, to 
 row a boat-race. Such men have rowed races, but never 
 without experiencing, at the close of the contest, faintingSj 
 giddiness, and nausea. Rowing exercise will improve all 
 such, but racing never will — their lungs not being suf- 
 ficiently strong. 
 
 Position in the Boat. — You should sit nearly straight — 
 the head not thrown down, nor to the right or left, nor 
 the shoulders shrugged up. The whole position of 
 the upper part of the body should be natural. This 
 will give the muscles of the arms and shoulders free play. 
 The feet should be placed with the heels close, firmly 
 against the stretcher, exactly in front of the body ; the 
 knees slightly bent, but not so that the handle of the oar 
 will touch them. The shoulders must be kept square, in 
 order that the work may be done squarely. The action of 
 the body in swinging should be exactly " fore-and-aft," or 
 in a direct line with the boat, parallel with it. Great 
 care must be taken that the body does not move in or out 
 board ; for this movement causes the boat to rock, by 
 which means each rower loses the power of his stroke. 
 
 Thivart. — It is quite necessary that this should be of 
 the exact height, so that you have perfect command over 
 
 I 
 
 ■B 
 
EOWING. 95 
 
 the oar. If the seat is too low, although it may inij)rove 
 the stiffness of the boat, she will be very apt to drag ; but 
 if it is at the proper height, the action of the men will be 
 better, and the speed of the boat increased. 
 
 Grasping the Oar. — This is the next essential point ; 
 unless the oar is grasj)ed properly, you will find it dif- 
 ficult to do the work right. The* outside hand should be 
 placed with the thumb above the handle, while the inside 
 hand grasps with the thumb beneath. The hands must not 
 be over four or five inches apart; I think by the thumb 
 of the outside hand being upward, there is a slight increase 
 of power. The inside hand, with the grasp, is in every 
 case the controlling power of the oar. The elbows must 
 be kept close to the sides, and in the stroke should be well 
 extended. 
 
 Length of Stroke. — The hands should never reach over 
 the, toes. There are two reasons for this. The first and 
 principal one is, that the more you extend the hands aft 
 or over the toes, the more you throw the blade of the oar 
 forward, and the greater will be the angle when it enters 
 the water. The power should be put on the oar just be- 
 fore it becomes parallel with the boat, and from that time 
 until the finish of the stroke. This gives the boat the 
 " shoot" while the oars are out of water, or while the 
 " recover" takes place. The second is, that it cramps the 
 muscles of the stomach too much, and causes too great ex- 
 ertion to make the recover. Again, when the speed of 
 the boat is to be increased, the stroke should be quicken- 
 ed, but not shortened. The stroke should always be 
 long and uniform, but the recover quick. The greater the 
 power applied to the oar, the greater will be the speed of 
 the boat,, provided that the oars are not too long out of 
 the water. Many fall into the error of shortening the 
 
96 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 stroke when called upon for a " spurt," by which means 
 the very power that propels the boat is lost in the air by 
 the rotary motion made by the blade before entering the 
 water. 
 
 Placing the Oar in the Water. — Great care must be 
 taken that the oar enters the water rightly. If the lower 
 jDart of the blade should in the least slant, or incline tow- 
 ard the after part of the boat in entering the water, it 
 would tend to press the boat down on that side ; and if 
 the same j^art of the blade entered the water inclined tow- 
 ard the bow, the action of the oar would be upward, or, 
 perhaps, the rower would " unship" his oar. The blade of 
 the oar should enter the water exactly at right angles 
 with the surface. That is, if I place the flat or wide part 
 of the blade uj)on the water, I would call it parallel ; but 
 if I put the oar in edgewise, as it is used to propel the 
 boat through the watei', I would say it entered at right 
 angles ; and no man can row Avell unless his oar enters ex- 
 actly in this form, 
 
 17ie Feather. — This is the action of the blade of the oar 
 on leaving the water at the finish of the stroke. It is 
 done by a slight turn of the wrist toward the body — the 
 blade leaving the water at an angle of from forty-five to 
 fifty degrees. Great care must be take^n that the upper 
 edge of the blade inclines ujDward ; for otherwise you will 
 be liable to " catch crabs," I have seen many who Avere 
 called good oarsmen — and for strength and endurance 
 were really very fair — who neglected entirely the scien- 
 tific principles of rowing. They were careless in putting 
 the oar in the water, and as much, if not more so, in taking 
 it out, 
 
 J have already attem^Dted to show the errors that are 
 made upon the oar entering the water. The oarsman 
 
EOWING. 97 
 
 should be equally careful to correct the fault of the oar 
 leavmg the water in any excejot the right way. Unless 
 the oar is properly " feathered," it will make " back-wa- 
 ter" at the finish of the stroke. Now to prevent this, you 
 must see that the blade only takes |Jie water ; then if the 
 wrist is turned, as" I have described, at the proper mo- 
 ment, there will not be an ounce of back-v>^ater. But. if 
 you press the oar deep, so that the shank is sikbmerged, as 
 many do, you make extra labor for yourself, and hinder 
 the speed of the boat. 
 
 Movement in the Stroke. — When 'four, six, or eight, or 
 whatever number compose the crew, commence to prac- 
 tice, the first thing to be taken into consideration is the 
 " stroke," and its proper execution. There may be no two 
 of a crew of the same height, Or length of body. One 
 may have long arms, another short. Still the stroke must 
 be of the same length, — unless this is done, the boat will 
 not go steadily, or upon her bottom. The first duty of the 
 stroke-oar, which is the most important position in the 
 boat, is to see that he does not overreach his crew. I 
 have seen some row in this place who labored under the 
 erroneous impression that the longer they made the stroke 
 the better it must be — losing sight entii*ely of the capa- 
 bilities of the other members roAving with him. The 
 stroke should be Ibng and uniform, so that each man's 
 power can be drawn out to the fullest extent. The 
 "stroke," — if he takes an interest in the crew — will 
 observe carefully the action and style of rowing of each 
 man. In order to do this, he will let a friend take his 
 place occasionally, and he will.be rowed in another boat; 
 and whenever he discovers faults, he will try to correct 
 them on the instant. 
 
 Equalizing the Poioer. — This is a very important mat- 
 E 
 
98 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEKCISES. 
 
 ter, and one frequently lost sight of by some of the most 
 expert oarsmen. Unless the power u]3on each side of the 
 boat is equal, the rudder must be used, — and this imme- 
 diately hinders the " way" or speed of the boat. Nearly 
 every man has his fanorite side upon which to row ; and 
 if you place them upon the opposite — although it might 
 be done for the purpose of making the .sides equal in 
 weight, power, or perhaps both — they are apt to com- 
 plain, forgettmg that it is by this means they become 
 scientific oarsmen. A man knows little of r owing, or 
 handling the oar, who can row only on one side. After 
 the selection of the crew, the next important point is 
 equalizing its power; and this must be done almost re- 
 gardless of weight. In the old style of boats, where each 
 man was obliged to sit close to the side, weight had to be 
 taken into consideration in order to keep the boat on an 
 even keel. But now the boats are quite different, being 
 only wide enough to sit in. The first thing to look to is 
 the propelling power, and to place it in such a position 
 that it will produce all the speed possible. The power be- 
 ing equal on both sides, the boat glides through the water 
 upon a straight course, the cockswain having no occasion 
 to use the rudder. There is no resistance, and consequent- 
 ly the speed of the boat must be increased. 
 
 Oars Entering the Water at JEqual Distances Apart. — This 
 must be strictly observed by each one of the crew. The 
 distance between the blade of each man's oar as it enters 
 the water should be exact. Then every one of the crew 
 takes the weight at the same time, and the boat will go 
 steady and upon her bottom. But if one is short in his 
 sti'oke, and his oar strikes the water in advance of the 
 others, he not only gets the weight of the boat first, but it 
 tends to give her a rocking motion, which frequently 
 
BOWING. 99 
 
 throws the whole crew out of stroke, and consequently 
 lessens the sijeed. This is an error to which I wish to call 
 particular attention, for I have seen it so much in practice 
 that I have sometimes thought that one of the most im- 
 portant and essential principles in scientific oarsmanship 
 was being lost. 
 
 As I have said before, the stroke should be uniform, so 
 that each one of the crew can take and execute it with 
 ease and grace. If it is very long, then the short-armed 
 or short-bodied man is obliged to make an extra exertion 
 in order that his oar will enter the Avater at the proper dis- 
 tance. The movement of the body if possible should be 
 the same, or as neai' the same as the different formations 
 will permit. 
 
 The Stroke. — In this there can be no regular system laid 
 down as regards the length, and so on. The grand and 
 most essential point is to lay out the strength to the best 
 advantage, although I think that no crew in a contest 
 should row less than forty strokes per minute. This can 
 be made a full, long, sweeping stroke, but not slow, as the 
 number will show, the shortness being in the " recover," 
 or when the oars are out of the water. It should be 
 smooth and uniform, without any sj)lash or jerk, the oar 
 entering the water, as I have before fully described, fair 
 and clean, feeling the weight light and gradually at first, 
 then increasmg the power until abreast of the roAvlock or 
 outrigger, where the full strength is put on, and from that 
 to the " finish" or end of the stroke. Skill must here be 
 used to " feather" clean, without holding or raising water 
 with the shank or blade. The manner of performing this 
 I have fully explained under its proper headmg? 
 
 Many differ in oj)inion in regard to the height. The 
 blade of the oar should be from the water on the recover, 
 
100 MANUAL OP PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 or as it passes from aft to forward. But in'tHs there can 
 be no regular or specific height given. It depends entirely 
 upon the state of the water. If it is smooth, the " feather" 
 should he low and natural. There is not the slightest 
 danger of the blade touching the water between the 
 strokes while in the hands of a skillful oarsman. When 
 the water is rough, the oar must be* raised just high enough 
 to clear the ripple. 
 
 I have been informed by a gentleman who witnessed 
 the contest last year between the Oxford and Cambridge 
 crews, that the former, between each stroke, raised their 
 oars exceedingly high. If that was so — and I have no 
 reason to doubt it — it must have bedh in consequence of 
 what is called in England " lumpy watei'," or what we call 
 "rough water," for I can not believe that the crew that 
 could make such a race and time as was made on that occa- 
 sion, could have done it with their oars swinging or hover- 
 ing in the air. It is performed only in my judgment by 
 science, nerve, strength, and endurance. If each one of 
 the crew moves and takes the water alike, it will be almost 
 impossible to detect the slightest alteration ia the speed 
 of the boat between the strokes ; that is, provided the 
 swing of the body is not over the perpendicular. The 
 body should swing' very little, if any, beyond the perpen- 
 dicular. When the bodies of four, six, or eight oarsmen 
 are thrown backward or toward the bow of the boat, it 
 must tend to press that part down, causing her to " dodge" 
 or " dip ;" and if the bow goes down, the stern must neces- 
 sarily come up. Thus you see the water lines of the boat 
 are changed at every stroke, and consequently impedes her 
 sjjeed. • 
 
 Trimtning the Boat. — Getting and keej^ing the boat in 
 trim is very essential when speed is required. A boat 
 
BOWING. 101 
 
 should be rowed upon her bottom; not fii'st on one side , 
 and then on the other, Nor should she be trimmed either 
 by the bow or stern, but exactly upon an even keel or 
 bottom. This can generally be done by placing the heavy 
 men amidships or in the middle of thje boat, where in every 
 case the strongest men should be seated. 
 
 Princijocd Faults hi Beginners. — 1. Stooping forward 
 over tlie oar just before or at the finish of the stroke. 2. 
 Making the first half of the stroke in the air, or not putting 
 the oar in the water imtil it gets abreast or abaft the row- 
 lock. This is one of the expedients often used by men 
 who are shirking the work. It is a sort of accompaniment 
 to the previous fault. 3. Not extending the arms at the 
 elbows, but keeping them partially bent, thereby losing 
 much power. 4. Round rowing ; that is, performing too 
 great a circle with the blade of ^he oar both out and in 
 the water. That is, as the oar goes forward the blade is 
 high up in the air, and in entering the water it is plunged 
 down deep, by which that side of the boat is dragged 
 down, and her way partially stopped. 5. Raising the el- 
 bows out and in board from the sides. This practice has 
 not only a very bad appearance, but much of the power is 
 lost. 6. Turnmg the head at every stroke to look at the 
 oar. This not only tires the muscles of the neck and 
 shoulders, but leads to uneven rowing. 7. Shortening the 
 neck by dropping the head toward the breast, thereby 
 raising the shoulders and preventing free breathing. 8. 
 Turning the head to look at every passing object. The 
 foregoing are the principal faults of begimiers, which by a 
 little care and attention might be avoicWd. 
 
 Stroke- Oar and Keeping Strohe. — As the stroke is given 
 by the person rowing in that position, so it should be taken 
 and imitated Ify each one of the crew. It is presumed that 
 
102 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 you have selected the very best man in the crew for that 
 place. I mean the best man as regards skill and science 
 in the work he is called upon to do while in the boat. If 
 that is so, then by every means in your power try to be- 
 come equal to him. ^Measure well the length and depth 
 of each stroke ; follow if possible the exact movement he 
 makes, and keep the stroke to the very second. When he 
 is pulling strong, you do likewise ; when easy, you will do 
 the same. A man that is pulling easy, or what is called 
 " shirking," when the rest of the crew are rowing hard, 
 though he may keep time, can not well keep the stroke. It 
 is only necessary to watch for a moment the blade of his 
 oar, and the fault is detected. The speed of the boat de- 
 pends entirely upon the true and perfect action of each 
 man, laying out his or their strength at the same moment, 
 to the same degree, and in the same direction. Perfect 
 time being kept, their acts become simultaneous, all 
 moving and performing as one man. So important is 
 keeiDing the stroke with true accuracy, that a crew pulling 
 well together will always beat one of heavier, stronger, 
 and perhaps better men, who row in different or various 
 styles, or Avhat is often called " every man upon his 
 stroke," no two oars taking the water at the same time. 
 For speed, the action and jDOwer must be simultaneous. 
 
 Meeting the Oar. — This is most generally caused through 
 weakness — princij)ally of the back, or it may be from a tend- 
 ency to shirk: the one being impossible to prevent until 
 the strength is restored by exercise ; the other caused or 
 produced by disinclination or laziness. Whatever may be 
 the cause, it is dl^habit which is exceedingly difficult to 
 remedy, especially when weakness has produced it; for 
 here the back has not the power to bring the oar through 
 the water in the same time as the stroke. 'Consequently 
 
ROWING. 103 
 
 the body meets it, by which, means the force and power is 
 lost. 
 
 Early Practice. — The excellence or beauty of rowing lies 
 in doing it well. There is nothing that enables a beginner 
 to detect and correct faults as slow, careful rowing at first. 
 Twenty or twenty-five strokes per minute are quite enough 
 to commence with; then almost every fault is visible. 
 The movement of the body, the ' length of stroke, the 
 entering of the oar in the water — in fact, about every error 
 can be noticed at this pace. It is in this rowing that the 
 correct style should be fixed upon, and all ought to follow 
 it to the best of their ability. 
 
 I have already described the proper manner of holding 
 the oar, but in rowing with ease, grace, and style, the fol- 
 lowing points should be considered : each man must have 
 his rowlock of the exact width, so that he can get his full 
 reach forward. The body should be bent forward at the 
 hips only ; the back straight ; head well up ; shoulders 
 freely extended; the eyes glancing horizontally toward 
 the blade of the oar, but not so that the head is turned. 
 The oar should enter the water without any " slap" or 
 splash, the blade at right angles with its surface ; then the 
 " pull." 
 
 This is the most important and difficult point or part to 
 get correct, and nothing but practice Avill give the oarsman 
 skill and science to tell the exact moment in which the 
 greatest amount of force and power should be put on. I 
 have said elsewhere that it should be put on just before 
 the blade gets abreast of the rowlock, and continued from 
 that moment until it leaves the water. 
 
 Close application, with many years of practical expe- 
 rience, has satisfied me that Avith this system of rowing, a 
 gi-eater amount of speed is gained. It will often appear to 
 
104 MANUAL OP PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 the casual observer, while looking at a well practiced crew, 
 that the power is put on at the moment the oar touches 
 the water. But it is not really so. As soon as the full, 
 stroke is attained, the arms and shoulders bring the oar 
 home by bending the elbows, but keeping them close to 
 the body, the back nearly straight, the shoulders natural, 
 the chest open, that the lungs may have full play, the head 
 easy, and not bent forward. I have said that this practice 
 must be executed slowly and with much care and atten- 
 tion ; then, as you improve in skill, increase the number of 
 strokes and their poAver. The quickness and strength 
 must be kept up only as long as you are rowing or striking- 
 together. The moment you feel fatigued, ease up, and 
 when refreshed, try again. This is called rowing hard, or 
 " spurting." The average number of strokes for perfect 
 execution, should not exceed forty-four per minute ; beyond 
 this number the exertion becomes so great that much of 
 the power is lost. 
 
 How to Train. — It is important to know how to train 
 for rowing, walking, and running, or any exercise or com- 
 petition Avhere science, stamina, and endurance are re- 
 quired; to learn how to get into the finest possible state 
 of health and condition. Vigorous health and fine con- 
 dition is every thing, and in this state a man can do almost 
 any thing. The true principle of training is to nourish 
 the body as rapidly as possible, and at the same time get 
 rid of the loose or "soft flesh." 
 
 Training may be compared to the rapid consumption of 
 fuel in locomotive engines by a quick draught of air, and 
 the production of steam from an immense extent of heated 
 surface, obtained by exposing to the fii"e many tubes filled 
 with water. The best of fuel is supplied to the man in 
 trainins; in the form of food. His smoke and cinders must 
 
ROWING. 105 
 
 Tbe got rid of rapidly, so as to excite the fierce combustion 
 demanded for the pace he has to go and the long continued 
 efforts he has to make. 
 
 Now, to accomplish this, the fire-grate and chimneys of 
 the human engine must be kept clear and in perfect work- 
 ing order. The skin, which lets off the waste steam and 
 smoke from millions of pores or something like twenty- 
 eight miles of tubing, is of the first importance. By long 
 experience from the Greeks and Romans uj) to the present 
 day, those taking an. interest in physical culture have paid 
 the closest attention to the skin, whether in the prepara- 
 tion for a contest between men or horses. A great amount 
 of friction is necessary for cleansing the skin. Perspiration 
 is excited and kept up at regular intervals, and the pores 
 are cleansed by rubbing first with coarse towels, and then 
 with sj^onge and water. By this means, the circulation of 
 , the blood in the minute net-AVork of vessels all over the 
 body is assisted. A man in good health will discharge from 
 two to three and a half pounds ©f water alone from the skin 
 daily. But in training, this is greatly increased. 
 
 Then the lungs, being nearer to the central furnace of 
 the body, are of even more imj)ortance to be kept at w^ork. 
 Then the skin, for from them the principal part of the 
 smoke must be got rid of, besides a good deal of steam ; 
 or, in other words, carbonic acid gas and watery vapor. In 
 ordinary health a man expires about. twenty-one ounces of 
 steam daily ; of course a man undergoing great exertion 
 breathes off much more than this. We can all readily see 
 that for a man to have what is called good " wind" or en- 
 durance, his lungs must be able to bear the constant and 
 rapid contraction and expansion, and the strong action of 
 the heart in driving on the vital stream, without fatigue or 
 distress. I would advise no person with a weak chest ever 
 
 E* 
 
106 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 to attempt to go into a hard course of " training," tlaougli 
 the regimen or exercise very moderately and gradually 
 applied would be beneficial, by expanding and enlarging 
 the chest, for it simply embraces the well-known precepts 
 of fresh aii', exercise, simple food, no excesses, and early 
 hours. 
 
 Training is for those who are favored by nature with a 
 strong constitution, and who can endure exercise occa- 
 sionally as severe as the man who is preparing for a contest 
 upon the water goes through. By it the lungs are venti- 
 lated as they can not be in ordinary exercise, arid the high 
 vigor of the system maintained. In quiet breathing, as 
 much as 100 cubic inches of air rematils in the chest, while 
 only about 25 inches is expired. But with active exercise, 
 this is increased to 140 cubic inches, and renewed at the 
 rate of from 40 to 50 times in a minute. 
 
 As athletic games are becoming so popular with us, and • 
 many young meri being ambitious to engage in them either 
 for pleasure or fame, I will Jay down some rules as a guide 
 by which they will be able to perform to better advantage. 
 Many men try to get into condition for competition whose 
 business prevents them from devoting much time to train- 
 ing; it is for this class that the following advice is given. 
 I do not mean to say that this course will bring a man to 
 any thing like perfection, but he will be able to acquit 
 himself respectably in any comj)etition. I know many 
 young men, and I believe there are thousands who Avould 
 like to train, but the principal portion of the day being oc- 
 cupied either at study, in an office, or elsewhere, they im- 
 agine there is no time for exercise or to improve the con- 
 dition. But I must be allowed to differ with all such, and 
 I have not the least doubt that I shall be able to convince 
 them to the contrary. 
 
 JAf 
 
KOWINGt, 107 
 
 Now what has been the general course of practice with 
 our amateur boat-ckxbs just previous to a regatta ? The 
 gentlemen composing the crew, or tlie greater number of 
 them, have perhaps been confined to an office all day ; they 
 enter to compete for some prize, or for that which is of more 
 value — fame and honor. They are perhaps ignorant of or 
 throw aside entirely the strict rules of training, but com- 
 mence reducing themselves. How do they do it? They 
 get into the boat at night when the dew is falling, and row 
 until they can hardly raise the oar out of the water from 
 fatigue and exhaustion. ^SV^hen they arrive at the boat- 
 house they are hi a profuse perspiration. Then in place of 
 rubbing dry and talcing a fine sponge bath, putting on dry 
 clothing and going to bed, they often walk home in their 
 wet clothes. Some being more indiscreet than others, will 
 stof) at an ale-house and drmk, getting home at a very late 
 hour. If a man has the strongest constitution possible, 
 such action will soon break it down. This is what I call 
 the worst kind of training. It would be far better to take 
 none at all. 
 
 The man going into strict training wants and must have 
 joatience, for without it no one can ever get into the re- 
 quired condition. It generally takes from thirty to sixty 
 days, according to the amount of superfluous flesh to be 
 removed. To do this a man must j)ersevere. Some degree 
 of courage or tenacity is here required, and unless you 
 have it, it would be very doubtful if you would stick 
 properly to the rules of trainmg. 
 
 I have seen young gentlemen, when first selected for a 
 crew, exhibit symptoms of nervousness. This operates 
 against a man at the moment of excitement, and is apt to 
 deprive him of much of his natural power. But I would 
 ten to one rather see a man a little nervous than to see him 
 
108 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 over-confident; for I have always found the nervous man 
 to pay stricter attention to his training than the over-con- 
 fident one. Over-conlidence has lost many a race by the 
 men not getting into fine condition. 
 
 The old system of training, in my opinion, was perfect- 
 ly ridiculous. It took from the man much of his vitality, 
 and left him in many instances a perfect wreck. 
 
 The modern one, although perhaps subject to 'many 
 improvements, is beyond all doubt the proper one. The 
 right method of training is to get into condition with a 
 lasting benefit to the constituti^! 
 
 First, then, remember exercise creates the demand. 
 Food yields the supply. This must be the result if the 
 system of exercise is properly carried out. In olden times 
 the Greek and Roman athletes paid great attention to the 
 physical exercises, but at the same time were allowed to 
 gorge to their fullest extent. This is not so at the present 
 day. Two good meals a day, Avith meat, is considered 
 quite sufficient : — those are breakfast and dinner. The 
 supper should be very simple, composed of oatmeal, bis- 
 cuit, dry toast, tea without milk, and with very little 
 sugar. After supper a short walk might be taken, and 
 then to bed at nine or half j)ast nine o'clock. 
 
 Walking and running are the chief exercises to improve 
 the wind and reduce the flesh. Tlje man in training 
 should leave his bed at six in the morning in his usual 
 training dress. Flannel must be worn next the skin. Com- 
 mence the walk at a moderate pace, and as the blood gets 
 into a brisk circulation, increase the speed. From two to 
 four miles should be gone over every morning, j)roviding 
 the air is dry and the walking good. The last mile in 
 coming home must be done on a run. Try occasionally a 
 spurt, in order to see how the wind is improving. 
 
EOWIXG. 109 
 
 Then go. immGdiately to a room where there is no draft ; 
 remove first the hat or cap, next the pants and drawers. 
 Now ajDply the coarse towels, and rub dry. While this is 
 going on, you will find the perspiration flowing freely from 
 every pore in the upper part of the body. Slip off the 
 shoes or boots, wipe the feet dry, and put on dry stock- 
 ings and drawers, Now j)ull off the shirt, and rub per- 
 fectly dry ; after which a sponge with cold water can be 
 passed qxiickly over the chest and shoulders. Wipe dr}^, 
 and dress. A series of strong gymnastic exercises is some- 
 times adopted. Great attention should be paid to the 
 condition of the skin. It should be smooth, soft, yet firm, 
 and tight over the muscles, having the look of a blood 
 horse when in perfect condition ; what I might term a 
 transparent brilliancy. The muscles should stand out hard 
 and jDrominent, and showing no i-ounding-off by fat. Per- 
 sons in good health train full and j)lump. I mean they 
 will look much larger stripped, although they may be from 
 ten to thirty pounds lighter than when they commenced 
 exercising. But if they fall off, it shows that they are not 
 able to bear the severity of the process. 
 
 Persons while training must avoid taking liquids in 
 large draughts, as it is prejudicial to good digestion. 
 Thirst always follows or arises from violent exercises, and 
 great carg must be taken in the manner of quenching it. 
 This should be done by sipping small quantities, rinsing 
 out the mouth, pouring water on the wrists, etc. Never 
 take large draughts after severe exertion. I believe water 
 tOt be the very best beverage, to be drunk during any 
 strong exercise — such as walking, running, rowing. Tea,- 
 if drank moderately cool, is, however, a very light and 
 stimulating drink ; but beer and spirits of any or every 
 kind, are fatal to all great efforts. 
 
110 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEBCISES. 
 
 A diet ill which flesh is the principal article, is indispen- 
 sable in our climate and with our habits. There is this im- 
 portant piece of encouragement in favor of adopting a reg- 
 iilar system of exercise : that Avhen the body is in perfect 
 working order, the digestion partakes in tRc general high 
 tone. A man then feels like" a man, and rejoices in having 
 the stomach of an ostrich — but the stomach once out of 
 condition, how miserable we feel. Each day is almost a 
 misery of life.- 'Now what is there to prevent or hinder 
 all men from attaining the full physical capabilities with 
 which nature has endowed them ? Unfortunately, such is 
 the demand nowadays for intellectual prowess, that the 
 poor body gets neglected, and too often cruelly sacrificed. 
 Most men dislike training, not on account of the work 
 there is to do, but because it is so seldom done properly. 
 Great harm is often done by the attempt to put a man 
 who is out of condition through a course of training in too 
 short a time. This kind of work can not be hurried over; 
 it is the haste that causes the injury. 
 
 /Selection of Men for a J^oafs Creto. — In selecting men 
 to row, you must keep in view the kind of work there is 
 to be done, and examine well the frame-work that is about 
 to do it. The work to be done consists in pulling an oar 
 or scull through the water by the muscles of the arms, 
 shoulders, and back, together with the resisting .power of 
 the legs. Much of the power exerted by the whole uiDj)er 
 part of the body is conveyed by the thighs and legs to 
 the stretcher, which acts as the resisting power, and pre- 
 vents the seat from gliding off the thwart. It is necessary 
 that the legs should be strong without being fleshy. Now 
 in making the selection of a boat's crew, it must be borne 
 in mind that the following points are essential — though,, 
 of course this, like all rules, admits of exceptions. 
 
EOWIXG. Ill 
 
 First, then, look at the depth of chest — for unless there 
 is lung capacity, the imiscular power will not be sustained 
 through the full distance. Next, the arms, shoulders, and 
 hack should he considered. These should be strong and 
 muscular, or covered with that which exercise would con- 
 vert into muscle. The arms should be of good length, with 
 full shoulders. The loins must be strong. A man can not 
 always judge aright by merely looking at this point. Some 
 men there are who have very small waists, yet are remark- 
 ably strong ; others with large ones are comiDaratively 
 weak. This can be only rightly known by a trial. AVhat 
 would be the action of a man roAving, who had strong 
 arms and shoulders, but a weak back ? The bodj^, instead 
 of drawing the oar to it by the muscles of the arm, would, 
 in consequence of the loins being weak, itself be drawn 
 forward over the oar, and the stroke be rendered ineffect- 
 ive. It is a very difficult matter to tell to any degree of 
 certainty the strength or cajDacity of any individual unless 
 by an actual trial ; for so much depends upon the early 
 habits of a man, that no conclusion from the formation can 
 possibly be arrived at. You take a slow awkward mail 
 and place him in the pi'esent style of race-boat, and he 
 would in all possibility prove useless. 
 
 Now having examined the muscular strength, we turn 
 our attention to the " wind" — the lungs and. the hftirt. 
 •There should be no cough. The heart should be healthy 
 and free from palpitation or any excitement. 
 
 In regard to weight, I believe that 160 or 165 pounds 
 is the very best weight that can possibly be j)laced in the 
 present class of boats*for speed. As a general thing, in 
 men that weigh over 170 pounds, the weight is out of pro- 
 • portion to their muscular power. I know of but two ex- 
 ceptions to this. With the old style of boat that was 
 
112 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 formerly in use, heavy men were wanted to drive them 
 through the water ; hut within the last few years, great 
 improvements have been made in the model and weight of 
 boats. The lightest weight should not be less than 138 or 
 140 pounds. If there is too much difference in the weight 
 and strength of the men, the oars will not be pulled through 
 the water with that precision and power, without which 
 the boat Avill not attain her full rate of speed. Between 
 160 and 140 is the Aveight in condition ; nearer the former 
 than the latter if possible. 
 
 * TJie Practice Each Day. — The crew being selected, they 
 will now commence work. It is by all means desirable 
 that they should take their walks, runs, and meals together. 
 In order that this may be done, board should be taken at 
 some good farm-house near the river or lake, where at all 
 times you could take your practice in the boat, regardless 
 of wmd or current. If it is summer, you should rise at 6 
 A. M,, and take the morning walk and run, of from two to 
 four miles, according to the state of the weather and the 
 roads. If the morning is stormy, take exercise in-doors ; 
 bring the skipping-rope, Indian clubs, swinging-bar, dumb- 
 bells, and so on. At the conclusion of the exercise, rub 
 well with crash towel, to be followed with sponge and cold 
 water. Wipe dry, and put on well aired flannel. At 8 
 o'cfock you will be prepared to enjoy your first meal. 
 
 PreaJcfast should consist of finely, broiled beef or mut- 
 ton, with biscuit or bread a day old, with perhaps some 
 dry toast. Tea without milk, and very little sugar ; this 
 must not be taken too strong. Coffee or cocoa must not 
 be used. • 
 
 . After breakfast, the time can be spent until 10.30 in any 
 bodily amusement that will not produce fatigue — a game* 
 of billiards, quoits, or the like. At the hour appointed, the 
 
BOWING. 113 
 
 crew shoiild be in their boat for their morning's practice. 
 If the training is for a three mile race, the exercise in tlic . 
 boat should not exceed thirty-five minutes. If for a five 
 mile race, forty-five minutes. Many men are under the 
 impression the longer they practice, the better they row, 
 foi'getting that after becoming tired, it is next to impossi- 
 ble to row well in a crank boat. It is not the longer you 
 row that imparts the skill in rowing ; it is the more frC' 
 quently you practice. Returning from the exercise, you 
 should not be in a condition ready to lie down, but after 
 washing and dressing, feeling refreshed by taking it. 
 
 Upon getting out of the boat, five minutes' exercise can 
 be taken with the clubs, then wipe dry, and if it is a salt 
 Avater stream or river, take a plunge in it and out again, 
 on no account remaining in the Avater over thi'ee minutes. 
 After being well rubbed, and clean and dry clothing on, 
 take a book and sit down till it is time to dine. 
 
 Dinner should consist of roast beef or mutton, with oc- 
 casionally roast chicken — say once a week. The meat 
 should alway^s be cooked to please the fancy- of those Avho 
 partake of it. Many labor under the false idea that the 
 meat should be quite under-done, or very rare. This is 
 wi'ong ; meat should be ]Dlaced before the man cooked in 
 a manner .that he can best enjoy it — then it is pleasant to 
 the palate, and digestible to the stomach. I have seen 
 some whose stomachs rebelled against rare meat, but who 
 were told that was the only way they must eat it. When 
 in training, those of the crew who like it rare, should have 
 it so, while others Avho may have been tised to eating it 
 better done, should haA^e it so. Any thing that pleases and- 
 tastes Avell to the palate, will be Avell masticated before it 
 is passed into the stomach ; but that which is put into the 
 mouth and SAvalloAved Avithout relish, takes much longer to 
 
114 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 digest. This will hold good with all of us iii every day- 
 life. 
 
 All other meats must he avoided except those named. 
 In the early part of the training, potatoes may be eaten, 
 but very sparingly. Stale bread and biscuit, with a glass 
 of water or cup of weak tea, are admissible. If a man is 
 training well, there is not the least, doubt that he will eat 
 and enjoy this diet. There are some stomachs that are 
 constantly craving for a change. This can not be. . If a 
 man does not work and sleep Avell upon good roast beef, 
 mutton, and chicken, be assured he will not on any other 
 kind of food. Every third or fourth day, a pudding may 
 be partaken of The foundation must be bread or crackers, 
 with little or no milk, and from two to four eggs. I should 
 not advise any to partake of this unless they really felt 
 that the stomach required a change, and this they could 
 relish. 
 
 Half past three o'clock should again find them in the 
 boat for their afternoon row. The same distance as in the 
 morning should be taken. On the return from this exer- 
 cise, attend to rubbing dry, with also hand friction. At 
 seven prepare for supper. 
 
 Supper. — This should be a light meal, and I know of 
 nothing better than oatmeal porridge, with dry toast and 
 a few fresh strawberry or raspberry biscuit. Tea may be 
 used, not too strong, with little sugar and no milk. Occa- 
 sionally a soft boiled Q^g can be taken. 
 
 I have before remarked that much depends upon the 
 constitution. Some will require a more liberal diet than 
 others. A. man who is hardy and whose appetite is good, 
 will train well upon the plainest food ; but another whose 
 constitution is delicate, must be allowed some little change 
 from day to day. Some stomachs are purged by oatmeal ; 
 
EOWING. 115 
 
 when this is the case, it should be avoided. When the 
 men are inclined to be slightly loose in their bowels, toast- 
 ed bi*ead must be used; or if constipation exists, coarse 
 brown bread, made from the best undressed flour. 
 
 I have now given the routine of each day's exercise, 
 which, if taken as directed, will bring the rower into good 
 condition on the day of the race. 
 
 A Day's Training for JRowincj. 
 
 Rise at 6 A. m. — Walk ; slow at first ; as the circulation increases, 
 quicken the pace. One mile out, returning on a run. A dry rub down 
 first, then cold sponge bath and rub. 
 
 Breakfast at 7.30. — Mutton-chop or steak broiled ; stale bread or toast 
 with tea. 
 
 Exercise. — The morning row at 10, terminating at 11. 
 
 Dinner at 1 p. m. — Beef or mutton roast or boiled ; one mealy potato. 
 (See changes under head of training.) 
 
 Exerciseat 3.30. — In the boat, concluding with a good spiu't. 
 
 Tea. — Oatmeal porridge ; tea, toast, one egg boiled soft. • 
 
 Bed ahont 10. — No food should be taken upon going to bed. 
 
 Sujjimari/. 
 
 Sleep. — Between eight and nine hours. 
 
 Exercise. — Walking and rowing about four hours. 
 
 -Diet. — As above. 
 
 The above rules are of course open to modification according to cir- 
 cumstances ; but it must never be lost sight of that good work, regularity, 
 and cleanliness are the principal if not the only rules to be followed to 
 produce thorough good condition. 
 
 Sanitary Hints. 
 
 I add a few hints on the treatment of some disorders by which oarsmen 
 are not unfrequently annoyed. 
 
 Blisters on the Hands. — These are very tipublesome, and should be pre- 
 vented if possible. A preparation of rock-salt, vinegar, horse-radish 
 ground, and arnica, mixed and rubbed upon the inside of the hand once 
 or twice each day, will soon toughen the hands so that the friction of the 
 oar will not blister them. Should blisters form, they should be pricked 
 
116 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEKCISES. 
 
 with a very fine needle, to be inserted obliquely from under the old skin, 
 and the watery fluid contained therein pressed out. I am not in favor 
 of the oarsman, at any time when rowing, putting on kid gloves to protect 
 the hands. If the hands are naturally soft, they should be kept out of 
 the water. The wash I have mentioned will free them from dirt, and 
 water would only tend to soften them. 
 
 Blisters on the Feet. — The feet must be kept scrupulously clean. 
 Should there be any hard, f allous flesh, it must be pared as close as pos- 
 sible with a sharp knife, taking care not to make the part bleed. Then 
 rub on a little simple ointment, or what I have never found to fail, the in- 
 side part of the skin of a boiled potato. Use only soft, loose shoes or 
 boots, with thick soles. 
 
 Blisters on the Seat. — These come from the friction of the thwart, and 
 frequently upon the hip nearest the side of the boat to which you row. 
 They are often very difficult to cure, but I know of nothing better than 
 to wash three or four times a day with castile-soap and milk-warm water. 
 And at night upon going to bed, rub over the parts a salve made from 
 castile-soap and arnica. 
 
 Boils. — These are exceedingly annoying to the oarsman. Upon their 
 first appearance, due attention must be paid to them. If they are upon 
 the seat, or near the hip of the rower, as is most always the case, the best 
 plan is to apply a stimulating plaster, which can be obtained at any drug 
 store. This will ease and relax the inflamed vessels, and to a great de- 
 gree relieve the pain. When ripe, they will often break of themselves ; 
 otherwise they should be discharged by a needle or lancet. The bowels 
 should be kept regular, and sea-bathing taken at least once each day. 
 
 Piles. — I have often found men complaining bitterly about this exceed- 
 ingly painful disease. Piles are in almost every case occasioned by cos- 
 tiveness and cold. These disarrange the liver, and wlren once this organ 
 is out of order, the whole machinery in the human body ceases to work 
 smoothly. The following remedy I believe to be the best. First, attend 
 to restoring the integrity of the digestive functions. This done, take fre- 
 quent sitz-baths ; temperature at between 50° and 60°. Just before and 
 after each stool, bathe well the parts with cold water. If the bowels are 
 gently moved once a day, an(i the piles remain still painful, the applica- 
 tion of the following ointment will give relief: Take of ointment of 
 acetate of lead, an ounce and a half; of finely powdered opium. and gallic 
 acid, one dram each. By this treatment, piles may almost always be 
 relieved, and sometimes cured. But on the recurrence of disordered liver, 
 
EOWING. 117 
 
 they -will be sure to reappear ; and therefore every precaution should be 
 taken to guard against indigestion. Exercise and proper diet are the very 
 best medicines for this disease. 
 
 Day of the Race. 
 
 On the day and" the one previous, very little exercise 
 should be taken. A walk may he indiilged in before 
 breakfast, after which the crew may amuse themselves at 
 chess, or backgammon, or the like, till about two or two 
 and a half hours before the race, when you should take a 
 good meal of roast beef or mutton, hard bread or biscuit, 
 with water or a little weak tea. 
 
 Thirty minutes before entering the boat, each man 
 should be stripped, and first rtiM)ed well with the hands, 
 particularly upon the arms, shoulders, and back. Then 
 take alcohol of ninety-five jser cent, proof, and wash well 
 the whole body, arms, shoulders, back, loins, and legs. 
 These must be rubbed with the hands until dry. There 
 are always friends to be found willing to perform this five 
 minutes' labor on such a day. Next put on the rowing 
 nhirt, drawers, and slippers ; over may be worn a pair 
 of pants and loose coat, which must not be taken off un- 
 til every thing is ready for the start. 
 
 The Start. ^ 
 
 Now is the time to be cool and collected. A man of 
 nervous temperament will always be hiore or less excited 
 at this moment, yet the exercise that he has taken has so 
 strengthened the whole system, that if the mind is where 
 it should be — upon the work that is to be done — he will 
 exhibit little if any excitement. I have upon more than 
 one occasion seen races lost through nothing but timidity 
 or nervousness. This is frequently caused by the oarsman 
 looking at every thing but his business. His duty at this 
 
118 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 moment is to keep his eyes and thoughts only upofi his 
 
 boat and oar. The smallest and crankest boat that has as 
 
 yet been rowed in this country, has been rowed 
 
 by amateur oarsmen. I simply mention this 
 
 fact to show that most of those gentlemen work 
 
 with their brain as well as their muscle, which 
 
 is required in the race-boat of to-day. 
 
 Every thing being ready, you are waiting 
 for the report of the pistol or the word " Go I" 
 The accompanying illustration shows the po- 
 sition that eac"h man should be in at the mo- 
 ment this word is given. Above all things be CsiiBii 
 careful that the blade of the oar takes the 
 water right, and all at the same instant ; then 
 the boat glides away upon her bottom, and 
 every man can pull with all his power. If 
 you are successful in obtaining the lead, the 
 " stroke-oar" should, as soon as possible, cast 
 his eyes at the working of the opponents ; and 
 if he thinks it prudent, may call to his crew to 
 ease a little. This often gives confidence, par- 
 ticularly to those who have never rowed in a 
 race before ; and with one who was tired or 
 nervous at starting, doubles the amount of 
 strength. . When there is a turn to be made 
 in the race, use judgment, and place sufficient 
 distance between you and your oj)j)onents, if 
 possible, so that you will not touch each other 
 at that point. 
 
 In turning a stake or stake-boat, much de- 
 pends upon how your boat arrives there. If the line from 
 the starting-point to the stake be sti'aight, then all should 
 for a moment " hold water," in order to slightly kill or stop 
 
BOWING. 119 
 
 the Avay of the boat; then if the port side makes the turn, 
 the starlboard must "back hard. This is not a good or safe 
 method of turning ; the boat should get there on what I 
 might call a quarter turn, or a sgrt of quarter circle ; then 
 there is not the slightest trouble. I once saw a good ci'ew 
 beaten by making a poor turn, coming to the stake in the 
 manner first described. The boat that has the lead after 
 the turn is made, can scarcely lose it unless some accident 
 should happen. 
 
 At the close of the race rub dry, and put on clean and 
 dry garments as quickly as possible. Wash the -mouth 
 out with water, after which a sherry and egg may be 
 taken, but nothing else. Remember this is not the time 
 to gorge. The internal organs require rest for a short 
 time, and they should have it. 
 
 Mowing loith Sculls. 
 
 Having described the manner of rowing an oar, I will 
 give some hints on handling the sculls. The principle 
 is exactly the same, except that one person uses two 
 sculls instead of one oar. His place is in the middle of 
 the thwart, as in the accompanying engravmg. The sculls 
 should be grasped with the thumb underneath. Care must 
 be taken that they both enter the water at the same time. 
 The power shou.ld be equal, except when you want to 
 turn or avoid touching any thing, 
 
 I Avould advise all beginners to first practice in a good 
 stiff boat before they venture in an outrigger, or even a 
 narrow one ; there is really little danger of accidents, and 
 you will always enter a small boat with much more confi- 
 dence. It is the knowledge how to do a thing that gives 
 one this feeling. One who knows exactly how a piece of 
 work is to be done, finds no difficulty in doing it. So it is 
 
120 
 
 MANUAL OP PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 with an oarsman : if he can row well in a wide 
 paratively stiff boat, he will have the confidence 
 ture in one lighter, for he has now what 
 he did not have at the commencement — 
 practical knowledge of the work to be done. 
 
 We have at present in this country, as 
 they have also in England, two distinct 
 styles of rowing, namely : the short and 
 quick, and the long sweej)ing strokes. Both 
 have their advocates. In this country the 
 gentleman who pulls the short quick stroke 
 is the chamj)ion ; in Europe it is the oppo- 
 site : the one pulling the long stroke hold- 
 ing that proud title. 
 
 There can he no distinct rule laid down 
 with regard to rowing sculls. In my opin- 
 ion much depends upon the natural form 
 and build of the man.* Experience teaches 
 me that a long-bodied and long-armed man 
 could not pull a short, quick stroke as well 
 as he could a long sweeping one. His form 
 operates against him doing so. Upon the 
 other hand, take a short, stout, compact, 
 muscular man, and he will row a short, 
 quick stroke to great advantage, but would 
 
 * It would be a difficult matter to find a better 
 specimen of a man possessing a naturally fine organi- 
 zation and fully cultivated, than the stroke-oar of the 
 Yale Crew of 1864-65. This gentleman possessed 
 both muscular and respiratory power in the highest degree. His meas- 
 urements were : height, 5 feet 91 inches ; weight, 154 pounds ; chest, 41 
 inches; fore-arm, 13|- inches; upper-arm, 16 inches — taking in both 
 biceps and triceps, the measurement was 17-|^ inches ; age 21. 
 
BOWING. 121 
 
 do very little with the long one. Therefore, I say there is 
 no precise guide to govern the length of stroke. Row as 
 naturally as possible, and you will row right. The stroke 
 that can be rowed at the top of one's speed with the least 
 exertion is the best. 
 
 Hints to Moioers. 
 
 Ro*ving is an art ; and when acquired — assisted by the 
 organs of respiration and circulation, or what may be 
 termed endurance — muscular power, instead of being the 
 first, as many think, stands third. 1st, Art ; 2d, Endurance ; 
 3d, Strength. 
 
 When a man presents himself for aquatic honors, his 
 first duty is to see the necessity of being earnest in the 
 work he is about to undertake. He should never under- 
 rate 1^ opponent ; and his best endeavors must be put 
 forth to bring himself into the very best possible physical 
 condition that he is capable of achieving. One month at 
 least should be taken for this purpose. No man ought to 
 be permitted to make one of a crew unless his heart is in 
 the work ; unless he is willing to practice and pay every 
 requisite attention to condition. One over-confident or 
 careless man may be the means of beating a whole crew. 
 
 Training clears the man's body of all impurities, and 
 puts his breathing organs in that state of perfection which 
 is attainable by art. The first thing necessary is to take 
 an exact view of the state of the body — whether it be 
 fleshy or otherwise ; and it is also necessary to know 
 something of the nature of the man — whether he be dull 
 and heavy, or brisk and lively in his manner. If he ap- 
 pears, dull, slow, and heavy, you must find out whether or 
 not it is caused by over-work. If so, revive his spirits by 
 giving him less work and more rest. As his strength and 
 
 F 
 
122 MANUAL OP PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 sj>irits increase, let him exercise ; but not so that he feels 
 weak after it. If the man be in good health when com- 
 mencing the month's prejDaration or practice, the principal 
 object will be to give him good substantial food, such as I 
 have named, and as much exercise as. will keep his- wind 
 good without overtasking him. About the twentieth day 
 his strength and endurance should be tried. It is how- 
 ever to be observed that he is not to be pressed Sit the 
 top of his speed upon the first trial. This should be done 
 five days before the race, and with training clothes ; this 
 will make him row with more vigor when stripped for the 
 race. If the man feels faint just before getting into the 
 boat, a little sherry wine with the yolk of an egg in it 
 may be given. It will be remembered that the two ex- 
 tremes of fullness and fasting must be avoided ; the one 
 damages the wind, and the other occasions faintnes# Aft- 
 er dinner, which should be two hours before roAving, the 
 men should lie down and not be disturbed until twenty 
 minutes before starting, when the rubbing with alcohol 
 should be performed, to be followed as soon as possible by 
 the race. 
 
 I have stated what should be eaten and drunk while 
 undergoing a course of training. Of course it will be un- 
 derstood that nothing not named in the diet or drink 
 should be indulged in. Ales and liquors of every de- 
 scription and tobacco must be avoided. I know there are 
 many men who insist upon drinking ale when training ; 
 but I firmly believe that if two crews were matched to 
 row, both having the same amount of strength and skill, 
 or all things else being equal, and put in training, the one 
 doing the work with ale, the other as I have described, 
 the victory would be with the temperate crew. This was 
 illustrated in the summer of 1865 in our own waters. 
 
BOWING. 123 
 
 Speed of Racing-Boats in England, • 
 The best time made on the Henley Course, from years 
 1853 lip to 1866. This course is 1 mile, 2 furlongs, 20 poles 
 and is beyond all doubt the fairest course for comparisons 
 of speed, there being little current at any time, and the. 
 races always being rowed at slack water. The course from 
 Putney to Mortlalce is greatly influenced by the state of 
 the tide, and in all races the boats invariably rowing with it. 
 
 min. sec. min. sec. 
 
 Eight oars, 7 50|, about 1 mile in 5 50 
 
 Foui- " 8 47J, "1 " 6 30 
 
 Pair " 9 45, " j u 7 jq 
 
 Single-Sculls Boat, 10 11^, " 1 » 7 25 
 
 Hoio to Test the Speed of a Boat. 
 
 The speed of a boat can only be truly tested by changing 
 crews — then trying them in rough and smooth water, with, 
 against, and across tide. Rowing a boat a certain distance, 
 and judging of her speed by the difference in time, is cer- 
 tainly, in my opinion, no fair test. This opinion has been 
 formed from over twenty-five years' practice. Take two 
 boats, then select two crews ; place them, each man in his 
 jDroper position ; let them row at the tojD of their speed, 
 say one mile, and after fifteen minutes' rest, change boats. 
 The distance in those trials should be not less than one- 
 quarter of a mile, and not over one mile. Beyond the lat- 
 ter distance you try the endurance of the men, and not the 
 speed of the boat. I would recommend a half mile. By 
 this means, you will find no difficulty in selecting from any 
 number of boats the one having the greatest speed. 
 
 By a test made in England in 1866, with an eight-oared 
 race-boat, to ascertain the actual force or power it required 
 to propel such a boat through- the water, it was found that 
 
124 MANUAL OP PHYSICAL EXEBCISES. 
 
 a constant force of 1 pounds gives a speed of three miles 
 per hour. Admitting this to be the fact, it will follow 
 that a power of 63 pounds would propel the same boat at 
 the rate of nine miles per hour. This is near the average 
 speed of our college races. In this trial, the whole of the 
 available force was measured, whereas, in rowing, there is 
 only one moment, and that is when the oar is at right 
 angles to the keel of the boat, that the full force expended 
 by the rower is all used in directly propelling the boat. 
 It should be impressed upon the mind of all beginners that 
 neither the commencement nor end of the stroke produce 
 any thing like the same eifect, though both equally tax the 
 strength of the rower. 
 
 The first outriggef boat was built by Henry Clasper, of 
 Newcastle, England, and was rowed at the regatta at Put- 
 ney, on the 20th June, 1844. It was built of mahogany by 
 Clasper himself, assisted by his wife. The model of this 
 boat was beautiful, and it created quite a furore on the 
 Thames when being tried. The dimensions were: 37 feet 
 6 inches length, 24 inches breadth, 12 inches depth. It 
 weighed 145 pounds. The first boat of this class in this 
 country was built by C. J, Thoms, of New York, It was 
 rowed at the Boston Regatta, July 4th, 1855, Its dimen- 
 sions were: 35 feet length, 27 inches breadth, 10^ inches 
 depth. 
 
SAILING. 125 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 SAILING. 
 
 I FANCY it would be a very difficult task for any persoif 
 to trace to its origin the art of sailing. The power of mind 
 over matter might have given to some observant man the 
 first notion of a sail. It would be impossible for a thought- 
 ful man to stand in the rudest constructed vessel without 
 perceiving that the wind exerted a p6wer upon him and 
 his boat, and therefore the thought of a sail must have been 
 coincident with the first launching of the simplest boat. 
 The science of building, of rigging, and of sailing, however, 
 has grown up gradually through a succession of ages, and 
 has now reached a perfection of which the ancients had 
 not the slightest idea. 
 
 It is not my purpose to describe fully the difierent kinds 
 of vessels, but to speak of those only that are used for 
 pleasure, and manned principally by amateurs. To those 
 gentlemen who have a taste for and an mterest in this 
 pleasant amusement, I wish to set forth a few simple rules, 
 which I believe will aid them in the knowledge of sailing 
 or handling a sail-boat or yacht with more pleasure and 
 safety. 
 
 Sailing a Yacht. 
 
 The practical sailing of a yacht is somewhat of an art. 
 First look to the trim of your boat ; then at the set and 
 
126 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 trim of the sails ; and next, and most important, at good 
 and close steering. 
 
 The number of hands to work the sails will dej)end upon 
 the tonnage of the boat, and the number of sails. Two men 
 can easily manage a small model yacht or sail-boat, pro- 
 vided the wind is not blowing too heavily — one steering, 
 the other attending to the jib-sheet. But the general cus- 
 tom in regattas and match races is to have one man for 
 every five tons ; but for pleasure expeditions, you may 
 Take as many as the yacht can comfortably accommodate. 
 
 In preparing to get a schooner yacht under way, the 
 first thing is to see that every thing is in readiness. First 
 cast loose the gaskets from the mainsail, and hoist the 
 same, taking great care first that the peak is well up to its 
 place, then giving *a strong pull on the throat-halliards. 
 This sail should set as flat and as smooth as jjossible. 
 Next set the foresail, and when this is pro23erly up, trim 
 aft the sheets; place the man or men at the jib-halliards ; 
 cast off from the moorings, run up your jib, and you are 
 under way. 
 
 Beating to Windward. 
 
 This is sailing against or sharj) on the wmd. First trim 
 your sheets well aft, and fill away, either on the starboard 
 or port .tack. A vessel is on the starboard tack when the 
 wind is blowing on the starboard side, which is then called 
 the weather side, and the opposite one is the lee side — and 
 the reverse.. In sailing close to the wind, great care must 
 be taken not to sail too close, but always to keep the can- 
 vas full. A skillful boatman, or one who knows how to 
 handle a sail-boat or yacht, will watch every variation of 
 the wind, and meet it either by lufiing or keeping off. If 
 the Vessel is sailmg too near the wind, it may be known by 
 
SAILING. 127 
 
 the sails shivering. In prejDaring to tack, or go-about, see 
 that the sails all draw, and you have good- Avay. If the 
 boat is quick in stays, there will not be the slightest 
 trouble ; but if she is slow, you must begin in time, or per- 
 haps you will find yourself ashore. 
 
 When every thing is ready, put the helm gradually 
 down, and let fly the jib-sheet. If the boat hangs head to 
 wind, haul over the main-boom to windward ; flatten the 
 fore-sheet. When she fills away, trim the sails so that they 
 all draw alike, so that the vessel will steer with as little 
 griping as possible. 
 
 Wearing or Jibing. 
 
 This is one of the most difiicult manoeuvres in sailing, 
 but one which is often done in matches and regattas to 
 save time and distance. If the wind is blowmg heavy, 
 great care must be taken that every thing is clear, and all 
 persons are out of the way of the boom as it swings over. 
 I have seen men swept overboard by the sailing-master 
 being careless or ignorant in making this movement. 
 
 The boom is liable to be sprung or broken. To avoid 
 these accidents, see that the main-sheet is all clear for run- 
 ning; put every one upon his guard by announcing what 
 you are about to do ; then keep her off", and the instant the 
 mainsail has traversed to the other side, change your helm 
 to the reverse, and meet her. This will prevent the 
 broaching-to which v/ould otherwise occur with j)arties 
 sailing for pleasure. I would advise the peak to be dropped 
 when making this movement ; then there is little or no 
 danger. 
 
 /Sailing J3efore the Wind. 
 A vessel running " free," or before the wind, is often very 
 
128 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 difficult to steer, but this can sometimes be remedied by a 
 sliglit alteration in the trim of the sails. If a vessel is sail- 
 ing dead before the wind, should she be schooner-rigged, 
 the foresail and mainsail may be placed in opposite direc- 
 tions, or what is termed " wing-and-wing." Should it not 
 be a boomed foresail, a spar can be used for that purpose. 
 Some large yachts and all pilot-boats use what are called 
 lug foresails. This admits of more canvas, and the sail, 
 as a general thing, sets better. 
 
 Vessels Passing Each Other. 
 
 Care must always be taken to observe the rules of sail- 
 ing when meeting with another vessel. Whichever boat 
 is running " free," or with sheets started, must make or 
 give way for the one " close-hauled ;" for a boat close- 
 hauled on the wind can not conveniently alter her course. 
 But when running free, there is very little trouble to sheer 
 either to the right or left. This is now the general rule ; 
 and it is founded in justice and convenience to all. 
 
 LooTi Out for Squalls. 
 
 If there is any indication of a squall — which may be 
 known by the heavy dark clouds, and seen iij)on the water 
 by an experienced eye from the ri23ple it makes and its 
 black appearance — keep the boat roped full, so that when 
 the squall strikes her, you will have way enough to luff up 
 and shake it out of her. Should it prove too heavy, if this 
 will not do, and she is unable to stand it, let fly the jib and 
 fore-sheets. If you think the wind will continue, reef the 
 mainsail, but look out that you have sufficient room for 
 leeway. While closing the first set taut the topj^ing-lift, 
 lower the peak and throat, hook the reef-tackle to the 
 earing ; tie the reef-points either for the first, second, or 
 
SAILING. 129 
 
 third reef, as necessity may require ; after wMch clap on 
 the halliards, hoist away, and the mainsail is again set. 
 Now give her a little of the jib, or all if she can stand it, 
 and away you go. I would advise gentlemen who are 
 owners of yachts never to undertake the management of 
 them without at least one competent and experienced man 
 on board. From such a person he will learn more by 
 practical demonstration * than any description that can 
 possibly be given ujDon paper. All that ever can be given 
 in such cases is the theory ; the more complicated details 
 must be obtained from experienced boatmen. 
 
 Managing a Boat hy Sails alone, loithout Rudder. 
 
 This requires some practice, which will give confidence. 
 It is well for gentlemen sailing for pleasure to know how 
 to perform and handle a boat under all and every circum- 
 stance. It often haj)pens that the rudder gets out of or- 
 der, especially where the river is narrow and the water 
 shoal. In such a case, what are you to do unless you can 
 work your boat ? There is no alternative but to anchor 
 or go upon the shore. Now these can be avoided if you 
 have a little knowledge of how to manage the boat with- 
 out the rudder. 
 
 In 1848 there was quite a discussion upon this question 
 among amateur yachtsmen and others ; and in order to 
 demonstrate the thing beyond all doubt, the managers of 
 the American Institute, holding their fair in that year at 
 the Castle Garden in New York, gave a regatta open or 
 free for all boats to enter with one sail, and to be managed 
 or worked without rudder, oar, or any thing except the 
 sail and movement of the body. For the prizes ofiered, 
 seven boats started. The course was from Castle Garden 
 around Ellis or Gibbet Island, and return. Here the cur- 
 
130 MANUAL OP PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 rent runs from one and a half to three knots an hour ; hut 
 notwithstanding this, the boats made the distance in good 
 time, and were handled to the satisfaction of all present. 
 
 A boat with only one sail can be managed by one per- 
 son. A jib and mainsail boat should have at least two 
 persons, each one holding the sheet of the sail to which he 
 is assigned. If you are on the wind, keej) the jib wrapt 
 full, and the luff of the main-sail just slightly shivering. 
 By watching closely, and holding the jib and main-sheet 
 in your hand to haul in or slack off, as occasion requii'es, 
 you may sail for hours witfe the greatest pleasure. ' When 
 you want to come about, or tack, let go the jib-sheet, and . 
 at the same time flatten down the main-sheet. If the 
 boat hangs in the eyes of the wind, shove hard the main- 
 boom to windward. 
 
 Sailing before the wind, without a rudder or any thing 
 to guide the boat except the sails, is no easy task. This is 
 managed by dropping the peak of the mainsail, keeping 
 the jib-sheet well aft to prevent her from broaching-to. 
 I advise all who are fond of sailing to ^sractice this. It is 
 not necessary that they should unship the rudder, but just 
 fasten it amidships, and then work the boat. 
 
 Cautions. j 
 
 (1.) Coil up all ropes, and have a place for every thing 
 and every thing in its place. 
 
 (2.) Be careful when jibing or tacking that the boom 
 does not knock you overboard. 
 
 (3.) Never leave any thing in the gangway, and keej) 
 the decks clear. 
 
 (4.) Keep a good lookout ahead, and also look out for 
 squalls, which may generally be observed to windward by 
 the appearance of dark heavy clouds. 
 
SAILING. 131 
 
 (5.) Stand clear of ropes and blocks flying about, when 
 you are tacking and the sails are shaking. 
 
 (6.) Always promptly obey the orders of the sailing- 
 master. 
 
 (7.) When the boat is on the wind, sit on the Aveather 
 side, and try if possible to keep the boat on her bottom. 
 All boats, if the lines are true, will sail faster on their 
 bottom than on their bilge or side. 
 
 (8.) Keej) all the standing riggmg in good order and 
 taut. 
 
 (9.) Should the boat capsize, crawl to the windward, 
 and be careful to keejo clear and not get entangled in the 
 rigging. 
 
 A gentleman who is about to engage in yachting, 
 should always have his eyes open to what is going on, and 
 be ever ready to lend assistance with the greatest prompt- 
 itude. Quickness and agility are the first characteristics 
 of a good yachtsman. The casting-oif or "belaying" a 
 rope quickly is often attended with the most important 
 consequences, in which the losing or saving of life may be 
 concerned. We therefore advise all who are ambitious of 
 becoming proficient yachtsmen to be quick in their evolu- 
 tions, and steady m all their actions. 
 
 Nautical Terms. 
 
 Avast. — An order to stop. 
 
 Ahach. — The situation of the sails when the wind presses their surface 
 against the mast. 
 
 Amidships. — The middle of the vessel. 
 
 Abaft. — Toward the stern. 
 
 Abreast. — Alongside of, or opposite to. 
 
 Athwart, or Thwart Hawse. — Across. 
 
 Bearings. — The widest part of the vessel below the water line; the 
 direction of any object according to the points of the compass. 
 
 Belay. — Make fast. 
 
132 MANUAL OP PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 Bend on. — To make a sail fast to the yard, or bend, or a rope. 
 
 Cleat. — Pieces of wood or iron on which ropes are belayed. 
 
 Cat-head. — Large piece of wood over the bow, having sheaves within 
 it, by which the anchor is hoisted or lowered. 
 
 Combings. — Eaised wood-work around the hatchways, to prevent the 
 water going down the hold. 
 
 Davits. — Pieces of wood or rods of iron, with sheaves or blocks at the 
 ends, projecting over a vessel's side or stern to hoist boats up to. 
 
 Dravxjht. — The depth of water which a vessel requires to float her. 
 
 Fathom. — Six feet. 
 
 Flat. — The jib, jib-boom, fore or main-sheet is said to be "hauled 
 flat" when it is hauled down close. 
 
 Fore and Aft. — Lengthwise the vessel. 
 
 Foul Anchor. — When the cable has a turn around the fluke. 
 
 Gaskets. — Pieces of rope or strips of canvas used to fasten the sail to 
 the yard when it is furled. 
 
 Jury-mast. — A temporary mast rigged in the place of a lost one. 
 
 Log. — A journal of the proceedings of a vessel ; also a line with a 
 triangular piece of wood called the "log," which is cast overboard to as- 
 certain the ship's rate of sailing. 
 
 Scud. — To sweep along before the gale with no sail, or only enough 
 to keep the boat from broaching-to ; also low, thin clouds flying swiftly 
 before the wind. 
 
KECOKD OP EOWING MATCHES AND KEGATl'AS. 133 
 
 CHAPTER Vn. 
 
 RECORD OF ROWING MATCHES AND REGATTAS. 
 
 I GIVE in this chapter a carefully prepared record of all 
 the notable rowing matches and regattas which have come 
 off in the United States ; noting the names of the contest- 
 ants, the description of the match, and the time of the 
 Avinners, 
 
 Dec. 9, 1824. — Four Oars. — The Avierican Star, built by Cham- 
 bers, and rowed by the Whitehall Watermen, gained a victoiy over the 
 Dart, a British boat belonging to the English frigate Huron, Capt. Har- 
 ris. The Dart had rowed eight races, never having Ueen beaten. The 
 challenge came from the officers of the frigate, and was accepted by 
 Major Howard, on the part of the Whitehall boys, to row a five mile 
 race for one thousand dollars a side. Tlie day was pleasant, but the air 
 was keen and cold. At 12.40 the signal was given for the start, and the 
 booming of a cannon from the British frigate gave the fifty thousand 
 people present notice that the boats were off, and the struggle had com- 
 menced. At the start the Star took the lead ; the Dart shortly came 
 up and lapped her ; on which the Whitehall boys, applied a little more 
 power to their oars, forced their boat ahead, and maintained the advan- 
 tage the whole distance, coming to the stake-boat between three and 
 four hundred yards in advance of her competitor. Both stake-boats had 
 the American and British flags flying, and when the Star came in, the 
 crew of the British launch gave her three hearty cheers, and struck their 
 flag. The distance was rowed in twenty-two minutes. The boats 
 started from the vicinity of the frigate, which lay in the stream a short 
 distance from the Battery, and rowed around a boat stationed off the 
 old North Battery. It is reported that not less than fifty thousand peo- 
 ple assembled to witness the race. The judges upon this occasion were, 
 for the American Star, Major Howard, Capt. Henry Robinson, and 
 
.134 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 Eichard Sadlier ; on the part of the British boat, Mr. Henry Barclay and 
 two lieutenants of the Hussars. A dinner was subsequently given by 
 prominent citizens of New York to Capt. Harris and his officers ; and 
 during their stay they weve feted in every possible manner. The White- 
 hall boatmen made every effort to purchase the boat Amei-ican Star, that 
 they might present her to Capt. Harris, but her owner, Mr. Chambers, 
 refused to part with her on any terms. Failing in their object, they, 
 through James H. Aymor, Esq. , informed Capt. Harris of their regrets, 
 to which he responded in suitable terms. The frigate put to sea on the 
 15th December, 1824. 
 
 Juli/ 21, 1835. — Six Oars. — Match^- TFawe against the Eagle, both, 
 boats having picked crews of professional oarsmen from Whitehall. The 
 Wave won with great ease, the winning crew being the lightest, but 
 having the most science. 
 
 Sept. 19, 1835. — Six Oaks. — The first regatta of the New York Am- 
 ateur Boat Club Association took place from Castle Garden, Comnvo- 
 dore Ridgely, John A. Stevens, and others acting as judges. The race 
 was won by the Wave, six oars. No time taken. 
 
 Sept. 19, 1836. — Six Oaks. — The second celebration or annual re- 
 gatta took place, sorting from the same place, the Wave being again vic- 
 torious. In this race nine six-oared boats started. 
 
 July 18, 1837.— Two Oars. — Match — Pioneer, of Whitehall, and 
 Forget-me-not. Won by the former. The race was five miles, and took 
 place from Castle Garden. No time taken. 
 
 July 19, 1837. — Two Oars. — Match — Glide against ILady Washington, 
 the former winning. Rowed by William and Henry Roberts. 
 
 Aug. 4, 1837. — Four Oaks. — Brooklyn agsanst Red Rover. Won by 
 the former. » 
 
 Aug. 13, 1837. — Regatta at Poughkeepsie. Ei-ie, Gondola, Sylph, of 
 New York ; Robt. Bache, Brooklyn ; Washington, Poughkeepsie ; Bache- 
 lor, Pishkill Landing. Won by the Washington. 
 
 Same Bay. — Four Oars. — Brooklyn, Elm, Whitehall ; America. 
 Won by the Brooklyn. The betting before the start was three to one on 
 the America. At the conclusion of this race the ladies invited the vic- 
 tors to a banquet, when they presented each one with a wreath of laurel, 
 in which roses and flowers were entwined. 
 
 Sept. 25, 1837.— Six Oars.— Third regatta of the New York Ama- 
 teur Boat Club Association. Won by the Wave. It was estimated 
 that at least ten thousand people witnessed this race. 
 
EECOKD OF ROWING MATCHES AND EEGATTAS. 135 
 
 Sept. 26, 1837. — Six Oars. — Match — Disowned against Geo. Wash- 
 ington, oi'Pou^\]s.QQ'ps\e, ion $2,000. Won by the former. Seven miles; 
 40 minutes, 3 seconds. 
 
 June 1, 1838. — Six Oaks. — Match — Wizsard-Skiff&g&imt Kosciusko; 
 five miles. Won by the former in 28 minutes, 40 seconds. 
 
 June 11, 1838. — Foun Oars. — Match — Whitehall against Passaic. 
 Won by the former. 
 
 June 29, 1838. — Appeared a challenge in the St. John's Chronicle, from 
 a crew at that place to the Whitehallers, to come there and row them for 
 $1,000. 
 
 Jidij 11, 1838. — Six OARS.^Eegatta : Clod-hopper, Edwin Forrest, 
 Osceola. Won by the first. 
 
 Sept. 10, 1838.— Four Oars.— Match for $2,000—5. Shamhurgh 
 against Independence ; from Robins's Reef to Castle Garden. Won hj the 
 former. Time, 26 minutes. 
 
 June 2, 1839. — Four Oars. — Match for $2,000 — B. Shamhurgh against 
 Shakspeare ; from Robins's Reef to Castle Garden. Won by the latter. 
 Time, 31 minutes, 48 seconds. There was perhaps more excitemejit 
 about this race than any that had ever taken place in this country, and 
 the result was looked upon with surprise and suspicion. The same crew 
 in the same boat had rowed the distance against the Independence in 26 
 minutes, and now she was beaten in 31 minutes, 48 seconds. 
 
 June 10,1839. — Six Oars. -^Regatta at Newburg — Wave, Gazelle, 
 and Ariel, of New York, amateur oarsmen ; Edwin Forrest, Danl. D. 
 Tompkins, and Spark, of New'York, professional oarsmen ; Corsair, Gal- 
 atea, and Scylla, Newburg Clubs; Washington, Poughkeepsie ; Lafitte, 
 Cold Spring. The Corsair won the race ; but as she was rowed by a 
 picked crew, composed of the Ludlows and others, which was against the 
 rules, she was ruled out of the race, and judged not to be entitled to any 
 prize. Duane won the foui'-oared race at the same regatta. 
 
 Juli/ 18, 1839. — Six Oars. — Seven thousand people witnessed a re- 
 gatta on the Schuylkill. Vigilant won the race. 
 
 Aug. 1, 1839. — Four Oars. — Match — Duane against S. S. Willis; 
 six miles ; 45 minutes, 20 seconds. Won by the former. 
 
 Oct. 1, 1839. — Six Oars. — Match — Ann, of PeekskiD, against Wave, 
 of Nev/ York. Won by the former. The glory and pride of the ama- 
 teur oarsmen of the city of New York this day departed. Over fifteen 
 thousand people witnessed the race, and many of the ladies were seen to 
 depart with tears in their eyes. It was the first defeat the Wave had 
 
136 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 ever met. But the great mass of the people thought very highly of the 
 Highland crew ; the ladies in particular : and why should they not ? for 
 next to brains, beautiful women always admire muscle, sinew, and en- 
 durance. 
 
 Upon the same evening another match was made between the two 
 boats, each party reserving the right to place whom they pleased at the 
 oars. The crew of the Wave being under the impression that amateur 
 oarsmen could not contend successfully against professionals, permitted 
 the Whitehallei's to take their boat (which they had done once before in 
 the match with the Eagle), and row to see what they could do with those 
 hardy Highlanders. The match was for one thousand dollars a side, to 
 be rowed from Castle Garden around Bedlow's Island, and return. New 
 York was redeemed, the Wave winning handsomely after a well contested 
 race. 
 
 Oct. 3, 1840. — Single Sculls. — Yankee Doodle, of New York, against 
 Isaac MartUng, of Peekskill ; from Eobins's Eeef to Castle Garden. Won 
 by the former. 
 
 Juli/ 14, 1841, — Six Oars. — Kegatta at Newburg. Eagk and Spark, 
 of New York ; New Jersey, of New Jersey ; Galatea and Scylla, of New- 
 burg ; Washington, of Poughkeepsie ; Ann, of Peekskill ; Duchess, of 
 Hyde Park. Duchess won ; Spark second. This race was rowed in 
 heats, the rules being that only the first two boats could contend in the 
 second ; Duchess Avinning also the second heat and first prize. 
 
 Same Day. — Pour Oars. — Nine boats started for the four-oared race. 
 These were the Thomas Jefferson, J. C. Stevens, Tempest, Duane, and 
 Atlantic, of New York ; the Gondola and lone, of Newburg ; the Ann, of 
 Peekskill ; the Virago, of New Paltz. The Jefferson won the first prize ; 
 the Duane the second. 
 
 Aug. 31, 1842. — Six Oars. — Eegatta at Newburg. In the six-oared 
 race the New Jersey, of New Jersey, won. Time, 20 minutes, 35 seconds ; 
 distance said to be three miles. 
 
 Same Day. — Pour Oars. — 1\iQWashington, of New York, won. Time, 
 23 minutes, 19 seconds. 
 
 Same Day. — Two Pair Sculls. — The Crolius, of New York, won. 
 Time, 28 minutes, 42 seconds. 
 
 Oct. 18, 1842. — Pour Oars. — Geo. Washington against Geo. W. Chap- 
 man. Prom Castle Garden around Bedlow's Island. "Won by the Chap- 
 man. Time said to be 27 minutes. 
 
 Sept. 29, 1843. — Single Sculls. — Match — S. Roberts against S. Dor- 
 
EECOED OF ROWING MATCHES AND REGATTAS. 137 
 
 Ion. Won by Roberts. Time, 37 minutes. Distance supposed to be 
 five miles. These gentlemen rowed three races, Dorlon winning the 
 first, and Roberts the two last. 
 
 Sept. 22, 1845. — Four Oaks. — Regatta from Elysian Fields, Hoboken. 
 Thomas Jefferson won. 
 
 Same Day. — Two Paik of Sculls. — Battery Pet won, beating four 
 others. 
 
 Oct. 17, 1846. — Four Oars. — Regatta from Castle Garden. Gen. 
 Taylor won. Time, 31 minutes, 30 seconds. 
 
 July 20, 1847. — Single Sculls. — The great match between R. S. 
 Martin, of Whitehall, and Charles Thomas, of Pier 1, North River. 
 Won by the latter. The race was from Castle Garden around Robins's 
 Reef Light, and return. The race was started by the judges in one of the 
 most terrific thunder-storms ever known in the harbor of New York ; the 
 consequence was that Martin's boat swamped, and he was obliged to 
 drift alongside of a vessel. Tliomas's boat, by good management, 
 weathered the storm, went over the course, and won the race. 
 
 Sejjt. 13, 1847. — Singlk Sculls. — Match between S.Roberts and R. 
 S. Martin ; ten miles. Won by Roberts. Time, 1 hour, 20 minutes. 
 From Jersey City around Robins's Reef, and return. 
 
 Aug. 12, 1850. — Four Oars. — From the Elysian Fields, Hoboken. 
 Washinyton against Thomas Jefferson. Won by the latter. Time, 27 
 minutes. Said to be five miles. The Jefferson at this time was called 
 by the club that owned her the " Pride of the Hudson." 
 
 Oct. 5, 1850. — Single Sculls. — From Castle Garden, around Ellis 
 Island. James Lee against Charles Thomas. Won by Lee. Time not 
 taken. 
 
 July 4, 1 855 — Four Oars. — Boston Regatta ; four-oared race. Won 
 by the New York boat, J. D. B.. Putman. 
 
 July 5, 1855. — On Charles River, Boston. — The first match between 
 the New York and St. John's crews. The boats were the J. D. R. Put- 
 man of New York, and Neptune of St. John's. The match was won by 
 the fetter. The Putman cai'ried a cockswain weighing 135 pounds, the 
 St. John men rowing without cockswain or rudder. 
 
 Oct. 17, 1855. — Four Oars. — First regatta of the Empire City Re- 
 gatta Club. Won by the Lady Putman. Time, 36 minutes ^ second. 
 Distance, five miles. Single Sculls Champion Race, in working boats, 
 won by Thomas Burns. Time, 42 minutes, 15 seconds. 
 
 June 23, 1856. — ^FouR Oars. — Regatta of the Empire City Regatta 
 
138 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEECISBS. 
 
 Club. Five miles. "Won by the Wm. H. Tarhoss. Time, 34 minutes, 
 34 seconds. 
 
 Oct. 29, 1857. — Four Oars. — Match on Harlem Elver, New York. 
 Robert H. Allair against Experiment. This was the closest race ever 
 rowed in Arnerica ; the judges being unable to agree as to which boat 
 was the winner, both parties consented to a draw. 
 
 July 15, 1858. — Single Sculls. — Match — Lynch against Daw. From 
 Fort Washington, North Eiver. Won by Daw. 
 
 Sept. 17, 1858. — Four Oars. — Empire City Kegatta, Harlem Biver. 
 Won by George J. Brown. Time, 34 minutes, 42 seconds. 
 
 July 26, 1859. — Six Oars. — College Eegatta, Worcester, Mass. 
 Harvard the victor, over Yale and Brown. Three miles in 19 minutes, 
 18 seconds. 
 
 July 27, 1859. — Six Oars. — Worcester City Eegatta, the Yale and 
 Harvard boats only starting. Won by Yale. Three miles in 19 min- 
 utes, 14 seconds. 
 
 Sept. 8, 1859. — ^Four Oars. — Albany Eegatta ; three miles. Won 
 by the Stranger of Poughkeepsie. Time, 20 minutes, 1 1 seconds. 
 
 Sept. 12, 1859. — ^FouR Oars. — Match on Harlem Eiver; five miles. 
 Dan. Bryant against George J. Broivn. Bryant wins. Time, 34 min- 
 utes, 40 seconds. In consequence of a complaint of fouling being made 
 to the judges by the crew of the Brown, the money was drawn. 
 
 Oct. 24, 1859. — Single Sculls. — At Boston Eegatta. Won by 
 Joshua Ward. Three miles. Time, 23 minutes, 16 seconds. 
 
 July 4, 1860. — Four Oars. — New York Eegatta at Castle Garden. 
 Won by Unexpected. . Single Sculls. — Same day and j^lace. Joshua 
 Ward won the first prize for single sculls. 
 
 July 19, 1860. — Four Oars. — Staten Island Eegatta. Won by the 
 Poughkeepsie boat, Stranger. 
 
 July 24, 1860. — Six Oaes. — College Eegatta, Worcester, Mass. 
 Harvard against Yale. Harvard the victor. Three miles in 18 minutes, 
 53 seconds. 
 
 July 24, I860.— Six Oars.— Worcester City Eegatta. Won b^ the 
 Gersh Banker. Three miles. * Time, 18 minutes, 37 seconds. The 
 writer is authorized by the Eegatta Committee of Worcester, to state 
 that the distance was not fully three miles, from the fact that in the 
 winter of '64 the course was correctly measured upon the ice, and the 
 stake for the years '64-5 was considerably above that of 1860. 
 
 Sept. 5, 1860. — Six Oars. — ^At Poughkeepsie. James McKay against 
 
EECOED OF KOWING MATCHES AND KEGATTAS. 139 
 
 Gersh Banker. Won by the McKay. Tive miles. Time, 32 minutes, 
 40 seconds. 
 
 Champion Belt Race, at Staten Island ; single sculls, five miles. Won 
 by Ward. Time, 35 minutes, 10 seconds. It must have been a short 
 five miles. 
 
 Sejyt. 10, 1860. — Empire CityKegatta. GuUcJc won the six-oar prize ; 
 time, 37 minutes, 7 seconds. George J. Brown won the four-oar prize. 
 The Champion Sculls' prize was won by P. Lynch ; time, 40 minutes, 12 
 seconds. 
 
 Nov. 22, 1860. — Single Sculls. — Match from Jersey City. Andrew 
 Eay against William H. Decker. Won by Fay. Time, 25 minutes, 30 
 seconds. 
 
 July 4, 1861. — Pour Oaes., — At the Boston Eegatta. Stranger won. 
 Three miles ; 20 minutes, 7 seconds. 
 
 Sept. 16, 1861. — Four Oars. — Empire City Eegatta. George J. 
 Brown won. Five miles. Time, 36 minutes, 38 seconds. 
 
 Jvly 4, 1862. — Four Oars. — At Boston Eegatta. George J. Broion 
 won. Three miles ; 21 minutes, 1| seconds. 
 
 July 4, 1862. — Single Sculls.— Boston Eegatta. James Hamill won. 
 Two miles in 16 minutes, 15J seconds. 
 
 Aug. 13, 1862. — Match at Philadelphia for the championship of the 
 United States, between James Hamill of Pittsburg, and Joshua Ward 
 of New York. They Avere matched to row two races, the first to be 
 three miles, which was won by Hamill in 22 minutes, 27 seconds ; the 
 second (Aug. 14), five miles, which was also won by Hamill in 37 min- 
 utes, 39 seconds. 
 
 June 20, 1863. — Four Oars. — At Boston. George J. Brown of New 
 York won. Three miles in 19 minutes, 50 seconds. 
 
 *S'a))?e Day. — Two Pair of Sculls. — Hamill and D. Leary won the 
 first prize. Two miles in 15 minutes, 33 seconds. 
 
 Same Day. — Single Sculls. — Hamill won the first prize. Two 
 miles ; 18 minutes, 5 seconds. 
 
 July 4. 1863. — Six Oars. — Boston Eegatta. P. L. Tucker won the 
 first prize. Three miles ; 20 minutes, 8 seconds. 
 
 Same Day. — Four Oars. — George B. McClellan won the first prize. 
 Three miles ; 20 minutes, 29| seconds. 
 
 July 4, 1863. — Two Pair of Sculls. — At Boston. James Hamill 
 and D. Leary won first prize. The match was for two miles. Time, 
 15 minutes, 5 seconds. 
 
140 MANUAL OP PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 July 4, 1863. — Single Sculls. — At Boston. James Hamill won. 
 Two miles, in 16 minutes, 40 seconds. 
 
 Julij 23, 1863. — Single Sculls. — At Ponghkeepsie. James Hamill 
 against Joshua Ward. Won by Ward. Five miles; 42 minutes, 29 
 seconds. • 
 
 Sept. 28, 1863. — Single Sculls. — At Poughkeepsie. James Hamill 
 against Joshua Ward. Five miles. Won by Hamill; 38 minutes, 15 
 seconds. 
 
 July 4, 1864. — Six Oaes. — Boston Eegatta. P. i. Tucker, of New 
 York, the victor. Three miles ; 22 minutes, 4 seconds. 
 
 July 19, 1864. — Single Sculls. — At Pittsburg. James Hamill 
 against Joshua Ward. Five miles. Won by Hamill. Time, 40 min- 
 utes, 46 seconds. 
 
 July 29, 1864. — College Eegatta, Worcester, Mass. Yale against 
 Harvard. Three miles. Won by Yale. Time, 19 minutes. 
 
 Aiig. 17, 1864. — Four Oaes. — At Poughkeepsie ; match. George J. 
 Brown of New York, against Twilight of Pittsburg. Five miles. Won 
 by the Brown. Time, 33 minutes, 30 seconds. 
 
 Aug. 18, 1864. — Four Oaes. — ^At Poughkeepsie. Match between 
 Stranger and TiuiUght. Stranger won. Five miles ; 35 minutes, 30 
 seconds. 
 
 Sept. 20, 1864. — Single Sculls. — At Poughkeepsie. Joshua Ward 
 against William Stevens. Ward won. Five miles • 38 minutes, 13 
 seconds. 
 
 July 4, 1865. — Single Sculls. — Boston Regatta. Hamill the win- 
 ner. Two miles, in 16 minutes, 28i seconds. 
 
 July 4, 1865 — Four Oaes. — Boston Eegatta. Won by the Samuel 
 Collyer of New York. Six miles ; 43 minutes, 32 seconds. 
 
 July 18, 1865. — Four Oaks. — Match — Samuel Collyer of New York, 
 against Floyd T. Fields of Poughkeepsie. Won by the former. Time, 
 37 minutes, 10 seconds. 
 
 Jidy 28, 1865. — College Eegatta, Worcester, Mass. Yale against 
 Harvard. Three miles. Won by Yale. Time, 17 minutes, 42|- seconds. 
 There is great doubt as to whether this time was actually made. But the 
 time-keeper — a gentleman selected for his experience in sporting matters, 
 and who paid the strictest attention to timing this race — announced at 
 its termination to the reporters and all present as above. 
 
 July 29, 1865. — Single Sculls. — At Worcester, Mass. Won by 
 Joshua Ward. Two miles, in 15 minutes, 15 seconds. 
 
EECOED OF ROWING MATCHES AKD KEGATTAS. 141 
 
 Sept. 25, 1865. — FourOaes. — At Sing Sing. Match between i2o6e?-< 
 Earl and New York. Five miles. Won by the_ former. Time, 33 min- 
 utes, 5 seconds. 
 
 Sept. 30, 1865. — Four Oars. — At Pittsburg, Penn. New York 
 against Friendsldp. The latter the winner. Five miles in 32 minutes, 
 26 seconds. This is the best time on record. 
 
14:2 MANUAL OP PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 EULES POP EEGATTAS. 
 
 The following rules and regulations are offered as a 
 guide for Regattas and Matches in Boating in tlie .United 
 States. I am not aware that there are any established 
 rules to govern this healthy pastime in this country. I 
 deem it just as essential that some law should be recog- 
 nized by those who take an interest in this amusement, as 
 well as by others who love the horse or the yacht. Some 
 there are who delight in witnessing a boat race, and others 
 fancy the speed of a horse ; but, after all, are they not both 
 ruled and guided by the same power ? Upon the turf the 
 rules are so plain, yet so emjohatic, that there is little room 
 for dispute after a race. But heretofore this has not been 
 the case in boating, and the principal cfiuse I believe is in 
 not having rules that would, to a certain extent, govern all 
 interested. My object will be to make them applicable to 
 all kinds of aquatic sports, and to bear alike upon all those 
 who take part m them. 
 
 I have been induced to offer these from seeing the great 
 progress in aquatic sports of all kinds. In our harbors, 
 bays, and rivers, it has been so increased within the last 
 few years that it is really encouraging to the friends of 
 reform. Where we formerly had one yacht or boat-club 
 in New York, we have now a dozen, and the people in all 
 parts of the States seem to be following the metrojsolitan ex- 
 ample. This should be entered into by the young, and en- 
 
KULES FOR KEGATTAS. 143 
 
 couraged by the old. There is no one exercise more manly, 
 and more likely to promote the physical and mental health, 
 than rowing ; and when to this exercise is added the ex- 
 citement of a regatta or match, we have the highest order 
 of sport. If the boating era should continue ten years, 
 the next generation will relieve Americans from the odium 
 of the charge of physical decline which has been charged 
 agauist us by European waiters, and with much more truth 
 than many of us care to admit. It only needs a little out- 
 door exercise in summer, such as boating, base ball, and 
 cricket, and in winter, gymnastics, to bring lip the physical 
 stamina of young America. The stock is good; the trouble 
 is in the rearing, traming, and feeding. 
 
 HJntries. 
 Rule 1. — All entries for any regatta should be made by a member of 
 the crew or club that is about to take part, and should be done at least 
 three days previous to the day of race. Every such entry shall give 
 name and length of boat, the full name of each oarsman, and also de- 
 scribe the color of dress to be worn in the race. If the name of the boat 
 be changed, the fact should be stated to one of the managers of the re- 
 gatta or committee. 
 
 Change in any one of the Crew. 
 
 EuLB 2. — Should, upon the day of race, a change be made in any one 
 or more of the crews, it will be for the judges to say whether such boat 
 or boats shall contend for the prize ; and in case they are unable to 
 agree, the matter should be referred to the referee, if one has been se- 
 lected, whose decision shall be final. Whatever the decision may be, 
 it shall be the duty of the judges to announce it, so that all about con- 
 tending may understand. 
 
 Stipulation as to Length of Soat. 
 
 EuLE 3. — If there is any stipulated length named for boats, it shall be 
 the duty of the judges to see, before the race is started, that no boat en- 
 tered and about to start exceeds the number of feet and inches thus 
 named. If any accident should happen to boat or oarsman when pre- 
 
144 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 paring or getting in line to start, the judges may grant time not exceed- 
 ing twenty minutes, to repair, if possible, any such damage ; but they are 
 to be the sole judges of whether such accident was unavoidable, or was 
 caused from carelessness, for the purpose of delaying the race. 
 
 Starting. 
 
 Rule 4. — The boats shall be started in a regatta by one of the judges, 
 to be appointed for that express purpose. He should be a man with some 
 experience in such matters. In all match races the referee should start 
 the boats. He is the man selected and accepted by both sfdes for his 
 knowledge of boating and his impartiality to all concerned. The start 
 in all races should be made by the report of a pistol, or what I consider 
 much better, if it can be obtained, a drum. Erom this a false start will 
 seldom if ever occur. 
 
 False Starts. 
 
 Rule 5. — ^When a false start is made, caused by the failure of the pis- 
 tol to make a report, or any of the crews attempt to start before the pistol 
 is fired or the drum tapped, it shall be the duty of the starter to order 
 all to take their positions again in line, and so remain until the proper 
 signal for the start is given. Any infringement of this rule shall deprive 
 the crew or crews violating it of any prize or honor in the race. 
 
 Positions in Line of Starting. 
 
 Rule 6. — The boat winning the choice of position shall take that 
 which the crew may think advantageous ; number two the second best 
 position ; number three next, and so on. . The boat drawing number 
 one, or the first choice in starting, constitutes her to the inside position 
 in rounding the stake or stake-boat, provided she gets there level and in 
 her proper place with the others. It will be the duty of the judges at 
 this point to watch closely the action of each crew upon making the turn, 
 and report the same to the judges and referee, if one has been chosen. 
 
 Foul Hoioing. 
 
 Rule 7. — If a boat shall cross or touch another, accidentally or not, 
 it shall be declared foul ; unless in crossing there is an open length of 
 clear water, which will be considered sufficient distance as not to impede 
 the speed of the boat being crossed. Although a leading boat is entitled 
 to any part of the water the cockswain or crew may be pleased to take, 
 .still if they cross first from one side and then to the other when a boat is 
 
EULES FOK KEGATTAS. 145 
 
 SO near that ia changing tlieir position they compel the boat behind to 
 ease or slacken their stroke, or if they cause the cockswain or<rew to steer 
 or pull out of their course, it shall be declared foul rowing; and the 
 parties so offending shall not be entitled to the purse or prize. All com- 
 plaints of foul rowing or fouling must be made before the judges leave 
 the stake-boat or starting-point, and by the man or men so fouled, unless 
 prevented by accident. The umpire shall be the sole judge of a boat's 
 straight or true course from the starting to the coming in of the boats, 
 
 Boats Named in Articles of Agreement. 
 
 EuLE 8. — In all match races where the man or men are confined to 
 any one named boat, and that name is fully inserted in the articles of 
 agreement, by which both parties have pledged themselves to be bound, 
 and if on the day of race there was a doubt about the boat or boats being 
 the same as named in the articles, then, unless with and by the consent 
 of the opposing crews, the judges may, if not satisfied in their own minds 
 in regard to the matter, call in the assistance of persons in whose knowl- 
 edge and honesty they have confidence, to aid them in deciding the 
 question. And if a clear case is made out that it is not the boat so 
 named in the articles, the judges will allow such crew twenty minutes to 
 produce the boat, at the expiration of which time, should they fail, the 
 boat complying and strictly adhei'ing to the very letter in the articles of 
 agreement, shall be started for the main stake or purse ; and, after com- 
 pleting the full distance, shall be declared the winner of the i-ace and 
 money. But this shall not deprive parties from making what may be 
 called "post match." This is to insert the full terms of the race in the 
 articles of agreement, omitting only, or without declaring, the name or 
 any thing in regard to the boat ; the boat not to be known or named un- 
 til the day of race. 
 
 Collusion. 
 
 EcLE 9. — No agreement or compromise between two or more persons 
 or crews not to oppose each other, or to row jointly against any other one 
 boat or crew, will be permitted. Upon satisfactory proof of the same 
 being produced before the judges, they shall declare the party or parties 
 so offending out of the race, and not entitled to any prize or award 
 whatever. 
 
 Frauds. 
 
 EcLE 10. — Every crew entering and starting in a regatta or match, 
 
 G 
 
146 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 shall row a bona fide race. If any fraud be discorered before the decision 
 is given, tha- boat so offending shall be ruled out of the race, and the 
 prize or prizes awarded to the one or ones who have won upon the merits. 
 
 Outside Boats. 
 Rule 11. — In all match races no steamboat, sailing vessel, or rowing 
 boat of any description will be permitted to accompany the boats in the 
 match nearer or closer than two hundred yards ; nor should the oars- 
 men use any improper language to each other, or to the judges, or be 
 guilty of any conduct unbecoming gentlemen. 
 
 Good Day^ and Smooth Course. 
 Rule 12. — When a match or regatta is made with the understanding 
 that the water shall be smooth at the hour appointed to start, it is not 
 enough that it is smooth to the satisfaction of one party or crew, but it 
 must be so for both, or all that are about to take part. The judges are 
 the proper persons to decide upon this question. Should they declare 
 the race postponed for that day in consequence of the water being too 
 rough, rain or fog, or any other cause, they must also declare all outside 
 bets off. 
 
 Duties of Judges. 
 
 Rule 13. — In all matters relating to the race or rowing in any particu- 
 lar match or regatta not provided for in these rules, the judges for such 
 race pr regatta will decide and direct according to the best of their judg- 
 ment, and the usages of boat-racing in the United States. 
 
 Time -Keeper. 
 
 RnLB 14. — In every match or regatta the judges must appoint, at least 
 thirty minutes befoi'e the time of starting the boats, a gentleman to act 
 as time-keeper. He must be provided with a watch suitable in all re- 
 spects to mark the time correctly. At the starting of the boats, the 
 referee, two judges, and time-keeper should be close together ; the latter 
 closely watching and starting his watch upon the instant of the report 
 of the pistol or when the start takes place. It shall be the duty of the 
 time-keeper to show both judges that the watch was started at the proper 
 moment, and, in his judgment, was running correctly. Upon the return 
 of the boats, the judges should call the attention of the time-keeper, and 
 request that the instant the referee calls time, which would be when the 
 leading boat crossed the score, the watch should be stopped, and remain 
 
KULES FOR EEGATTAS. 147 
 
 SO stopped until the referee, judges, and reporters recorded the same. 
 The second boat can very readily be timed by the second hand of the 
 time-keeper's watch. At most the rariation should not exceed two 
 seconds, one way or the other. It is the time of the Avinning boat that 
 is recorded, and therefore the necessity of having the time kept and re- 
 ported correctly. 
 
 Dead Seat. 
 
 EuLE 15. — When boats come in so even that it can not be decided that 
 either was upon the lead, it shall be declared a "dead heat," and one 
 hour be allowed to those boats making the dead heat to row over again 
 for the prize or prizes. None others shall start, they having been al- 
 ready beaten. Should either crew refuse to comply with the direction 
 of the judges (providing there is sufficient day-light for the race to be 
 rowed), then it shall be the duty of the judges to start the crew or crews 
 that are prepared ; and upon their rowing the full distance, award the 
 prizes accordingly. 
 
 Umpire. 
 
 Role 16. — The decision of the umpire shall in all cases be final, and 
 any competitor refusing to abide thereby, shall be distanced. 
 
 Rules for JBetting. 
 
 Rule 1. — Bets on the field are off(^ unless all the boats entered and ad- 
 vertised to row, start in the race. 
 
 Rule 2. — Where a dead heat is made, the bets stand upon the boats 
 making it, but all others are beaten boats. Should the boats making the 
 dead heat not row and decide it upon the same day, then all bets are off. 
 
 Rule 3. — When a race is postponed from one day to another in conse- 
 quence of rain, fog, wind, rough weather, or any other cause, all by-bets, 
 except they are made play or pay, shall be off. 
 
 Ruk_ 4. — A " field" shall comprise all the boats entered except the 
 one that may be named against the remainder. The bettor can choose 
 one particular boat, or take the field against any one boat ; but the with- 
 drawal of such boat will nullify the bet. 
 
 Rule 5. — When a bet is made on a boat, "play or pay, "the boat must 
 start, or the party betting on the same loses his bet. 
 
 Rule 6. — Where the bettor undertakes to place the boats in a race, he 
 must give each a specific place, as 1st, 2d, 3d, and so on ; the bet or bets 
 to be decided by the oflicial decision or record of the judges. 
 
148 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 Duties of Referee and Judges. 
 
 In all rowing or sailing contests, tlie gentleman appoint- 
 ed to this office should be one who in every resjiect is fa- 
 miliar with boating — not its theory only, but something of 
 the practical j)art. Then with such a one, if he performed 
 his duty faithfully and the opportunity is given him, every 
 movement of the contending parties would be observed 
 and noted. Should one or more of the boats attempt to 
 prevent another from passing by crossing and recrossing, 
 and by so doing impede the speed or compel another to go 
 out of her course, he would be competent to judge whether 
 such a variation from the true course was caused by a 
 cross-current or eddy. There is no excuse for a boat row- 
 ing or sailing in slack water or in a true current to make 
 or take these rank sheers. If it is done in such water, 
 then it is done intentionally and to gain an advantage or 
 prevent an opponent or opponents from passing, or by sheer 
 carelessness, for either of which they are responsible and 
 must abide the consequences.* 
 
 But should this sheer or deviation from the proper 
 course be caused by the boat striking out of a true current 
 into an eddy, or out of slack water into a strong current or 
 tide, then it will be for the referee to say what degree of 
 care was required to guard against such a deviation ; and 
 if he should be satisfied that it was done by the action of 
 the water, and not by any willful intent, he should give 
 such party the benefit of it. 
 
 Of course it will be understood that this does not apply 
 to any race where the judges agree ; it is only where the 
 judges disagree and refer the whole matter to the referee, 
 the one chosen by both parties for his knowledge, for his 
 impartiality, and for his decision of character. These 
 
RULES FOE EEGATTAS. 149 
 
 should be the qualifications of the man acting in this 
 caj)acity. In all important races I think the boats should 
 ' never be out of sight of the judges and referee. Upon the 
 trotting and running course the horses are never out of 
 sight of the judges, and frequently when the races are 
 continued until dark, the judges or those appointed to act 
 as such, take their place at different parts of the course, 
 that they may be able to observe the action of the drivers 
 or riders, and should there be any foul driving or riding, 
 they are the witnesses of the same, and of course competent 
 to decide which party is at fault. Now this is as it should 
 be, and I thmk I but speak the sentiments of every well- 
 Avisher of this manly sport, in saying that hereafter the same 
 precaution should be taken at rowing and sailing regattas 
 and matches. How is it possible for the judges or referee 
 to decide understandingly when there is a dispute, not 
 having the facilities for witnessing the race the whole 
 distance ? 
 
 It has been the general custom in this country for the 
 judges and referee to be placed in a stake-boat at the start- 
 ing-point. They of course witness the start and the 
 coming in, but what transpired during three-fourths of the 
 race, they are from their own knowledge perfectly ignorant 
 of I might name several races that took place years ago, 
 when the course was from Robins's Reef to Castle Garden, 
 where the contending boats were never seen by the judges 
 or referee until within a few hundred yards of the coming 
 in. In those days steamboats and propellers were not so 
 numerous as they are at present. Now, at every race on 
 river or lake, with perhaps one or two exceptions, one can 
 see from two to twenty steamboats of different descrip- 
 tions. Now if one of these could be in readiness a short 
 distance from the starting-point, and after the boats were 
 
160 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 started, could follow with the judges and referee at a re- 
 spectful distance, say from a quarter to one-half a mile, 
 they would then be enabled to witness the race from the 
 start to the finish, and note the movement of each and 
 every boat. An object at the distance of half a mile xipon 
 the water, if the day is clear, is easily perceived. It would 
 be only necessary that the propeller or steamboat should 
 go so far that the turn could be seen, then back to the 
 starting-point, keeping well to the right or left, and out of 
 the«course of the boats. 
 
 The judges and referee should be in the stake-boat or 
 at the starting-point at the coming in of the boats. If this 
 course was pursued, boat-racing would be decided upon 
 the merits of the men and boat, and nothing else. What 
 are the judges and referee appointed for except it be to 
 see that there is a fair, honorable race rowed or sailed, and 
 to award the prize or purses to those who have adhered to 
 the rules and won upon the merits ? 
 
 • With outside questions the referee has nothing to do. 
 He is selected by the judges of both parties, and should 
 they fail to agree, the matter is referred to him to decide. 
 IsTow what difficulty can there possibly be for him in ren- 
 dering a jtTSt decision, provided he has witnessed the whole 
 race from the commencement to the conclusion ? I appre- 
 hend not any. But when he is placed in such a position, 
 that part of the time the boats were out of his sight, then 
 in case of dispute and disagreement between the judges, 
 evidence must be taken which invariably leads to trouble. 
 Gentlemen, avoid this by providing the judges and referee 
 Avith the means of seeing the race and coming to a just 
 conclusion. 
 
 In all match races a judge should be selected to repre- 
 sent each man or crew, and those two judges mutually 
 
RULES FOR REGATTAS. .161 
 
 agree as to the appointment of a referee (which should in 
 every case be done previous to the day fixed or named for 
 the race). It is highly necessary that the above-named 
 functionaries should each possess a thorough knowledge 
 of the system and laws of boat-racing, and that the referee 
 should be a man of exi^erience, of integrity and sound 
 judgment upon such matters. A copy of the articles of 
 agreement, showing u|)on what conditions the man or men 
 have agreed to contend for supremacy, should be given 
 to the referee, and he must remind each one of the con- 
 tending parties that the race must be rowed in strict ac- 
 cordance with such agreement. Upon preparing to start, 
 the referee and two judges shall take their positions 
 together and give their sole attention to the race. Should 
 one boat swerve toward the other, or endeavor to take the 
 water before there is a clear open length between them, 
 or by such crossing the man or men in the hindmost boat 
 are obliged to ease or slacken their stroke ; or should the 
 oars or boats touch or foul one another in any way, from 
 which cause either judge would be called upon to put in a 
 claim, the referee, paying strict attention to his duty, hav- 
 ing observed the action, movement, and course of each 
 boat, will be prepared, upon the appeal of the judge or 
 judges, to decide which man or crew was the aggressor ; 
 he should look well to see whether the deviation from the 
 tru.e course was caused by the action of the current, wind, 
 steamboat, or sailing vessel, or by willful carelessness or 
 intent ; from the decision of the referee there is no appeal. 
 
152 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 SWIMMING. 
 
 Swimming has always been held in very high esteem, 
 and has ever been found to be a most delightful and in- 
 vigorating exercise ; yet in a country like the United 
 States, where there are so many facilities for practice, it is 
 astonishing how few learn this necessary accomplishment. 
 The principal cause of neglecting the acquirement of this 
 art is because parents leave it entirely to chance. Indeed, 
 I believe very often accident makes the swimmer. 
 
 Swimming is essentially a very healthy exercise, and 
 one which, if properly studied, tends greatly toward the 
 muscular development of the chest and arms. In fact, it 
 is one of the most eifective of bodily exercises, and gives a 
 healthful action to the muscles and respiratory organs. 
 As to its usefulness thei-e can not be the least doubt ; for 
 how often does it enable those who are masters of it to as- 
 sist in saving the lives of others. 
 
 It is a remarkable fact that the brute creation here has 
 the advantage over man ; for almost any animal, on falling 
 into the water will swim, awkward, it may be at first, but 
 never in absolute danger of drowning. The human being, 
 on the other hand, without first learning how to swim, 
 would in all probability drown unless assistance was ren- 
 dered. This being the case, and all knowing the fact, 
 every one should learn to swim, for swimming, taking into 
 consideration the movements that it requires, is not only 
 
SWIMMING. 153 
 
 useful in saving life, but also in promoting the muscular 
 strength. If ladies would learn to swim, many lives would 
 be saved not only of their own sex, but of the males who 
 often spring to their protection and are lost in the attempt 
 to save them. 
 
 I regard swimming as one of the most beneficial exer- 
 cises that can possibly be taken in summer. The best time 
 of the day for " taking a swim" is either before breakfast, 
 between the hours of six and eight a. m. during the months 
 of July and August, or between eleven or twelve in the 
 forenoon. Weak or delicate persons should not bathe at 
 early morning. They should never enter the water on a 
 full stomach, and never when overheated and exhausted 
 by fatigue. It is not well to enter the water during a rain- 
 storm, as the clothes often become damp, which gives the 
 bather cold. 
 
 It is said the Athenians regarded swimming as indis- 
 pensable, and when they wished to designate a man who 
 was unfit for any thing, they would say " he can not even 
 swim !" 
 
 Many aids have been invented for the use of beginners, 
 such as corks, bladders, and the like, fastened under the 
 arms. But all of them ofier dangerous temptations for 
 young swimmers to go out of their depth, and then 
 should cramp, cold, or any other accident occur, the event 
 might prove fatal. Besides, these corks or bladders often 
 slip about from one place to another. An instance of this 
 kind I well remember. I was at the bath of Mr. Thomas, 
 at the Battery, in the summer of '48 — it was on one of 
 those warm sultry days which occur in the latter part of 
 July. There were lAany bathers ; one in j^articular attract- 
 ed my attention. He was evidently a new beginner, for 
 ho had corks placed under his arm-pits ; but by some mis- 
 
 G* 
 
154 MANUAL OP PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 hap they had become entangled in his legs, and in a mo- 
 ment he was suspended in the water with his head down- 
 ward. Fortunately assistance was at hand, and he was 
 relieved from his perilous situation. 
 
 Although corks, bladders, air-jackets and the like are 
 by no means to be despised, the very best aid to begin- 
 ners is a careful and judicious friend, who is a good swim- 
 mer, and who will take some pains to show you how to 
 strike out, and manage your hands and feet. Have a belt 
 round the body, close under the arms, with rope attached, 
 held in the hand of a friend by the side of a float; or, 
 what is better, a boat : you strike out with hands and feet 
 as the boat proceeds. 
 
 Some learn to swim by means of a plank — but this I 
 consider quite dangerous, from its tendency to slij) from 
 under the body, or float you into deep water. 
 
 The safest and best plan of all is, first to practice the 
 movements of the arms and legs. This can be done before 
 going into the water — at home, or at a gymnasium where 
 the theory of swimming is taught. After which go into 
 the water, advancing gradually up to the armpits ; then 
 turning about, strike out toward the shore, keej)ing the 
 legs as far from the bottom as possible. Beginners perse- 
 vering in this course will, in a very short time, be enabled 
 to" feel that they can move, float, and swim — a feeling al- 
 most equal to that experienced by the child who first feels 
 that he can walk from chair to chair. 
 
 In striking out, keep the head and neck uj)right ; the 
 chest inflated, drawing the legs up and again stretching 
 them out, extending the arms forward in unison with the 
 legs. The back should be drawn in; and the head thrown 
 well back. The hands must be placed in front of the 
 breast, the fingers pointing forward and kept close togeth- 
 
SWIMMING. 
 
 155 
 
 er, with the thumbs to the edge of the forefingers. In 
 the stroke of the handsthey should be carried forward to 
 the full extent, but must not touch the surface of the 
 water. They must next sweep to the side, about as low 
 as the hips, and then be drawn up again by bringing the 
 arms toward the side, bending the elbows upward and 
 the wrists downward, so as to let the hands hang down 
 while the arms are raising them to the first position. 
 
 • striking out. 
 
 There are many who hold to the opinion that the hu- 
 man body is lighter than water, and consequently will 
 float, but we all know that one falling into deep water and 
 not knoAving how to swim, unless assistance is rendered 
 will soon drown. 
 
 Hand over hand. 
 
 Hand over Hand. 
 This is a very rapid mode of swimming, and is well 
 adapted for short distances, as it can not long be kept up 
 
156 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 in consequence of tlie great muscular effort required. One 
 hand, is first lifted out of the wate^andthe whole arm and 
 shoulder swung through the air forward as far as the 
 reach will permit ; it is then dropped into the water edge- 
 wise, then turned with the palm downward, the shoulder 
 so far advanced that the body is thrown upon its side. 
 Just after the hand reaches the water, while the opposite 
 leg, having been drawn up under the stomach, is forcibly 
 thrust backward, the hand is swept back toward the hip, 
 and when extended backward is raised from the water, 
 and carried forward in the air as before. There is some- 
 what of a pause of the hand at the hij), while the other 
 hand is being thrust forward. 
 
 Swimming on the back. 
 
 In swimming on the hacJc, the swimmer turns u]3on his 
 back in the water by the combined motion of the arm and 
 leg, and extending the body, the head being in a line with 
 it, so that the back and upper, part of the head may be 
 immersed. While the face and breast are out of the 
 water, the hands placed oh the thighs straight down, and 
 the legs moved as in forward swimming, care must be 
 taken that the knees do not rise above the surface in 
 thrusting them out. The hands are often used after the 
 motion of a fan, by which a slight progression is obtained. 
 
 Diving. 
 
 In shoal water you should fling yourself as far forward 
 as possible into the stream at a very oblique angle. In 
 
SWIMMING. 
 
 157 
 
 deep water the body is to descend at a greater angle. The 
 
 arms should be stretched out, hands closed and pointed. 
 Diving is considered Avith the young as one of the 
 
 grandest amuse- 
 ments connected 
 with swimming. 
 Care must be taken 
 to draw the head 
 down so that the 
 chin will touch the 
 chest. The arms 
 should be extended 
 forward, and the 
 Diving. hands closed to a 
 
 point. In making a leap or jump from any considerable 
 
 height, the legs, arms, and head are to be kept perfectly 
 
 stiff and straight ; not 
 
 spreading them or 
 
 bending the body. 
 
 Treading Wetter. 
 
 This is a perpendic- 
 ular position, and is of 
 great use to enable the 
 swimmer to save an- 
 other from drowning. 
 Many think it difficult ; 
 but it is really quite 
 easy when one knows 
 how to do it. There 
 are two ways of per- 
 forming the action : In 
 the first the hands are 
 
 ^^T ^^^^ 
 
 
 m 
 
 —^tS^^=^=L—/\-t—f-vri/-^ 
 
 y — -A<N^ — 
 
 
 
 
 Ji%==J 
 
 
 — 't — \ — 
 
 
 if X-f" 
 
 
 VtA A^y 
 
 — — ■- — 
 
 ■ \"^=^ 
 
 
 ==^4t 
 
 » ^ — ■■ — -. 
 
 Treading water. 
 
158 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 comj)ressed against the hips, and the* feet describe their 
 usual circle. The other mode consists in not contracting 
 both legs at the same time, but one after the other ; so that 
 while the one remains contracted, the other describes a 
 circle. In this mode, however, the legs must not be stretch- 
 ed out, but the thighs are placed in a distended position, 
 and curved as if in a half-sitting posture. 
 
 The Mill. 
 
 The swimmer, lying on his back, draws the knees close 
 to the chin, and while one of the hands keeps the equilib- 
 rium by describing circles, the other continues working. 
 By this means the body is kept turning round more or less 
 
 rapidly. 
 
 Swimming under Water. 
 
 When under the water the swimmer must keep if pos- 
 sible the eyes open — at least in water that is clear and ad- 
 mits the light. It will enable you to ascertain the dej)th 
 of water. 
 
 Floating. 
 
 The body is laid horizontally on the back ; the arms 
 extended over the head ; the feet in their natural posi- 
 tion ; the loins as low as jDOSsible. In this position the 
 swimmer remains and floats at pleasure. The lungs must 
 be kej)t inflated so that the breast may be distended, and 
 the circumference of the body augmented in order not 
 to sink while taking breath. The breath must be quickly 
 expelled, and as quickly drawn in again, and retained as 
 long as possible. For as the back is in a flat position, the 
 sinking, on account of the resistance of the water, does 
 not take place so rapidly but that the quick respiration 
 will restore the equilibrium before the water reaches the 
 nose. 
 
SWIMMING. 159 
 
 The Fling. 
 The swimmer lays himself flat upon his waist ; draws 
 his feet as close as possible under the body ; extends his 
 hands forward ; and with both feet and hands beating the 
 water at the same time, raises himself out of the water. 
 In this manner one may succeed in springing out of the 
 water as high as the hips. This exercise is useful for 
 catching a rope or any object that hangs from above the 
 surface of the water. 
 
 Swimminjr like a dog. 
 
 Sioimming like a Dog. 
 
 In this motion each hand and foot is used alternately, 
 as you see a dog uses them when swimming. The hands 
 are drawn toward the ohm in a compressed form, and then 
 expanded and slightly hollowed with fingers close ; as 
 they strike the water, the feet are drawn toward the 
 stomach, and then backward with a kind of kick. This is 
 very good for a change in swimming a long distance. 
 
 Cramj). 
 The swimmer should never be alarmed or frightened 
 when taken with cramp, for it is seldom that it attacks 
 more than one limb ; and he is a poor swimmer indeed 
 who can not support himself with the three remaining 
 ones. All you have to do is to throw yourself on your 
 back and straighten the limb by pointing the toe, when it 
 will leave the part. 
 
160 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 * In case of cramp in the bowels, the best way is to float 
 on the back till assistance is rendered. Persons should 
 not bathe when the water is cold, or when the body is 
 chilly from cold — nor when exhausted or overfatigued 
 from violent exercise, nor soon after eating. 
 
 Mesuscitation. 
 
 For those who have been long under water, keep the 
 body in a horizontal position ; place it near a fire ; strij) 
 off the wet clothes, and rub it dry as soon as possible, 
 after which wrap it up in blankets and use hot flannel 
 cloths to rub with under the blankets. Bottles of hot 
 water should be applied to the arm-pits, the thighs, soles 
 of the feet and legs, the head slightly raised. If there 
 is any power of swallowing, a little hot brandy and water 
 or wine with some ginger in it should be given. Friction 
 should be kept up until the arrival of medical aid. 
 
SKATING. 161 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 SKATING. 
 
 This has become within the last few years a popular 
 amiiseinent with us — not only as an exercise, but as an 
 accomplishment. The instructions or exercises here laid 
 down are calculated more for new beginners, as all at first 
 require practice which can be taken at home or at any 
 hall where instruction in skating is given. This practice 
 will give strength and flexibility to the muscles of the feet 
 and ankles, and in fact all the loNver limbs, with a correct 
 and graceful carriage of the body. 
 
 It may be very pleasant to the sjDectators to see one 
 on skates for the first time, especially if the ice is smooth. 
 But the skaters will be apt to find their feet in every 
 place but the right place. This is the way that many be- 
 come disgusted with skating when the attempt is first 
 made upon ice without any previous practice — to the 
 novice it looks almost as easy as walking, but how his 
 opinion changes upon the first trial. 
 
 I would recommend to beginners to practice a few 
 times on what are called " parlor skates." The exercise 
 of itself is good in giving strength and tone to those parts 
 that most require it when skating upon ice. I have never 
 yet seen one person fail to skate upon ice who first took 
 practice on parlor skates — the correct manner of using the 
 feet — posture of the body — position of arms and head — all 
 
162 MANUAL OF PHYSICAX EXERCISES. 
 
 combine to give confidence when you enter for the first 
 time upon ice skates. 
 
 Selection of Skates. — Some judgment is to be used in 
 the selection of skates for the new beginner. If the steel 
 is too high, there is too much strain upon the ankle ; if too 
 low, and the foot should turn in or out so that the wood 
 part touches the ice, it would likely check the movement, 
 if not occasion a fall. As to the size of the skates, they 
 should fit exactly the length of the foot. 
 
 Mode of Fastening. — There are various modes of fasten- 
 mg the skates to the feet, but there is only one true way ; 
 and that is to fasten in such a manner as not to prevent the 
 free circulation of the blood through the foot, or even the 
 free motion of the joints of the toes, heels, or ankles. The 
 only skates now in use that I have seen answering every 
 needed purj)ose are those that screw or fasten to the sole 
 of the boot or shoe — there being no straps crossing the 
 foot or ankle. 
 
 Here we are on the ice for the first time for skating. 
 Stand erect, without losing the balance ; feet close to- 
 gether and parallel. Now it would be well if a friend 
 would draw or push you along to accustom you to pre- 
 serve the equilibrium during the gliding ; next on one foot 
 alternately. The whole weight is to be placed upon the 
 foot which is to glide — the right — the left j)ushing slightly 
 from the ice ; and so on, first right, then left. 
 
 There are two precautions to be observed in this, the 
 first trial : to lean the upper part of the body slightly for- 
 ward, in order to jDrevent an overbalance backward; and 
 not to turn the feet too much outward, in order to pre- 
 vent the legs from sej^arating in a straddling posture. 
 
 All the simple movements at first should be carefully 
 attended to. Never look at your feet, or at the ice near 
 
SKATING. 163 
 
 tlie feet, but keep a good lookout at a distance. The 
 head should be well up, the face looking in the direction 
 intended to be followed. The movements should be 
 smooth, and free from sudden starts or jerks. 
 
 Straight skating involves that the right foot shall be 
 foremost, almost straight forward, the whole weight of 
 the body resting on it, knee bent ; left foot, behind the 
 right, turned outward, pitshes off; the steel pressed against 
 the ice and forming nearly a right angle with the right 
 foot. After the left foot has pushed off, it draws up near 
 the right, as near the ice as possible, while the right foot 
 continues its gliding motion. The right knee gradually 
 stretches, and the upper part of the body erects itself. 
 The longer the gliding on one foot, the better. 
 
 N'ow bring the left foot forward, the right pushing off. 
 All motions of the body and shaking of the hands and 
 arms are to be avoided. The arms should hang naturally ; 
 crossing them before the breast or on the back tends to 
 render the body steady. 
 
 Stopping is effected by bending the knees, drawing the 
 heels together and bearing down on them, or by a short 
 turn either to the right or left. 
 
 In skating in straight line, with the body perfectly 
 straight, the foot which pushes off is raised over the oth- 
 er gliding. After having acquired some certainty in this 
 motion, you may begin to incline gradually to the right 
 side, then the left. 
 
 Skating in circular line, or what is more commonly call- 
 ed " outside edge," is much more difficult than the pre- 
 ceding. As soon as the right foot is advanced, the left 
 shoulder should be thrown forward, right arm back, and 
 the face turned over the right shoulder ; the body in- 
 clined to the right ; the left foot raised behind. Next the 
 
164 MANUAL OP PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 left foot is "brought "by, and with a slight smooth and 
 graceful movement of the hody, the right foot pressing on 
 the heel of the j)late. Then on the inside of the toe, just 
 as the left foot touches the ice, ahout eight or ten inches 
 in front of the right, strike to the left on the outside edge. 
 In this way you pass from right to left, inclining the body 
 accordingly. When this can be done well, the other mo- 
 tions follow with great ease. 
 
 SJcatmg in a serpentine line, or what is sometimes called ^ 
 the " Mercury Figure," consists in standing upright — the 
 feet parallel ; turn alternately to the right and left, the 
 right and left foot giving an almost imperceptible press- 
 ure against the ice, and this producing the advancing mo- 
 tion. 
 
 The Dutch Moll is done by commencing on the outside 
 edge, each foot making a small segment of a large circle 
 in this form — 
 
 Left foot, Left foot, 
 
 Eight foot, Eight foot, 
 
 but holding as straight a course as is possible with the 
 keeping of the skates on the outside edge. 
 
 The Cross Moll, or " Figure 8," is also performed on the 
 outside edge forward. It is only the completion of the 
 circle, and is done by crossing the legs and striking from 
 the outside, instead of the inside edge. As you draw close 
 on the right leg throw the left quite across it, and press 
 hard on the outside of the right skate ; at the same time 
 throwing back the left arm and looking over the left 
 shoulder. By completing or making the circle in the man- 
 ner on each leg, the Figure 8 is formed. 
 
 Skating icith stepping over, as you are going for\s-ard. 
 
SKATING. 165 
 
 is thus performed : Put the left foot, Avhich has given the 
 push, over the right uj)on the ice — the right being raised 
 and the motion being continued on the left. This may 
 also be changed into a circular line, either to the right or 
 left side. 
 
 Inside Edge^ Backward, — Here you turn from the out- 
 side edge forward to the inside edge backward on the 
 same foot, making a half circle. Wlien it is complete, lean 
 forward and rest on the same toe inside, performing a back- 
 Avard motion. By this movement you form the Figure 3. 
 Ckitside Edge, Backward. — Having made or cut the 
 Figure 3, continue in the same direction, but on the other 
 foot, placing it on the outside edge, and go backward 
 slowly, turning the face over the right shoulder : raise the 
 right foot from the ice and throw back the right arm. 
 
 In finishing any particular figure, either forward or 
 backward, the perfect use of both feet adds much to its 
 beauty and grace. 
 
 When the skater is able to do the " inside edge for- 
 ward," " outside forward," " inside back and outside back," 
 he has mastered the best elemei^jts of skating — for from 
 these all others flow with great ease and rapidity. Once 
 being able to perform those well, quadrilles and other 
 dances will be executed with grace and ease. 
 
 Back Boll. — ^You are on the outside edge. By a slight 
 movement of the right foot, and throwing the left shoulder 
 back and* turning the face in the same direction, the inside 
 of your left skate bears on the ice. You strike from it to 
 the outside back of the other, by a heavy pressure at the 
 toe. Having now done the backward roll on the right 
 foot, go on and repeat the same with left. 
 
 Back Cross Boll. — This is performed by simply chang- 
 ing the balance of the body. You move from one foot to 
 
166 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 the other, as in the iDack roll : The only difference being 
 that you start from the outside instead of the inside edge 
 of the skate. The back roll is sometimes done with a 
 run, the head turned over the right shoulder, and the right 
 foot turned slightly outward. 
 
 Dress. — The skating dress should be close and warm: 
 flannel next the skin ought in every case to be worn ; for 
 we all know that this exercise produces great perspiration, 
 and when standing or riding after it, a chillness is very apt 
 to come on without the use of this warm material. I 
 would recommend all who live within a reasonable dis- 
 tance, to walk home after skating. By this means the 
 blood would be kept in brisk circulation, and the liability 
 of taking cold would be less. Those" who are subject to 
 colds must avoid as much as possible skating against the 
 wind. 
 
 It has been found that in countries where they have 
 long winters, and consequently much skating, inflamma- 
 tions of the chest or lungs are very common. Young per- 
 sons often expose themselves too much. If you should fall 
 through the ice, extend, the arms horizontally over the 
 edges of that which is unbroken till a plank or roj)e is 
 passed to you. 
 
3. 
 
 EntiDnal §mn. 
 
CHAPTER XI. 
 With Six Illustrations. 
 
 Ceicket 169—182 
 
.CEICKET. 169 
 
 CHAPTER XL 
 
 CEICKET. 
 
 The materials for the game are : First, the Ball^ which 
 must weigh not less than five ounces and a half, nor more 
 than five ounces and three-quarters. It must measure not 
 less than nine inches, nor more than nine and a quarter in 
 circumference. Second, the J3at^ which must not exceed 
 four and a quarter inches at the widest jDart, apd must not 
 be more than thirty-eight inches in length. Third, the 
 Stumps, which are three in number, twenty-seven inches 
 out from the ground ; the bails eight inches long ; the 
 stumps of suffici^t thickness tg prevent the ball from 
 passing through. 
 
 77ie BotoUng - Crease should be m a Ime with the 
 stumps — six feet eight inches in length, the ^stumps in 
 centre. 
 
 The Popping- Crease must be four feet from the wicket, 
 and parallel to it, unlimited in length, but not shorter 
 than the bowling-crease. 
 
 The Wickets should be pitched opposite each other at 
 the distance of twenty-two yards. 
 
 Single WicJcet. 
 
 This is usually played by five persons on each side ; 
 but a larger number can play if they please. The striker 
 with the bat is the protector of the wicket. The players 
 stand in the field to catch or stop the ball, and the bowler 
 
 H 
 
110 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 takes his place by tlie side of a small stump set up at the 
 regular distance, twenty-two yards from the wicket, and 
 then delivers the ball, not by 2ijerh or throio^ but by what 
 is termed a howl. If it is not a fair bowl, but a throw with 
 the hand above the shoulder, the umpire will call "No 
 ball." 
 
 The bowl is made with the intent of beating down the 
 wicket. If the bowler is successful, the batsman retires 
 from the position, and another takes his place. But, on 
 the contrary, if the ball is struck by the bat and sent into 
 the field beyond the reach of those who are placed there to 
 stop it, the striker runs to the stump at the bowler's sta- 
 tion, which he touches, and returns to his wicket. If this 
 is performed before the ball is thrown back, and by one of 
 the players struck against the wicket so as to knock the 
 bail off, it is called a " run." Bift if the ball is passed in, and 
 the wicket knocked down before the striker is " home" or 
 can ground his bat within three feet 
 ten inches of the wicket (this mark 
 being called the " crease"), he is de- 
 clared " out." He is also " out" if 
 the ball is struck into the air and 
 is caught by any of the players 
 before it touches the ground. 
 
 ^Beginning Play. 
 
 Place your bat upright on the 
 mark at the place where the meas- 
 ure comes to the " crease" — this will 
 show that you are ready. The bowl- 
 er will call " Play !" The batsman 
 now strikes at the ball as it comes 
 Batsman.— Collect Position, within range of his bat ; or should it 
 
CIIICKET. 
 
 171 
 
 not be a good ball to strike at, he may " block" it ; but 
 in doing this h*e must be careful not to let the lower end 
 of the bat be in advance of the uf)per part, as the ball 
 would be apt to rise in the air, and you would be " caught 
 out." 
 
 When you strike the ball wide enough, immediately run 
 to the bowling-stump, bat in hand, touching it, and return 
 to the " popping-crease" and ground the bat on the mark 
 or "home." 
 
 Rules for Single Wiclcet 
 
 When there are less than five players on each side, 
 " bounds" must be placed, twenty-two yards each, m a 
 line from the " off" and " leg-stump." 
 
 Bowled on Off Side and hit. Wide of Leg-Stump, witli a hit to Leg. 
 
 The ball should be hit before the " bounds" to entitle 
 the striker to a " run," which run can not be obtained un- 
 less he touch the stumj? or crease in a line with it. 
 
 When the striker hits the ball, one of his feet must be 
 
m 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 on the ground behind the " popping-crease," otherwise 
 the nmpire shall call " 'No hit !" 
 
 When there are less than five players on a side, neither 
 " byes" nor " overthrows" shall be allowed ; nor shall the 
 striker be caught out behiud the wicket, nor stumped out. 
 
 The fieldsman must return the ball so that it shall cross 
 the sj)ace between the wicket and the bowling-stump, or 
 between the stumps and the bounds. The striker may 
 run till the ball be so returned. 
 
 After the striker has made one run he must touch the 
 bowling-stump, and run before the ball shall cross the 
 play to entitle him to another. 
 
 The striker is entitled to three runs for " lost ball," and 
 the same number for " ball stopped" by stone, rail, or any 
 object. 
 
 The Cut. 
 
 The Drive. 
 
 When there are five or more players to a side, there 
 must be no "bounds;" all "hits," "byes," and "over- 
 throws" will then be allowed. 
 
CEICKET. 
 
 173 
 
 The bowler is subject to the same" rules as at double 
 wicket. Not more than one minute should be allowed be- 
 tween each ball. 
 
 Two or three may play. Wlien there are three, the 
 second player will act as fieldsman ; and when the ball is 
 struck nearer to him than the bowler, he will catch it and 
 throw it to the bowler. 
 
 If the striker attempt to run, the 
 bowler must run to the wicket, and 
 the fieldsman throw the ball to him 
 that he may catch it and touch the 
 wicket with it, which puts the striker 
 out. When the first striker is " put 
 out," the bowler will take his place, 
 the fieldsman will bowl, and the fiar- 
 mer striker take the field. 
 
 When fiDur are playing, the fi)urth 
 should stand behind the wicket ; and 
 if more than four are playing, the 
 additional players should take the 
 
 Tiie Block. field. 
 
 The general rule when many play is, that as soon as the 
 striker is " out" he becomes bowler ; next, wicket-keeper ; 
 then takes his place in the field on the left of the bowler ; 
 and so on in regular order until it is again his turn in new 
 innings. 
 
 Double WicJcet. 
 
 This is played by twenty-two persons, eleven on each 
 side, and two umpires, with persons to keep the score, etc., 
 etc. 
 
 There are fourteen persons in the field or at play at one 
 time : 
 
114 
 
 MAISTLTAL OP PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 1. Two Batsmen or Strikers. 
 
 2. One Bowler. 
 
 3. Wicket-Keeper. 
 
 4. Long-Stop. 
 
 5. Point. 
 
 6. Short-Slip. 
 
 v. Long-Slip. 
 
 8. Cover Point. 
 
 9. Mid-Wicket. 
 
 10. Long-Field Off. 
 
 11. Long-Field On. 
 
 12. Leg. 
 
 13. On Side. In swift bowling an extra man is substi- 
 tuted for " 071 side.'''' 
 
 Two umpires are necessary in every full game, one 
 being stationed at the strikers' and the other at the 
 bowler's wicket. 
 
 
 Position of the Fiel 
 
 d* 
 
 
 
 
 Off Side. 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 *** 
 
 Long-Field Off. 
 
 *** 
 Cover Point. 
 
 
 
 * * 
 Long-Slip 
 
 
 *** 
 Mid-Wicket. 
 
 Thi 
 
 * * 
 
 * 
 
 rd Man. 
 
 Umpire. *^* 
 
 ■ Point. *** 
 
 
 *** 
 
 Short-Slip. 
 
 Wicket. - t Batsman. Batsman, f - *^* Long-Stop. 
 
 — - t WicJcet-Keeper. 
 
 Bowler. *^* 
 
 *** Umjm-e. 
 
 * * 
 Long-Field O'l 
 
 * * 
 
 *. 
 
 On Side. 
 
 * * 
 Leg. 
 
 Commencing Play. 
 
 It is usual to toss for " first innings," the winning party 
 sending two batsmen to the wicket, the other party taking 
 
 * For slow bowling, the third man is not required. I place him here 
 to show his position in swift bowling. 
 
CKICKET. 1*75 
 
 the field, each man in his proper position as in the dia- 
 gram. The object of the bowler is to knock down the 
 wicket, and that of the batsman to prevent it. The field- 
 er's duty is to catch or stop the ball, and throw it in as 
 quickly as possible, so as to knock down the wicket while 
 the batsman is in the act of running from one to the 
 other. 
 
 When the striker hits the ball, and it is driven in such 
 a direction that it can not be quickly returned, the striker 
 runs from wicket to wicket, and each " run" is scored in 
 their favor. When the bowler shall have bowled four or 
 six balls, as may have been agreed upon at the commence- 
 ment of the game, the umpire calls " Over !" and the fields- 
 men reverse their position by crossing to the opposite side 
 of the field. 
 
 When the ball is caiTght by the " Outs," or from the 
 wicket being struck down, or from any other cause within 
 the ruling of the game, the batsmen one after the other 
 retire, and those of the opposite side take their places in 
 the same manner, and when each side has had two innings, 
 the " runs" are counted : the party having the greatest 
 number is declared the victor. 
 
 Position of the Batsman. 
 He should stand as close to the "block-hole" as j)0ssi- 
 ble, and as near to the " popping-crease" as he can ; but 
 he must not stand before the wicket. The right foot 
 should remain firm close behuid the crease; the left foot 
 at ease and toward the bowler. The bat should be held 
 so as to cover the middle stump of the wicket. The bats- 
 man should be careful to keep the left shoulder forward, 
 and the left elbow high up. In striking the ball the hands 
 should be near together, but not so close as to touch. The 
 
176 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 ball should be struck from six to eight inches from the 
 end of the bat. If the ball come in such a way that it 
 would be difficult to hit " to field," by turning to one 
 side the batsman may strike "between leg" and "long- 
 field on." But it is only with skill and practice that a 
 perfect knowledge of the game can be acquired. 
 
 The Run. 
 
 Only when the ball is well struck and thrown is there 
 a probability that a " run" can be made. Both bats- 
 men should in this case start, the bats being kept outside 
 of each other. The eye must be looking toward the wick- 
 et, which you, being batsman, have to save. Your bat 
 should be grounded at as long a reach as possible. The 
 first run should be rapid, by which means you may get the 
 second, but in this you must use your own judgment. It 
 is much better to lose one or even two runs than to en- 
 danger the wicket. 
 
 • The Bolder. 
 
 In order to be a good bowler you should have a quick 
 eye, a strong arm, and nimble hand. The ball is generally 
 delivered with arun with one foot in. If the bowler wants 
 the ball to twist uj)on leaving the hand, he gives it a turn 
 with the back of the hand to the ground, his object being 
 to knock down the wicket, or to give such balls as the bat- 
 ter can not " block," or from which a run can be made. 
 His style of bowling should be varied ; at one time slow, 
 then with twisting, then straight ; now quick — again one 
 with another combined. The bowler can direct the bats- 
 man who is not employed to stand on either side of the 
 wicket which he may choose. 
 
CRICKET. .177 
 
 Tlie WicJcet-ICeeper. 
 The position of the wicket-keeper is about four or four 
 and a half feet behind the wicket. The left foot should be 
 forward; eyes and hands ready for action. Those who 
 saw the play of the " Eleven" from England a few years 
 ago, will not soon forget the splendid playing of all, but 
 more particularly that of the wicket-keepers and bowlers. 
 It is the wicket-keeper's duty to see that the fielders are all 
 in their jjroper places ; also to direct their attention more 
 by signs than words. If the striker leaves the wicket at 
 any time unguarded, either for the purpose of running or 
 through carelessness, it is the duty of the wicket-keeper 
 having the ball in hand to knock down the wicket. This • 
 is called " running out." 
 
 Position of Players. 
 
 Short-Slip. — Should stand nine feet from the wicket- 
 keeper on the far side. His duty is to stop or catch the 
 ball, should it pass the wicket-keeper, and to take his place 
 when he, the wicket-keeper, runs after the ball, 
 
 Long-Slip. — Stands thirty-six feet from the wicket, and 
 a trifle behmd it. This position covers both stop and point. 
 He must be ever watchful to catch or stop the ball, for if 
 it passes him, there will be at least one, and perhaps many 
 runs made. > 
 
 Long-Field On and Long -Field Off. — These two are sta- 
 tioned opposite to each other, at different sides of the field. 
 Sometimes their positions are varied a little. They should 
 be capable of throwing the ball with precision to the 
 wicket-keejDcr. The " long-field ofi\," it must be borne in 
 mind, covers mid-wicket. 
 
 Mid-Wicket. — His position is thirty feet from the bowl- 
 er's wicket, off side, and slightly in advance. This is con- 
 
 H* 
 
1V8 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXBKCISES. 
 
 sidered the most important position in the field. He fre- 
 quently takes the place of the howler. 
 
 Long-Stop. — Stands thirty-six feet hehind the wicket, 
 and throws in the ball when it passes the wicket-keeper. 
 This position should be filled by one who can throw strong- 
 ly and accurately, and who is also quick and active upon 
 the feet. 
 
 Cover Point. — This position is between jDoint and mid- 
 wicket, off side, a little to the rear, so that he can cover 
 point. 
 
 Leg. — He stands just behind the wicket, forty-five feet 
 from it. He must back up all balls from the off side, no 
 matter from what direction they may be thrown. 
 
 Point. — Is placed twenty-one feet from the strik-er, on 
 the off side. For this position is required one who is ex- 
 tremely active and quick upon the feet, as he frequently 
 is called upon to spring in the air in order to secure the 
 ball. He should be also able to catch and hold well. 
 
 Changes. — When the player bats with the left hand, the 
 " long-slip" changes to " wide-fold," and " point" crosses 
 over with " mid-wicket." There are other minor changes 
 which can be quickly learned in practice. 
 
 Powler. — It is the rule that no substitute from the field 
 be allowed to bowl, keep wicket, play at point or middle- 
 wicket, except by consent of both parties. 
 
 What Puts the Batsman Out. 
 
 1. If the bails are knocked off by the ball, or the stumps 
 struck off the ground — he is out. 
 
 2. If the ball, after being struck by the bat, be caught 
 before it touches the ground — he is out. 
 
 3. If while striking, or at any other time while the ball 
 is in play, he has both feet over the " popping-crease," and 
 
CRICKET. 179 
 
 his wicket is knocked down, unless his bat be grounded 
 within it — he is out. 
 
 4. If while in the act of striking at the ball,- the bat, his 
 clothes, or from any other cause that care on his part might 
 have prevented, knocks down the wicket — he is out. 
 
 .5. If he touches the ball while in play, except at the re- 
 quest of the oj)posite party — he is out. 
 
 6. If he stops the ball with any part of his person, which 
 the bowler, in the opinion of the umpire at the bowler's 
 wicket, has bowled in a line with the wicket — he is out. 
 
 7. When a ball is caught " on the fly," or before touch- 
 ing the ground, no run can be counted. 
 
 8. When the players have crossed each other, the one 
 that runs :^r the wicket that is knocked down, is out. But 
 if they have not crossed or passed each other, the one that 
 has left the Avicket that is knocked down, is out. 
 
 9. When the batsman is run out, there is no run to be 
 scored. 
 
 IQ. When " lost ball" is called, the striker is entitled to 
 six runs. But if more than that number has been made 
 before " lost ball" is announced, then the striker is allowed 
 all he can make. 
 
 11. When the ball is in the hands of the bowler or 
 wicket-keeper, it is said to be " dead" or no longer in play ; 
 and the batsman is not obliged to keep his position, until 
 the umpire calls " Play !" 
 
 12. If the striker should feel ill or get hurt at play, he 
 may retire from his wicket, and return to it again any time 
 during that innings. 
 
 13. If the ball is struck up by the batsman, he may 
 guard his wicket with the bat, or his body, but not his 
 hand. 
 
 14. Should the striker hit the ball so that it strikes his 
 
180 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEKCISES. 
 
 partner's wicket, he is "out" — provided that on its course 
 it touches the hands of the howler or any of the fields- 
 men, but not otherwise. 
 
 The Wicket -Keeper. 
 He should not take the ball until it has passed the 
 wicket. He must stand at the proper distance behind, and 
 be ready the instant the ball leaves the hand of the bowler. 
 He shall not in any way excite or incommode the striker ; 
 and if, by any excitement or imprudence, any part of his 
 body gets before the wicket, and the ball strike it, the bats- 
 man shall not be declared " out," from the fact that the 
 wicket-keeper was not in his proper place. 
 
 • Dress. 
 
 This should be made of good Welsh flannel ; jacket and 
 tro wsers made large enough to give the muscles free play ; 
 a straw hat or light cap, with peak to protect the eyes 
 from the glare of the sun ; leg-guards and body-guarcj^ for 
 batting and wicket-keeping, with gloves; shoes with 
 spiked soles ; these make up in full the cricketer's fit-out. 
 
 General Instructions for beginners. 
 
 JBatting. — Place the bat exactly opposite the middle 
 stump of the wicket, keej)ing the left shoulder well for- 
 ward. Practice the style of batting upward. Keep the 
 handle inclined in the direction of the bowler. When balls 
 come wide, cross the left leg over the right, and if quick 
 enough, you can hit all such balls. But never step out of 
 the place to strike if you can help it. The best balls to hit 
 are those that come within the " pop ping-crease," and 
 when you do strike, do" it properly and with vigor. The 
 ball then will be sent so you can score. 
 
CRICKET. 181 
 
 Boiding. — The bowler should endeavor, as soon as pos- 
 sible, to discover the weak jDoint of the striker, and play 
 accordiagly against it. He should as far as lies in his 
 power give fair balls, for this way of playing constitutes 
 the gentleman. The most difficult balls for the batter are 
 those bowled wide of the leg or off-stump. 
 
 The Best Way to Defend the Wic/cet. — This consists 
 princij^ally in blocking and striking. The general fault of 
 beginners is that they hit at every ball, y.o matter how. 
 wildly it is bowled. ISTow it requires practice, combined 
 with good judgment, to know when to strike and when to 
 block a ball. In blocking, hold the bat as described in 
 hints on batting ; and in striking, be careful and not knock 
 it up and give your opponents an opportunity to catch you 
 out. 
 
 JRuiining. — -When you have struck the ball, watch its 
 
 direction with the eye and run as rapidly as possible. Be 
 
 , careful and cautious throughout your play at the bat. 
 
 Some players become so elated after making one or two 
 
 successful runs that they become careless, and when they 
 
 least expect it are bowled or stumped out. 
 
 • 
 Duties of Umpires. 
 
 1. The umpires are the sole judges of fair and unfair 
 play, and all disputes must be decided by them, each at his 
 own wicket. 
 
 2. They should stand from eighteen to twenty feet from 
 the wicket. When a catch is made, which the umpire at 
 the wicket can not see sufficiently to decide upon, he may 
 apply to the other umpire, whose opinion is final. 
 
 3. Two minutes should be allowed for the batsman to 
 come in, and fifteen between each innings. Should either 
 party refuse to play after the umpires call "Play" — the 
 
182 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 side so refiising shall be considered to liave lost the 
 match. 
 
 4. When the bowler's foot is not behind the " bowling- 
 crease," and within the " return-crease" at the time he de- 
 livers the ball, the umpire must call " No ball !" and if the 
 striker runs short, he must call "No run." 
 
 5. In running, if etther of the batsmen fails to ground his 
 bat in hand, or some part of his person over the popping- 
 crease," the umpire has the power to deduct two runs, be- 
 cause such striker has not run the full distance. 
 
 i 
 
'4. 
 
 Hatiunnl §mm 
 
CHAPTER XII. 
 Base Ball 185—202 
 
 J 
 
BASE BALL. 185 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 BASE BALL. 
 
 Every year brings witli it increased interest in the 
 great national game of Base Ball. What cricket is to 
 England, hase hall is to America. The popularity now 
 enjoyed by the followers of athletfc games, which is happi- 
 ly every day becoming more and more practiced and en- 
 couraged, gives proof that we as a peoj^le are'destmed to 
 be a stronger, hardier, and better formed body of men 
 twenty years hence. Never before Avere thei'e so many 
 young men devoted to out-door exercises. In the manly 
 and invigorating game of base ball they can be numbered 
 by tens of thousands. From this fact we may live in 
 hopes of the better physical condition of our young men. 
 
 Every college in the country has its ball clubs, and the 
 students deserve credit for promoting and keeping alive a 
 spirit that tends to foster health, enterprise, and endur- 
 ance. The interest attached to this out-door amusement 
 for the last few years has been very great : every day, from 
 early spring until late in the autumn, it has attracted 
 thousands of every age and of both sexes into the green 
 fields either to see it played or to take part in it. It may 
 well be called a National Game, for it has been played at 
 the Capital of the country, and witnessed by the President 
 and heads of the different departments. There have been 
 as many as ten thousand persons of both sexes to witness 
 some of the late matches. 
 
186 jftANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 There is no question but that in physique we are sur- 
 passed by the British. We are deficient in those manly- 
 sports and exercises which, while they strengthen the 
 physical frame and animate the moral organization, confer 
 at the same time vigor, grace, and elasticity on the whole 
 being. The evanescent character of American beauty is 
 the result of a want of out-door exercise. The American 
 lady will tire in a walk of two miles, while an English 
 lady of the same age will walk from three to eight miles 
 before breakfast and think nothing of it. The consequence 
 of this difference is that an English lady, at forty is in the 
 prime of beauty and woltianhood, while an American lady 
 of that age would almost consider herself, or be considered 
 by others, in the days of Auld Lang Syne. I hope soon to 
 see the day when our ladies will be counted by the thou- 
 sands out upon the green fields with mallet in hand, play- 
 ing croquet — or mounted on a fine horse and dashing 
 through our beautiful park — or upon the water inhaling 
 the pure, fresh air ; this will give a color to the cheek far 
 superior to any cosmetic. 
 
 Our young men too often neglect their physique. For- 
 tunately, a better spirit is awakened among us. We are 
 beginning to realize the truth of the old adage — " all work 
 and no play makes Jack a dull boy." 
 
 The Game. 
 It is necessary, in order to have every position filled, to 
 have nine players, who are to occupy the following named 
 places : 1. Catcher. 2. Pitcher. 3. Short Stop. 4. First 
 Base. 6. Second Base. 6. Third Base. 7. Left Field. 8. 
 Centre Field, 9. Right Field. The game is often played 
 with more or less, but only for practice. All match or 
 regular games have nine upon each side only. 
 
 J 
 
BASE BALL. 187 
 
 Catcher. — The player iii this position is expected to 
 catch and stop the ball either pitched or thrown to the 
 home Tbase. He must endeavor to catch all " foul balls," 
 and also be able to throw with accuracy and speed to the 
 several bases. When a striker has made his first base, the 
 position of the catcher should be close to the bat, so as to 
 take the ball without a bound from the pitcher, and pass 
 it quick to second base in order to cut off the player run- 
 ning from first to second. He should also watch the oth- 
 er bases — his position giving him the best opportunity. 
 
 Pitcher. — The pitcher's position is on a direct line with 
 home base, forty-five feet distant at the time the ball 
 leaves his hand. Both feet must be on the ground. He 
 vasssX pitch the ball, not Jer^ or throw it ; and he should be 
 careful also to deliver the ball over or as near over the 
 home base as possible, and at the height the striker de- 
 sires. Section 5 of the Rules will guide the umpire in this 
 respect. A " balk" will be declared if the pitcher moves 
 his arm with the apparent purpose of pitching the ball 
 and fails so to do. When a player is on the third base, he 
 should follow the ball to near the home base, and be pre- 
 pared there to take it from the catcher ; also to occupy 
 the. deficient bases when the players of such positions have 
 left them to field the ball. An even or uniform delivery 
 is the first requisite for a first-class pitcher. The degree of 
 speed is governed by the amount of twist given to the ball. 
 
 Short Stop. — ^The position of short stop is a very impor- 
 tant one, and is looked upon by many as being the second 
 in importance. The one who fills it with honor to himself 
 and his club must have judgment, activity, accuracy in 
 throwing, and also be a good catcher and stopper. Now 
 to find all these qualities combined in one person is rare. 
 He must back up the pitcher and third base man, and 
 
188 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 second and third when the ball is thrown from the field. 
 He should always be near the pitcher or third base man 
 when they attempt to take a foul fly; in case they miss, 
 he may succeed in taking it on the bound. A short stop 
 and first base player should practice throwing and catch- 
 ing together. This will make them familiar with each 
 other's play, and have its good results in match games. 
 
 First dBase. — The one who plays in this position should 
 stand some distance back, and from four to eight feet in- 
 side of the foul-ball post line when the ball is struck, and 
 if he finds it comes not in his direction, he should that mo- 
 ment spring to his base and be in readiness, with one foot 
 on or touching the base, to receive the ball from the one 
 who has fielded it. The player, filling this position as it 
 should be filled, must be a superior catcher, balls coming 
 with great speed to the right, to the left, to the feet, and 
 frequently over the head, and all looked for, to be held. 
 None but an expert can be expected to come fully up to 
 the requirements. 
 
 Second J3ase. — This is certainly an important position, 
 and requires an excellent player to fill it. He should be a 
 sure catcher, an accurate and swift thrower, and a good 
 fielder. He should stand back of the base, and either to 
 the left or right of it, according to whether the striker hits 
 from the right or left hand. He must back up the pitch- 
 er, allowing no balls to pass if it can be prevented. When 
 the striker reaches the first base, he should return and 
 stand in a position to receive the ball from the catcher, 
 and put out the one running by touching him with the 
 ball. When the ball is badly thrown by the catcher, ev- 
 ery efibrt should be made to stop it, and also promptly to 
 return it to the pitcher. 
 
 Third Base. — The third base requires its occupant to be 
 
BASE BALL. 189 
 
 in every resj^ect a first-class player. One of the most 
 noted and universally acknowledged scientific players at 
 base lljall in this country fills this position. Those playing 
 bases must avoid obstructing them or the line of the same, 
 when their opponents are running or making their bases. 
 
 Left Field. — The first requirement for this position is to 
 be capable of holding fly balls; the second to run well ; the 
 third to throw with speed and at the same time accurately. 
 
 Centre Field. — This position should be filled by an act- 
 ive player, for he has not only to take fly balls, but he must 
 also back up the second base, and assist m fielding balls 
 that are passed by the left or right fielders. 
 
 Right Field. — The player who fills this post has as a 
 general thing less to do than any other one of the nine. 
 Admitting this to be the fact, a good player should always 
 occupy it, so that he might take the place of another in 
 case of an accident. He should at least be one of skill and 
 experience. 
 
 The first pomt to be considered in selecting the ground 
 is, that it be level and free from movmg sand or gravel. 
 Sandy or gravelly bottoms often occasion falls, scrajDing or 
 cutting the fingers or hands, etc., which are by no means 
 agreeable or pleasant. Sod well rolled is perhaps the best 
 for ball playing. The space should be at least five hundi-ed 
 feet long by three hundred and fifty wide. The catcher's 
 ground should be smooth and hard ; the pitcher's also. 
 
 It is quite unnecessary that I should describe the man- 
 ner of keeping game, as each club has its regular scorer. 
 
 The history of the present style of playing Base Ball 
 (which of late years has been much improved) was com- 
 menced by the Knickerbocker Club in the year 1 845. There 
 were two other clubs in the city that had an organization 
 that date back as far as 1832, the members of one of which 
 
190 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEKCISES. 
 
 mostly resided in the first ward, the lower part of the city, 
 the other in the uj)per part of the city (9 th and 15 th wards). 
 
 Ball Ground. 
 
 Catcher. 
 
 Umpire. ^ 
 
 * 
 
 Riglit Field. 
 
 Left Field. 
 
 Centre Field. 
 
 Both of these clubs played in the old-fashioned way of 
 throwing the ball and striking the runner, in order to put 
 him out. To the Knickerbocker Club we are indebted for 
 the present improved style of playing the game, and since 
 
BASE BALL. 
 
 191 
 
 their organization they have ever been foremost in altering 
 or modifying the rules when in their judgment it would 
 tend to make the game more scientific. 
 
 Model of Score -Book. 
 
 Base Ball Cluh. 
 
 INNINGS. 
 
 Plateks. 
 
 Posi- 
 tions. 
 
 ■•:-:-w-;-i'- 
 
 8. 
 
 9. 
 
 TOTAI, 
 
 H.O. 
 
 Total 
 Runs. 
 
 1. [Name.] C. | 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2. " 
 
 P. 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 3. " 
 
 s.s. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i. " 
 
 IB. ! ! 1 i j 1 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 5. " 
 
 2B. 1 1 1 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 , ! 
 
 6. " 
 
 3B. 1 1 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 7. " 
 
 L.F. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 8. " 
 
 C.F. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 i 
 
 9. " 
 
 E.F. 
 
 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 Total Euns 
 in each In- 
 nings 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Grand Total . 
 Passed Balls, 
 Umpire, 
 
 Date of Match, 
 Where Played, 
 
 Winning Club, 
 Scorer, 
 
 77ie First Convention of base ball players was held in 
 the city of New York, in May, 1857, from which sprang 
 the National Association. At that date the following 
 named clubs were organized : 
 
 New YorJc: Knickerbocker, Gotham, Eagle, Empire, 
 
192 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 Baltic, Harlem, Independent, Metropolitan, Champion, St. 
 Nicliolas. 
 
 Brooldyn : Excelsior, Star, Enterprise, Atlantic, Hamil- 
 ton. 
 
 'Williamsburg : Putnam, Contin'cntal. 
 
 Greenpoint : Eckford. 
 
 Jamaica: Atlantic. 
 
 Morrisania : Union. 
 
 NewarJc: ISTewark. 
 
 JSFew Brunswicli, : Liberty. 
 
 The Tenth Annual Convention of the National Asso- 
 ciation of Base Ball Players was held at Clinton Hall in 
 the city of New York, on Wednesday evening, December 
 12th, 1866. Two hundred and twelve clubs were repre- 
 sented. The following are the names of each club, and 
 where located :* 
 
 New York City. — Knickerbocker, Gotham, Eagle, Empire, Mutual, 
 Active, Athlete, World, New York, Jefferson, M. M. Van Dyke, Endeav- 
 or, Eclectic, Exercise, Fulton, Mystic, Sparta, Harlem, Social, Hope. 
 
 New Yokk State. — Atlanta, Ti-emont ; Atlantic, Jamaica; Alert, 
 Elinira ; Auburii, Auburn ; Binghamton, Binghamton ; Central City, Sy- 
 racuse ; Cypress, East New York; Eagle, Flathush; Enterprise, Clif- 
 ton ; Earnest, Riverhead ; Excelsior, Ehnira ; Hudson Eiver, Newhurg ; 
 Hudson, Hudson; Hector, Elmira ; Idlewild, Cornwell ; Knickerbocker, 
 Albany ; Lone Star, Mattewan; Liberty, Jamaica; Monitor, Goshen 
 Meteor, Addison; Monticello, Monticello ; Monitor, Corning; National, 
 Albany ; Niagara, Buffalo; Ontario, Oswego ; Pacific, New Utrecht; 
 Palisade, Yonhers ; Surprise, West Farms; Sparkill, Piermont ; Union, 
 Morrisania ; Union, Elmira ; Union, Lansingburgh ; Una, Mount Vei-- 
 non; Undercliff, Cold Spring; Utica, Utica; Victory, Troy; West 
 Point, Buttermilk Falls; Williamsport, Williamsport ;Wa,s\iV!igion, Port 
 Chester ; Walkill, Middletoivn. 
 
 Pennsylvania. — Athletic, Alert, Athenian, Alvin, Awkward, Arc- 
 tic, Amateur, Armstrong, Bachelor, Commonwealth, Chestnut Street 
 Theatre, Dirigo, Equity, First Ward, Germantown, Gymnast, Henry 
 
 I 
 
BASE BALL. 193 
 
 Clay, Keystone, Kensington, Korndoffer, Leisure, Minerva, National, 
 Olympic, Orion, Philadelphia, Ealeigh, Ritterhouse, Typographical, West 
 Philadelphia, Philadelphia; Alert, Danville; Alleghany, Alleghany; 
 Brandy wine, Westchester ; Excelsior, Coatsville ; Hiawatha, Kittanning ; 
 Independent, Johnstown; Juniata, Hollidaysburgh ; Keystone, Hams- 
 burgh; Kickerrepawling, Johnstown; Neptune, Easton; Rival, Provi- 
 dence; Star, Altoona; Scranton, Scranton; Social, Huntingdon ; Tyrol- 
 Ian, iZaj-nsW^'^ ; Union, Titusville ; JJiiity, Port Michmond ; Wild Cat, 
 lii-ookville. 
 
 New Jersey. — Americus, Newark; Active, Newark; Atlantic, 
 Trenton; 'Buxlmgion, Burlington ; Bergen, Bergen ; Champion, Jersey 
 City; Camden, Camden; Columbia, Bordentown; Eureka, Newark; 
 Excelsior, Pater son; Friendship, Beverly; Irvington, Irvington; Kear- 
 ney, Railway ; Monmouth, Hohoken ; Liberty, New Brunswick ; Nassau, 
 Princeton; National, Je7-se^ City; 'SaX\oua\, Morristoion ; Newark, iVew- 
 ark ; Olympic, Pater son; Palisade, Englewood; Princeton, Princeton; 
 Randolph, Dover; Resolute, Elizabeth; Star, New Brunswick ; Sea Side, 
 Long Branch ; Trenton, Trenton ; Union, Camden. 
 
 Connecticut. — Alert, Hartford; Alert, South Norwalk ; Agallian, 
 Middletown ; Bridgeport, Bridgeport ; Charter Oak, Hartford; Forest 
 City, Middletown; Hockanum, North Manchester ; Howai'd, Hartford; 
 Liberty, Norwalk; Monitor, Westport ; Monitor, Waterbury ; Marvin, 
 Norwichtown; New Britain. New Britain; Oceanic, Mystic Bridge; 
 Pequot, New London; Quinnipiack, New Haven; Pond Grove, Fair 
 Haven ; Uncas, Norwich ; Waterbury, Waterbury ; Yale, New Haven. 
 
 Various States. — Alert, Cumberland, Md. ; Antietam, Hagerstown, 
 Md. ; Buckeye, Cincinnati, Ohio ; Burlington, Burlington, Vt. ; Cres- 
 cent, St. Albans, Vt. ; Continental, Washington, D. C. ; Capitol, Wash- 
 ington, D. C. ; Capitol, Columbus, Ohio ; Cincinnati, Cincinnati, Ohio ; 
 Diamond State, Cincinnati, Ohio ; Eon, Portland, Maine ; Enterprise, 
 Baltimore, Md. ; Fort Scott, Fort Scott, Kansas ; Hunki Dori, Wheel- 
 ing, Va. ; Interior, Washington, D. C. ; Jefferson, Washington, D. C. ; 
 Lightfoot, Chattanooga, Tenn. ; Live Oak, Cincinnati, Ohio; Maryland, 
 Baltimore, Md. ; Northwestern Association, Chicago, III. ; National, 
 Washington, D. C. ; Olympic, Louisville, ICy. ; Olympic, Washington, 
 D. C. ; Occidental, Gambler, Ohio ; Pastime, Baltimore, Md. ; Potomac, 
 Washington, D. C. ; Pioneer, Portland, Oregon ; Union, Washington, 
 D. C. ; Union, St. Louis, Mo. ; Union, Richmond, Va. ; Western, Bur- 
 lington, Iowa; Wahkousa, Fort Dodge, Iowa. 
 
 I 
 
194 MANUAL or PHYSICAL EXEEGISES. 
 
 Rules and Regulations adopted hy the National Asso- 
 ciation OF Base Ball Players, held in New York, Z>6- 
 cember\2th,l%Q<o. \ 
 
 Ball. 
 Section 1. — The Ball must weigh not less than five and one-half, nor 
 more than five and three-fourths ounces avoirdupois. It must measure not 
 less than niile and one-half, nor more than nine and three-fourths inches 
 in circumference. It must be composed of india rubber and yarn, and 
 covered with leather ; and in all match games shall be furnished by the 
 challenging club, and become the property of the winning club, as a 
 trophy of victory. 
 
 Bat. 
 
 Sec. 2. — The Bat must be round, and must not exceed two and a half 
 inches in diameter in the thickest part. It must be made of wood, and 
 may be of any length to suit jthe striker. 
 
 Bases. 
 
 Sec. 3. — The Bases must be four in number, placed at equal distances 
 from each other (and securely fastened upon the four corners of a 
 square),* whose sides are respectively thirty yards. They must be so con- 
 structed as tp be distinctly seen by the umpire, and must cover a space 
 equal to one square foot of surface. The first, second, and third bases 
 shall be canvas bags, painted white, and filled with sand or sawdust 
 [some soft material] ; the home base and pitcher's point to be marked 
 by a flat circular iron plate, painted or enameled white. 
 
 Sec. 4. — The base from which the ball is struck shall be designated 
 the "Home Base," and must be directly opposite to the Second Base. 
 The First Base must always be that upon the right hand, and the Third 
 Base that u^on the left hand side of the striker. When occupying his po- 
 sition at the home base and in all match games, a line connecting the 
 home and first base, and the home and third base, shall be marked by 
 the use of chalk or other suitable material, so as to be distinctly seen by 
 the umpire. 
 
 * These words were stricken out by the committee on rules and regulations at the con- 
 vention held Dec. 13th, 1S65, and the words " each corner" inserted. 
 
BASE BALL. 195 
 
 Pitcher, 
 
 Sec. 6. — The Pitcher's position shall be designated by two lines, two 
 yards in length, drawn at right angles to the line from home«to second 
 base, having their centres upon that line at two fixed iron plates, placed 
 at points fifteen and sixteen and one-third yards distant from the home 
 base. The pitcher must stand within those lines, and must deliver the 
 ball as nearly as possible over the centre of the home base, and fairly for 
 the striker. 
 
 Sec. G. — Should a pitcher repeatedly fail to deliver the striker fair 
 balls, for the apparent purpose of delaying the game, or for any cause, the 
 umpire, after warning him, shall call ' ' One Ball ; " and if the pitcher per- 
 sist in such actions, " Two" and "Three" balls. When three balls have 
 been called, the striker shall take the first base ; and should any base be 
 occupied at that time, each player occupying it or them, shall take one 
 base without being put out. All balls delivered by the pitcher striking 
 the ground before reaching the line of the home base, or pitched over 
 the head of the batsman, or pitched to the side opposite to which the 
 batsman strikes from, shall be considered unfair balls. 
 
 Sec. 7. — The ball must \q pitched, not jerked nor thrown to the bat ; 
 and whenever the pitcher moves with the apparent purpose or pretense 
 to deliver the ball, he shall so deliver it, and must have neither foot in 
 advance of the front line, or off the ground at the time of delivering the 
 ball; and if he fails in either of those particulars, then it shall be de- 
 clared a "balk." The ball shall be considered a.s jerked in the meaning 
 of the rule, if the pitcher's arm touches his person when the arm is swung 
 forward to deliver the ball, and it shall be regarded as a throw if the arm 
 be bent at the elbow at an angle from the body or horizontally from the 
 shoulder when it is swung forward to deliver the ball. A "pitched 
 ball" is one delivered with the arm straight and swinging perpendicularly 
 and free from the body. 
 
 Balk. 
 
 Sec. 8. — When a balk is made by the pitcher, every player running 
 the bases is entitled to one base, without being put out. 
 
 Fair BaU. 
 Sec. 9. — The striker shall be considered a player running the bases 
 as soon as he has struck a fair ball. 
 
 Sec. 10. — If a batsman strikes a ball on which " one ball" has been 
 
196 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 called, no player can make a base on such a strike ; nor can any player 
 make a base if tbe batsman strikes a ball on which " two balls" have been 
 called ; nw, if he strikes a ball on which " three iialls" have been called, 
 can more than one base be made by each player occupying bases. In 
 the latter event, the batsman shall also be entitled to one base if he 
 strikes a ball on which a balk has been called. Sections 8 and 9 of the 
 Eules shall apply. In either case the ball shall be considered " dead," 
 and not in play until settled in the hands of the pitcher. In neither case 
 shall it be considered a strike ; and if a batsman willfully strikes at a ball 
 out of the fair reach of the bat, for the purpose of striking out, it shall 
 not be considered a strike. 
 
 StriMng of Balls. 
 Sec. 11. — If three balls are struck at and missed, and the last one is 
 not caught, either flying or upon the first bound, it shall be considered 
 fair, and the striker must attempt to make his run. 
 
 Foul Ball. 
 Sec. 12. — The striker is out if a foul ball is caught, either before 
 touching the ground, or upon the first bouncT. 
 
 Tliree Strikes. 
 
 Sec. 13. — Or, if three balls are struck at and missed, and the last is 
 caught, either before touching the ground or upon the first bound, provided 
 the balls struck at are not those on which balls or balks have been called, 
 or not those struck at for the purpose of willfully striking out. 
 
 Sec. 14. — Or, if a fair ball is struck, and the ball is caught without 
 having touched the ground. 
 
 Sec. 15. — Or, if a fair ball is struck, and the ball is held by an adver- 
 sary on first base, before the striker touches that base. 
 
 Running Bases. 
 Sec. 16. — Any player running the bases is out, if at any time he is 
 touched by the ball while in play in the hands of an adversary without 
 some part of his person being on the base. 
 
 Foul Ball. 
 Sec. 17. — ^No run nor base can be made upon a foul ball. Such a 
 ball shall be considered dead and not in play, until it shall first have been 
 settled in the hands of the pitcher ; in such cases, players running bases 
 
BASE BALL. 197 
 
 shall return to them, and may be put out in so returning in the same 
 manner as when running to the* first base. 
 
 Fair Ball. 
 Sec. 18. — No run nor base can be made when a fair ball has been 
 caught without having touched the ground. Such a ball shall be con- 
 sidered alive and in play. In such case, players running bases shall re- 
 turn to them, and may be put out in so returning in the same manner as 
 when running to the first base ; but players, when balls are so caught, may 
 run their bases immediately after the ball has been settled in the hands 
 of the player catching it. 
 
 Position of Striker. 
 Sec. 19. — The Striker, when in the act of striking, shall not step foi'- 
 ward or backward, but must stand on a line drawn through the centre 
 of the home base, not exceeding in length three feet from either side 
 thereof, and parallel with the line occupied by the pitcher. He shall be 
 considered the striker until he has struck a fair ball. Players must 
 strike in regular rotation ; and after the first inning is played, the turn 
 commences with the player who stands on the list next to the one who 
 lost the third hand. • 
 
 Vacating JBases. 
 Sec. 20. — Players must take their bases in the order of striking ; and 
 when a fair ball is struck, and not caught flying, the first base must be 
 vacated, as also the second and third bases, if they are occupied at the 
 ■ same time. Players may be put out upon any base under those circum- 
 stances, in the same manner as when running to the first base. 
 
 Players onust Touch the Bases. 
 Sec. 21. — Players running bases must touch them, and so far as pos- 
 sible keep upon the direct line between them, and must touch them in 
 the following order : first, second, third, and home ; and if returning, 
 must reverse this order ; and should any player run three feet out of this 
 line for the purpose of avoiding the ball in the hands of an adversary, he 
 shall be declared out. 
 
 Catching the Ball. 
 Sec. 22. — Any player who shall intentionally prevent an adversary 
 from catching or fielding the ball, shall be declared out. 
 
198 MANUAL OP PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 Obstruction of Bases. ' 
 Sec. 23. — If the player is prevented from making a base by the inten- 
 tional obstruction of an adversary, he shall be entitled to that base, and 
 not be put out. 
 
 Ball Stopped by those not Engaged in the Play. 
 
 Sec. 24. — If an adversary stops the ball with his hat or cap, or if a 
 ball be stopped by any person not engaged in the game, or if he takes it 
 from the hands of any one not engaged in the game, no player can be 
 put out unless the ball shall first have been settled in the hands of the 
 pitcher. 
 
 Sec. 25. — If a ball from the stroke of a bat is held under any other 
 circumstances than as enumerated in Section 22, and without having 
 toxiched the ground more than once, the striker is out. 
 
 Two Hands Out. 
 
 Sec. 26. — If two hands are already out, no player running home at 
 the time the ball is struck, can make a run to count in the score of the 
 game if the striker is put out by a fair catch, by being touched between 
 home and first base, or by the ball be^g held by an adversary at the first 
 base before the striker reaches it. 
 
 Sec. 27. — An innings must be concluded at the time the third hand 
 is put out. 
 
 How a Tie Game is Decided. 
 
 Sec. 28. — The game shall consist of nine innings to each side, when, 
 should the number of runs be equal, the play shall be continued until a 
 majority of runs upon an equal number of innings shall be declared, 
 which shall conclude the game. 
 
 Match Games. 
 Sec. 29. — In playing all matches, nine players from each club shall 
 constitute a full field, and they must have been regular members of the 
 club which they represent, and of no other club either in or out of the 
 National Association, for thirty days immediately prior to the match. 
 Position of players and choice of innings shall be determined by cap- 
 tains previously appointed for that purpose by the respective clubs. In 
 cases of illness or injury, positions of players and choice of innings shall 
 be determined by captains previously appointed for that purpose by the 
 respective clubs. 
 
BASE BALL. 199 
 
 The Umpire. 
 Sec. 30. — The Umpire shall take care that the regulations respecting 
 the ball, bats, bases, and the pitcher's and striker's positions are strictly 
 observed. He shall ^e the judge of fair and unfair play ; and shall de- 
 termine all disputes and differences which may occur during the game. 
 He shall take special care to declare all foul balls, balks, strikes, and 
 balls immediately upon their occurrence, and when a player is put out, 
 in what position and manner, unasked, and in a distinct and audible 
 manner. He shall in every instance, before leaving the ground, declare 
 the winning club, and shall record his decision in the book of the scores. 
 
 l^y Whom the Umpire is /Selected. 
 Sec. 31. — In all matches the umpire shall be selected by the captains 
 of the respective sides, and shall perform all the duties enumerated in 
 Section 28, except recording the game, which shall be done by two 
 scorers — one of whom shall be appointed by each of the contending 
 clubs. 
 
 Betting on the Game. 
 Sec. 32. — No person engaged in a match, either as umpii-e, scorer, 
 or player, shall be either directly or indirectly interested in any bet upon 
 the game. Neither umpire, scorer, nor player shall be chtinged during 
 a match unless with the consent of both parties, except for reasons of ill- 
 ness or injury, or for violations of this law ; and then the umpire may 
 dismiss any transgressor. 
 
 In Case of Main or DarJcness. 
 Sec. 33. — The umpire in any match shall determine when play shall 
 be suspended ; and if the game can not be concluded, it shall be decided 
 by the last even innings, provided five innings have been played ; and 
 the party having the greatest number of runs shall be declared the win- 
 ner. • 
 
 Malls JKhoeJced Outside of the JBounds. 
 Sec. 34. — Clubs may adopt such rules respecting balls knocked be- 
 yond, or outside of the bounds of the field, as.the circumstances of the 
 ground may demand ; and these rules shall govern all matches played 
 upon the ground, provided that they are distinctly made knoAvn to ev- 
 ery player and umpire, previous to the commencement of the game. 
 
200 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 SpeaJcing with the Umpire. 
 Sec. 35. — No pei'son shall be permitted to approach or to speak with 
 the umpire, scorers, or players, or in any manner to interrupt or inter- 
 fere during the progress of the game, unless by special request of the 
 umpire. 
 
 Must he a Member. 
 Sec. 36. — No person shall be permitted to act as umpire or scorer in 
 any match, unless he shall be a member of a base ball club governed by 
 these rules. 
 
 Punctuality in Cqlling the Game. 
 Sec. 37. — Whenever a match shall have been determined upon be- 
 tween two clubs, play shall be called at the exact hour appointed ; and 
 should either party fail to produce their players within thirty minutes 
 thereafter, the party so failing shall admit a defeat, and shall deliver the 
 ball before leaving the ground ; which ball must «be received by the club 
 who are ready to play, and the game shall be considered as won, and so 
 counted in the list of matches played. And the winning club shall be 
 entitled to a score of nine runs for any game so forfeited, unless the de- 
 linqij^nt side fail to play on account of recent death of one of its mem- 
 bers, and sufficient time has not elapsed to enable them to give their op- 
 ponents due notice before arriving on the ground. 
 
 iVo Match Game Shall he Commenced in the Main. 
 
 [New Section of December 13th, 1S65.] 
 Sec. 38. — Any match game played by any club in contravention of 
 the rules adopted by this Association, shall be considered as null and 
 void, and shall not be counted in the list of match games won or lost, 
 except a game be delayed by rain beyond the time appointed to com- 
 mence the same. Any match game can be put off by mutual consent of 
 the parties about engaging in the same. No match game shall be com- 
 menced in the rain. 
 
 Competent to Play. 
 
 pCnown as 38 in Old Rules.] 
 Sec. 39. — No person who. shall be in arrears to any other club, or who 
 shall at any time receive compensation for his services as player, shall be 
 competent to play in any match. 
 
BASE BALL. 201 
 
 Striker Delaying the Game. 
 
 [Known as 39 in Old Eules.] 
 Sec. 40. — Should the striker stand at the bat without striking at good 
 balls repeatedly pitched to him, for the apparent purpose of delaying the 
 game, or of giving advantage to a player, the umpire, after warning him, 
 shall call "One Strike," and if he persists in such action, "two" and 
 "three" strikes. When three strikes are called, he shall be subject to 
 the same rules as if he had struck at three fair balls. 
 
 Niimher of Games. 
 
 Sec. 41. — Every match hereafter made shall be decided by the best 
 two games out of three, unless a single game shall be mutually agreed 
 upon by the contesting clubs. 
 
 Sec. 59. — No person who shall be in arrears to any other club, or shall 
 at any time receive compensation for his services as a player, shall be 
 competent to play in any match. All players who play base ball for 
 money, place, or emolument, shall be regarded as " Professional Players ;'' 
 and no professional player shall take part in any match game. And any 
 club giving any compensation to a player, or having to their knowledge 
 a player in their nine playing in a match for compensation, shall be de- 
 barred from membership in the National Association ; and they shall 
 not be considered by any club belonging to this A^ociation as a proper 
 club to engage in a match with ; and should any club so engage with 
 them, they shall forfeit membership. 
 
 The Duties of Umpire. 
 
 The gentleman who accepts this important position 
 should be a player perfectly familiar with eveiy essential 
 point of the game, and Avho will enforce rules with the 
 strictest impartiality. If the umpire would, for the time, 
 put aside individual bias, and render his decisions as if each 
 player was to him a perfect stranger, there would be less 
 cause for complaint on the part of interested friends, but 
 also, as has frequentLf hap]3ened, from players themselves. 
 
 The umpire should not hold conversation with either 
 the players or spectators during the game, -and if he is 
 « I* 
 
202 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 spoken to, his answer should be in a loud and distinct tone, 
 for there are those who often attend matches, and whQ 
 make it a practice to find fault with every act or decision 
 of the umpire not in their favor. These persons call them- 
 selves friends of the players, but in my judgment, and in 
 the judgment of many who take a deep interest to foster 
 and promote the game, they are any thing but fjiends. 
 The duty of an umpire, at best, is any thing but agreeable, 
 but when he assumes it, he should discharge it, fearless 
 of all outside influence. His decisions should be given in a 
 loud and distinct tone of voice. When the batter refuses 
 to strike at fair balls, the umpire should enforce the rule 
 of Section 37, by calling — one strike — and if the batter 
 persists in his course, then to call two, or three, as the case 
 may be. It is the duty of every umpire to enforce this 
 rule, and when the pitcher delivers such balls as the bats- 
 man can not possibly hit, he must apply the same rule to 
 him, and call one, two, or three balls, as the case may be. 
 The umpire should watch closely the movement of the 
 pitcher, and see that both feet are in their proper position ; 
 also that his arm is not resting against his side, for if it is, 
 the ball is more apt to be jerked instead of being pitched, 
 as it should be. All foul balls taken on the fly, or bound, 
 after striking a tree,*building, or fence, unless an agreement 
 to the contrary is made at the commencement of the match, 
 the umpire will declare out. The same rule applies to fair 
 balls coming from a tree or roof of a building, and taken 
 on the fly. If the umpire should be convinced that either 
 side was prolonging the game so that darkness would cause 
 to them an advantage gained, which by fair manly play 
 there was a probability of losing, he must decide the game 
 by the previous even innings, or declare the game to be 
 drawn. 
 
5. 
 
 Mttnm ml Mm%t 
 
CHAPTEE XIII. 
 
 Fencing 205—225 
 
 With Seventeen Illustrations. 
 
 CHAPTEE XIV. 
 
 Beoadswoed 22G— 234 
 
 With Twelve Illustrations. 
 
 CHAPTEE XV. 
 
 SALriES 235—237 
 
 With Eight Illustrations. 
 
 CHAPTEE XVI. 
 
 Spaekik§ oe Boxing 237 — 253 
 
 With Five Illustrations. 
 
FENCING. 205 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 FENCING. 
 
 What can be more graceful or imposing than a man in 
 the attitude of fencing, his eye keeping pace with his 
 hand, and all his muscular power braced up and ready for 
 the commencement of attack ? Foot and eye and point 
 are opposed. The expansion of the. breast, the erect post- 
 ui-e of the head and neck, the motion of the muscles of the 
 thighs and legs, give to a man in any of these situations 
 the most animating and pleasing efl^t, and by jDractice of 
 them is acquired, better than by any other, grace and elas- 
 ticity of movement. But independently of this, would it 
 not be well for all officers, whether of the army, navy, or 
 volunteers, to study how to use the swords which are sus- 
 pended at their sides ? They may, if they have not the op- 
 portunity for more, confine themselves to learning the ordi- 
 nary sword exercises ; but if they desire to be neat and 
 quick swordsmen, and graceful in every movement, they 
 should begin by a thorough course of practice with the 
 foil before attempting to handle a more cumbrous weapon. 
 
 Fencing has indeed fallen very far from the high posi- 
 tion which it held in the days of the great Italian and 
 French martyrs, who cultivated it to a degree of perfec- 
 tion hardly conceivable by those who have not read their 
 elaborate treaties, and studied the infinite variety of beau- 
 tiful drawings by which they illustrated their precepts. 
 
206 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 The practice of fencing is not only recommended now as 
 one among many methods of giving grace and agility to 
 the human frame, hut it certainly is unsurj)assed in effica- 
 cy for those objects, and besides this, it supplies a resource 
 which may at any moment become valuable ; so that its 
 claims are still strong to hold a place in the programme 
 of education of a finished gentleman. It possesses, more- 
 over, quite an historic interest, and many believe that even 
 an uninstructed eye would see in an encounter be^een 
 two accomplished fencers a very high degree of beauty. 
 
 In this art it must be admitted the French excel those 
 of other countries. There are various reasons assigned 
 for this. . Some attribute it to' the agility and acknowl- 
 ed^d power of rapid physical action possessed by this 
 nation ; by others it is ascribed to their natural vivacity 
 and mental quickness. In my oj^inion, hoAyever, it arises 
 from their great love^or military and physical education. 
 With them every regiment has its fencing-school. Indeed, 
 in so important a light was the proper teaching of this art 
 held, that Louis XIV. granted letters patent to a large 
 number of eminent teachers, who alone were permitted to 
 teach in Paris. When a vacancy occurred, no interest 
 and no favor could enable an applicant to obtain this 
 privilege. He was obliged, in order to get the aj)point- 
 ment, to fence in public with six of those chosen teachers, 
 and if by any one of them he was beaten by the majority 
 of hits and two over, he was considered unqualified to 
 teach in the capital. 
 
 Independent of this value as an art and accomplish- 
 ment, fencmg sta,nds unrivaled as an exercise, and it is m 
 this sense that I propose to treat of it. The most eminent 
 French physicians have, in the most earnest manner, rec- 
 ommended it to the attention of the young. It is known 
 
FENCING. '20 7 
 
 by all that muscular exertion is essential in perfecting the 
 form of the hody, and those exercises which require the 
 employment of the greatest number of muscles are the 
 most conducive to this end. Fencing causes fully as many 
 muscles to act at the same time as any other athletic or 
 bodily exercise. It will certainly promote the expansion 
 of the chest, and improve respiration, whereby the func- 
 tions of the most imj)ortant organs of the body are more 
 perActly performed. It is likewise apparent th*at the at- 
 titudes and exertions of fencing are conducive to the man- 
 ly forms and muscular energies of the human figure. 
 
 In regard to this beautiful exercise, the famous physician 
 Sir Everard Plome uses the following language : " Of all 
 the different modes in whigh the body can be exercised, 
 there is none in my judgment that is capable of giving 
 strength and velocity as well as precision to the action 
 of all the voluntary muscles of the body in an equal de- 
 gree as the practice of fencing ; and none more conducive 
 to bodily health." Many similar extracts of letters from 
 some of our ablest physician * could be given, but I think 
 it unnecessary. It is enough to know that they all sj)eak 
 in terms equally recommendatory. 
 
 To avoid all danger in the lessons or in practice, the 
 point of the foils should be covered with a batting com- 
 posed of gutta-percha ; strong wire masks should cover the 
 face ; a well padded glove should protect the hand ; and 
 the upJDer part of the body, at which alone the thrusts 
 should be made, is protected by a strong jacket ; the right 
 side and collar should be. of leather or canvas.* 
 
 * The figures which illustrate this chapter on Fencing, are all from 
 photographs taken from experts in actual position. They are therefore 
 perfectly correct to the minutest point. 
 
208 
 
 MANUAL OP PHYSICAL EXEKCISES. 
 
 Position and Movements. 
 
 Attitude. — Standing with heels closed, toes turned out, 
 body erect on the hips, shoulders square, and eyes direct- 
 ly to the front. (Figure 1.) 
 
 Mrst Position. — One. — Half face to the left, feet at 
 right angles, heels together, right toe pointing directly 
 to the front, shoulders back, chest out. (Figure 2.) 
 
 ic:^^ 
 
 Fig. 1. 
 
 Fig. 2. 
 
 Fig. 3. 
 
 Second Position. — Two. — On Guard. — ^Move the right 
 foot from sixteen to eighteen inches in front or in advance 
 of the left heel ; heels indirect line (Figure 3). The great- 
 er portion of the weight of body rests on left leg. Head 
 erect, breast out, stomach in ; foil in right hand, opposite 
 the mark or right nij)ple of the breast. The. right elbow 
 a little above and in advance of the waist, the fore-arm and 
 foil sloping uj)ward — the point of the foil being about on 
 a line with the right eye. The left arm gracefully curved 
 and raised behind the head ; hand open, but fingers to- 
 gether and slightly inclmed (Figure 4) toward the wrist. 
 
 Third Motion. — Advance. — One. — By carrying the 
 
FENCING. 
 
 209 
 
 right foot forward albout tlie width of the guard, sixteen 
 to eighteen inches, (But of course this varies with cir- 
 cumstances. A tall man will be apt to step longer than a 
 short one.) On its reaching the ground, the left foot is 
 brought up and takes its place. Position as in Figure 5. 
 
 Fig. 4. 
 
 Fig. 5. 
 
 # 
 
 Fig. G. 
 
 Fig. T. 
 
 Fourth Motion. — Retreat. — The reverse of the previous 
 movement is made. The left foot makes the first move, 
 stepping to the rear about the same distance as the right 
 
210 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEKCISES. 
 
 had stepped to the front (Figure 6), the right occupying 
 its jDlace, on its taking up its new position, the next mo- 
 ment. Care must he taken to keep the arms in their proper 
 jDOsition, as in Figure 6. 
 
 Fifth Motion. — Advance by placing the right foot close 
 to the left, as in Figure 7 ; then stepping the left foot for- 
 ward the regular guard distance, and come in position 
 on guard, as in Figure 4. 
 
 Sixth Motion. — Retreat by. placing the left foot to the 
 right, or the reverse from the former. 
 
 Seventh Motion. — Pass to the front by passing the right 
 foot in advance of the left. 
 
 Eighth Motion. — ^Pass to the rear by passing the left 
 foot to the rear of the right. Remember that at each stoj) 
 the feet must come in the position of "on guard." 
 
 Ninth Motion. — 
 Taking the position 
 of " on guard," as 
 in Figure 4, you ex- 
 tend by stretching 
 both arms tc^ their 
 fullest extent, and 
 throwing the weight 
 of the body on the 
 right leg (Figure 8) ; 
 the left leg extended, 
 ''^' ■ and knee straight 
 
 back, drawn in; chest -out, and head erect. The left arm 
 should be more extended and on a line with the right. 
 
 Tenth Motion.— ^'E^xiendi. Lunge out by first repeating 
 the previous movement, then stepping out from thirty- 
 three to thirty-six inches with the right foot — the left re- 
 maining fixed, with knee perfqptly straight ; left arm down 
 
FENCING. 
 
 211. 
 
 along the left side ; elbow straight, palm of the hand to 
 the front. The upper part of the body must be well set 
 • on the hips ; head 
 
 erect, right hand 
 on a line with the 
 right eye ; fingers 
 upward, as in Fig- 
 ure 9. The same 
 movement in lung- 
 ing out should be 
 practiced at a pad 
 placed four feet 
 This will bring the arm in the position as 
 
 Fig. 9. 
 
 from the floor, 
 in Figure 10. 
 
 Eleventh Motion. — Advance — extend — lunge out. This 
 is simply a combination of the former exercises, which you 
 should by this 
 time be familiar 
 with. Now re- 
 ■ treat — extend — 
 and lunge out. 
 
 Twelfth Motion. 
 — A d V a n c e by 
 placing the right 
 foot to the left — 
 extend — lunge 
 out ; retreat • by ^'s- lo- 
 
 placing the left foot to the right-r-extend — lunge out. 
 
 Thirteenth Motion. — Pass to the front — extend — lunge 
 out. The first movement the same as in the seventh exer- 
 cise ; the next as in the tenth. Pass to the rear, the right 
 foot moving first.. Extend — lunge out. 
 
 It is necessary that these movements ^should be fre- 
 
212 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 qtiently practiced, as they give s'trength and flexibility to 
 the muscles of the legs, and accustom the arms to the cor- 
 rect movement they make in fent5ing. It also gives prom- 
 inence to the chest and balance to the body. 
 
 Fourteenth Motion. — Position on guard, as in Figure 4. 
 Turn the wrist in tierce; fingers downward. The arm 
 must be kept steady, the wrist only moving. Practice 
 this a number of times. Carte — tierce — carte — tierce. 
 
 TJie Lunge in Carte. 
 In simple or straight thrust this is a very important 
 movement, and is rather difiicult to make properly, and is 
 fatieruino; to the beginner. I consider the first movements 
 
 * Fig. 11. 
 
 in fencing to be the most trying to the learner, and he 
 must not be discouraged if he fails to do them correctly at 
 first — it is practice only that will give him this power. 
 The lunge is that extension of body, as in Figure 11, which 
 should accompany every attack. It is fully explained how 
 it is made in the first exercises. 
 
 The Mecover. 
 To return from the position of lunge to that of on guard 
 must be done quickly. The left arm is -thrown up to its 
 
FENCING. 213 
 
 place ; the right arm drawn in, and the left knee rebent, as 
 in Figure 4. It is the quick, united action of this move- 
 ment 'that enables you to recover from and avoid a thrust 
 from an opponent if your own attack has failed. 
 
 The Lunge in Tierce. 
 
 Drop your point as close as possible under your oppo- 
 nent's blade, and lunge in tierce. The foil should be held 
 with a firm grasp. 
 
 JjOioer Carte Thrust. 
 
 This is a simple straight lunge, but instead of the point 
 of your foil touching the breast, it should fall as low as 
 the waist, your hand slightly inclined to the left, your 
 head looking over and outside the arm. 
 
 Parry Carte. 
 
 Strike your opponent's blade at the same instant ; ex- 
 tend the arm, and lunge quick and straight. 
 
 Parry Tierce. 
 Strike your opponent's blade while engaged in tierce, 
 and lunge quick and straight. 
 
 Second Thrust. 
 
 Your guard being in tierce, extend the arm and lunge 
 straight in carte : the back part of the hand should be up- 
 w^ard. 
 
 Simple Turn. 
 
 Make the feint as if to thrust in tierce under your op- 
 ponent's blade, bringing it back quick, and lunging in 
 carte ; at the first motion you should extend the same 
 movement from the other side of your opponent's blade, 
 and,lunging in^tierce. 
 
214 MANUAL OF PHYSI&AL EXEKCISES. 
 
 Double Turn. 
 
 Made precisely in the manner of the former, except you 
 make three feints and follow it with the lunge. The 
 lunge is made, first, in carte, second, in tierce, from both 
 sides of your opponent's blade. 
 
 Counter Parry Tierce. 
 
 Pass your blade quickly under that of your opponent, 
 and strike it strong, following it instantly by the lunge. 
 
 Counter Parry Carte. 
 
 The same as the last, except from the opposite engage- 
 ment. 
 
 Duple. ' 
 
 Pass your blade' twice around the opponent's point, 
 taking care to make your circle as small as jDOSsible, then 
 lunge straight and quick; the same movement from the 
 opposite engagement. 
 
 Duple^ loith Simple Turn. 
 The first movement as the previous, then simple turn, 
 then the lunge ; the same movement from the opposite 
 engagement. 
 
 Duple with Double Turn. 
 
 First movement the same, followed by double turn and 
 the lunge. Rejaeat from the opposite engagement. 
 
 Parry Carte Dicosha. 
 
 On guard in carte, strike your opponent's blade and 
 lunge over the arm; in tierce the same, except from the 
 opposite engagement. 
 
 Flanconade. 
 
 Standing on guard, by a circular movement and stiiong 
 
FENCING. 
 
 215 
 
 grasp of the foil you get to the opposite side of your op- 
 ponent's blade (Figure 12), throwing his out of the line of 
 thrust, upon the instant of which you lunge ; the same 
 movement from the opposite engagement. 
 
 Fig. 12. 
 
 Simple Tiim, witJi Duple. 
 These are the same movements that you have previous- 
 ly made, only reversed. I give them in this form in order 
 that you may have good practice. This movement is to 
 be made from each side of your opponent's blade, or oj^po- 
 site engage. 
 
 Double Turn, with Duple. 
 
 You have performed the movement of duple with 
 double turn. Now just reverse it as above, and go 
 through the same motions from each side of your oppo- 
 nent's blade. 
 
 Coupe 
 
 Over the point of your opponent's blade, and lunge 
 quick and straight. The same from the opposite engage. 
 
 Coupe Dicosha 
 Over and under the blade, followed by the lunge. The 
 same movement from the opposite engage. 
 
216 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 Coupe. 
 
 Coupe — one, two — at the third feint you make the 
 lunge. 
 
 These simple exercises should be frequently practiced 
 before passing to more difficult ones ; and when you have 
 attained some proficiency in them, you may commence 
 those of attack and defense, or 
 
 The Engage. 
 Standing on guard you engage, or join blades on the 
 inside (Figure 13), although there are occasions on which 
 
 Fig. 13. 
 
 it is advisable to engage on the outside. These are called 
 carte and tierce. You will readily j)erceive that there are 
 two lines of attack open to you, the line inside and the line 
 outside the blade; but these may be subdivided into in- 
 side above the hand, and inside under the hand, and the 
 same for outside. This gives you four lines of attack, or to 
 speak more plainly, gives four openings through which an 
 adversary may be assailed. Now to protect each of these 
 assailable points are four defensive movements, called 
 
FENCING. 
 
 217 
 
 Parries. 
 The first and most natural parry is tliat of carte (Fig- 
 ure 14), and is formed in this way : When your opponent 
 
 Fig. 14. 
 
 makes a straight thrust or lunge, your right hand is moved 
 three or four inches across the body on the inside your 
 hand, being neither lowered nor raised, and your foil being 
 kept on the same slope as in the guard (as in Plate 3, Fig- 
 
 Fig. 15. 
 
 ure 4). This parry protects your body on the inside above 
 
 the hand — but (and here comes the most important part 
 
 K 
 
218 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 in fencing) the very movement which has jDrotected and 
 guarded your body on one side, has exposed it on the oth- 
 er, and this is the case with all the simple parries. Now 
 if your opponent took the advantage of the exposed part 
 outside and above the hand, your defense would be the 
 
 parry of 
 
 Tierce. 
 
 It is made by turning the hand with the nails down- 
 ward (Figure 15), and crossing your foil to the oj)posite 
 side about six or eight inches, taking care that the hand 
 and point are at the same elevation as before ; this will 
 guard this opening or the lunge in tierce over the hand. If, 
 however, the attack had been made under instead of over 
 the hand, then the proper parry would have been second. 
 
 Seco7id. 
 
 This is made by turning the hand in the same posi- 
 tion in which it was turned in tierce, only the point of the 
 foil slopes (Figure 16) as much downward as in tierce it 
 
 Fig. 16. 
 
 did upward, the direction and distance for the hand to 
 traverse being about the same. But suppose the attack 
 
FENCING. 
 
 219 
 
 had "been made at none of these, but at the inside under 
 the hand- — then the correct and proper parry would have 
 been 
 
 Demi- Circle. 
 
 This, as the name expresses, is a close circle following 
 the blade of your opponent and making the parry. Next 
 comes the parry of 
 
 Prime. 
 
 In this parry the hand is raised as high as the fore- 
 head, so that the fencer can see his opponent's face under 
 his wrist (Figure 17) ; the blade of the foil is almost 
 
 Fig. 17. 
 
 horizontal, the point inclined toward the floor or ground. 
 As this parry exposes the right side of the body to your 
 opponent's foil, it is well to disengage as quick as possible, 
 and deliver a rapid coupe thrust over the point of his foil 
 — this you should do in order to anticipate or balk him 
 before he can bring his foil round to the exposed part and 
 thrust. If you make this movement properly, his point 
 will be thrown out of the line of your body, so that should 
 he attempt to make the lunge, it would not be sure. This 
 parry is practiced, and has been found quite effectual with 
 
220 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 fencers of short stature, particularly if they are quick and 
 active, as they often touch by getting in their blade under 
 their oj)ponent's arm, after they have parried his thrust. 
 
 Octave. 
 
 In this parry the hand is held as in carte; the hilt 
 of the foil is kept lower than that of the opponent; the 
 blade should be almost horizontal (Figure 18), the point 
 being only slightly lower than the hilt, as in Plate 6, Figure 
 4, and directed toward the body of the opponent. This is 
 an extremely useful parry, in case you should miss the 
 parry of demi-circle, as there is but a very short distance 
 for the point to traverse, and it most always meets the 
 blade of the opponent before the point touches. Moreover 
 it brings your point so near the opponent's body that he 
 will not venture to make another thrust or lunge until he 
 has removed the foil. I have now given and enumerated 
 the uses of the simple parries. We now come to what is 
 termed the 
 
 Contre -Parries. 
 
 I have shown that a man or person standing foil in 
 hand in the jjosition on guard is exposed in four distinct 
 places to thrusts or lunges from an opponent within dis- 
 tance. I think I have also shown that he has a defense or 
 parry for each of those exposed parts ; but if a person has 
 but one defense for each assailable part, then his opponent, 
 knowing, possibly beforehand what the defense Avill be, or 
 what parry must be made, would be j)repared beforehand 
 to deceive him ; but if he has a second defense for each 
 part, then it is almost impossible for your opponent to tell 
 what defense or parry will be made until his attack, false 
 or real, is begun. As each of the simple parries is calcu- 
 lated or framed to guard only one opening, it was found 
 
FENCING. 221 
 
 desirable that the contre-parries should be of a more com- 
 prehensive character; they are therefore devised and prac- 
 ticed so that each is capable of protecting the entire front. 
 It is evident that this object could not be attained without 
 the sacrifice of quickness, in consequence of a larger space 
 being traversed by the blade, and therefore more time is 
 occupied with a centre than a simple parry. If you know 
 one contre-parry perfect, you virtually know them all, as 
 they are all made or formed on the same plan : they are 
 all full circles made in and from the position of hand and 
 direction of foil of the different simple parries, or more 
 plainly speaking, each simple parry has a contre-parry. 
 There are, therefore, four simple and four contre-parries, 
 which are named as follows : 
 
 1. Simple in Carte. 5. Counter in Carte. 
 
 2. Simple in Tierce, 6. Counter in Tierce. 
 
 3. Second. 7, Counter in Second. 
 
 4. Demi-Circle. 8. Counter in Demi-Circle. 
 
 I have said that a counter-parry is a full circle in the 
 jDOsition of hand and direction of blade of its simple. Thus 
 the counter-carte is made by retaining the hand in the 
 position of carte, while the foil describes a circle descend- 
 ing on the inside and returning by the outside to the place 
 of its departure. So with all the others — the foil invaria- 
 bly following the direction of the simple parry of which it 
 is the counter. These complete the entire perfect system 
 of defenses. We now come to the most important, but of 
 the opj)osite nature, namely, the modes of attack. 
 
 Attacks. 
 
 We will begin with the most simple of them. I shall 
 sujDpose two opponents standing on guard, as in Figure 4, 
 and within lunccinc; distance of each other. Now the most 
 
222 MANUAL OP PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 simple movement the attacking party could possibly make 
 would be 
 
 The Straight Thrust^ 
 
 Either to the outside or inside, according to his line of 
 engagement. I have, in describing the lunge in the first 
 exercises, fully described the straight thrust. It is, as you 
 by this time know, but a lunge in a direct line, taking 
 care, however, to feel firmly the blade of your opponent, 
 but not to press down or lean on it during the delivering 
 of the thrust. Next in order comes 
 
 The Disengagement. 
 You make this attack by dropping the point of the foil 
 beneath the opponent's blade, and raising it on the opposite 
 side ; at the same instant extend the arm, and make the 
 lunge quick and straight. You may if you please extend 
 with the first motion. This is apt to throw the oj)ponent 
 
 off his guard. 
 
 Coupe — 07ie — Too. 
 
 This is what may be called a double disengagement, 
 the first movement being but a feint or false attack, in 
 order to induce the opponent to form or make a parry to 
 cover the pai't threatened, for the covering of one part of 
 the body exposes the opposite. The second disengage- 
 ment is made for the purpose of taking advantage of this 
 exposure. The arm should be extended very slightly on 
 the first, and then wholly on the second, to be immediately 
 followed by the lunge. 
 
 The Parry Carte Thrust. 
 This is another mode of attack, standing on guard, as in 
 Figure 4, the blades touching. Now if you made the at- 
 tempt to deliver a straight thrust, there would be more 
 
FENCING. 223 
 
 or less danger of your falling upon the point of your op- 
 ponent's foil. This danger you avoid hy first giving a 
 strike or beat on his blade the instant preceding your ex- 
 tension of arm, and followed immediately by the lunge. 
 
 The Parry and Disengagement. 
 The parry here is made as a feint, and is intended to in- 
 duce the oj)ponent to return to the place he occupied when 
 the parry or beat was made. You then immediately pass 
 to the opposite side of his blade, in the manner I have so 
 fully described in the disengagement and first exercises. 
 You will observe that all the movements that I have so far 
 given pass under the opponent's blade. There are, how- 
 ever, ccrtam situations in assault fencing (as a fencing 
 bout is called), when an adversary is more easily assailable 
 over the point of the foil than under the blade, and the 
 surest way for this to be made is by the couido. 
 
 Coupe or Out Over the Point. 
 
 This is made by the action of the hand only, and with- 
 out drawing back the arm in the least : the point of the 
 foil by a quick movement is raised and brought down on 
 the opposite side of the adversary's blade, the arm being 
 extended during its fall to the horizontal position, on at- 
 taining which the lunge is instantly made. 
 
 Parry Duple or Double 
 Is made in this form : If you were to threaten your op- 
 ponent by a disengagement to the outside, and if, instead 
 of tierce, he parried counter-carte, the double is then made 
 by you makmg a second disengagement to the same side 
 as the first ; for it will be found that his counter-carte has 
 replaced the blades in the same positions they occupied 
 
224 
 
 MANUAL OP PHYSICAL EXERCISES, 
 
 previous to your disengagement. You Avill then have a 
 clear openmg, and may finish the attack Iby the lunge, as 
 all the counter-parries are on the same plan and principle. 
 So also are every one of the doubles. Of course you un- 
 derstand that you must make all the movements .of the 
 double as close as possible, and without allowing your op- 
 ponent's blade to touch yours. 
 
 Fig. IS. 
 
 Adnice to JB-egmners. 
 
 I would recommend to all beginners that they practice 
 well the first exercises, and next the feints and parries. 
 This may be done with a friend or fellow-student in the 
 following manner : Let one stand entirely upon the defen- 
 sive, while the other assumes the ofiensive, and attacks 
 with all the skill of which he is master — the other of 
 course defending with all his parries. This you will find 
 excellent practice, as it accustoms you to think for your- 
 self, gradually having thus for the time being but one set 
 of movements to think about. You will therefore be en- 
 abled to make them boldly, without having to encounter 
 unknown movements from your opponent. It also enables 
 •you to see the extent of his resources, both for attack and 
 
FENCING. 225 
 
 defense. This practice should be taken with first one act- 
 ing upon the defensive, then the other, changing every ten 
 or fifteen minutes. When you are able to both attack and 
 defend with some presence of mind, you may then begin 
 the assault. 
 
 The Assault. 
 
 That is, you may encounter an adversary, to attack or 
 defend as occasion presents, for you are then left to your 
 own resources entirely.* 
 
 Advice for Assault. 
 
 1. Two skillful fencers fight more with their heads than 
 their hands. 
 
 .2, If you are much inferior, make no long assaults, but 
 watch closely the movements of your opponent. 
 
 3. Endeavor both to discover your adversary's designs 
 and to conceal your own. 
 
 4. Let your movements be made as much within the 
 line of your opponent's body as possible. 
 
 5. Do nothing that is useless. Every movement should 
 tend to your advantage. 
 
 6. The smaller you make the movements with your foil, 
 the quicker will the point touch your oi^ponent's body. 
 
 7. Do not endeavor to give any thrusts while in the j^o- 
 sition of lunge. Recover on guard first. 
 
 8. If your opponent droj)s his foil in consequence of a 
 strong parry of yours, you should immediately pick it up 
 and present to him. 
 
 9. Always join blades (if possible) previously to another 
 attack after a hit is given. 
 
 K* 
 
226 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 BEOADSWOED. 
 
 The principal distinction between the Broadsword and 
 Foil is, that the latter is formed only for thrusting, while 
 the former is adapted for cutting also ; indeed, the greater 
 majority of those who use the broadsword are, in my 
 opinion, too apt to neglect the use of the point, and to give 
 their attention almost exclusively to the cuts. 
 
 J^irst Position. — Perfectly erect ; feet at right angles, 
 heels close ; arms clasped behind the back, right palm sujd- 
 porting the left elbow, left hand grasping the right arm 
 just above the elbow. From this position bend both knees 
 and sink down as far as possible. It will not be far at first, 
 but practice will make it easy. 
 
 Second Position. — Place the right foot quickly in front 
 from fourteen to sixteen inches ; be sure to maintain a per- 
 fect balance on the left foot, that you may place the right 
 either before or behind without losmg the balance. 
 
 Third Position. — This consists in stepping well forward 
 with the right foot, until the left knee is quite straight, and 
 the right knee exactly perpendicularly placed over the 
 right foot. Great care must be taken to keej) the heels 
 exactly in the same line, and the body perfectly upright. 
 Position as in Figure 1. The learner should remember to 
 perform the different movements by word of command, re- 
 ceiving the first part of the word as a caution, and not to 
 move until the last syllable is uttered. 
 
BROADSWORD. 
 
 227 
 
 The sword is now taken in hand, and the cuts in prac- 
 tice made as follows : The interior lines of the target rep- 
 resent the cuts ; cut one being directed from No. 1 diago- 
 nally through the target, coming out at 4 ; but two is the 
 same, only from left to right ; three is made upward diag- 
 
 onally, and four is the same, only in the opposite direc- 
 tion ; but_/?ye is horizontally through the target, from right 
 to left, and six from left to right ; seven is perpendiculai-ly 
 downward. Great care must be taken that all the cuts 
 are fairly given with the edge. The swords drawn on the 
 target represent the guards. 
 
 Outs and Guards. 
 
 Position as in Figure 2. Cut from 1 to 4 when the 
 point has cleared the target. Turn the wrist, and bring 
 the sword in the position seen in Figure 3. Now cut from 
 2 to 3. Continue the movement, and turn the wrist so that 
 the point of the sword comes below the right hip, the edge 
 toward the ground. Next cut through the target diag- 
 onally, or from 3 to 2. Let the sword sweep onward so 
 
I 
 
 228 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 that it rests with the edge clown, and point below the left 
 hip. Now cut from 4 to 1, bringing the sword around 
 until its point is over the right shoulder. At the word^we 
 
 Fig. 2. 
 
 Fig. 3. 
 
 Fig. 4. 
 
 make a horizontal cut from 5 to 6, and sweep the sword 
 around until it rests on the left shoulder with its edge to 
 the left. The next cut will be from 6 to 5, or the reverse 
 
 Fig. 5. 
 
 of the former. Let the sword sweep over the head with 
 its edge upward. Now make a downward stroke until 
 the sword reaches the centre of the target. Here stop and 
 wait for the word. 
 
EROADSWOED. 
 
 229 
 
 Thriists. 
 
 Position as in Figure 4. Make a panse, then quickly 
 thrust forward toward the centre of the target, as in Fig- 
 ure 5. 
 
 Second Movement. — Turn the Avrist so that the edge 
 comes upward, and thyust to the centre of the target. 
 
 Gxtards. 
 
 The guards should be learned from the target, by placing 
 the sword in precisely the same position as there shown. 
 They come in the following order : 
 
 A. First Guard.— B. Second Guard.— C. Third Guard.— D. Fourth 
 Guard.— E. Fifth Guard.— F. Sixth Guard.— G. Seventh Guard.— H, 
 in the target, is where the thrusts should come. 
 
 Fig. 6. 
 
 Fig. T. 
 
 Parry Thrusts. 
 
 The parry of a thrust is executed with the back of the 
 sword. Hold the sword perpendicularly, with its edge to 
 the right, and its hilt about the height of and close to the 
 right shoulder, as in Figure 6 ; then by a sweep from left 
 to right any thrust within its sweep is thrown wide of the 
 
230 MAKUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 body. It must be remembered the parries are made with 
 the wrist and not with the arm, which should not move. 
 
 " Hanging Guard. 
 This is a very effectual position, as it keeps the body 
 well protected under the sword, and at the same time 
 leaves you in a good position to cut or thrust. The hand 
 should be over the right foot, and as high as the head. 
 The edge of the sword is upward, and the point down- 
 ward, the point to the left. This position will be found 
 very fatiguing at first, but this is soon overcome. There 
 is perhaps no attitude which gives greater advantages. 
 
 Inside Guard. 
 
 Stand as in Figure V, the wrist nearly as low as the 
 waist. The hand must be exactly over the right foot, the 
 sword's point about as high as the eyes ; the edge turned 
 inward as in the figure. 
 
 Outside Guard. 
 This guard is formed in the same manner as the ^other, 
 with the exception that the edge of the sword is turned 
 well outward. For those guards the word is given : Inside 
 Guard ! — Outside Guard !^Guard ! 
 
 Attack and Defense. 
 The beginner, having learned thus far, will now combine 
 the three movements of Striking or Cutting, Thrusting, and 
 Guarding. This should be done in the following order : 
 
 1. Cut one.— 2. First Guard.— 3. Cut Two.— 4. Second Guard.— 5. 
 Cut Three. — 6. Third Guard.— 7. Cut Four.— 8. Fourth Guard.— 9. 
 Cut Five.— 10. Fifth Guard.— 11. Cut Six.— 12. Sixth Guard.— 13. Cut 
 Seven. — 14. Seventh Guard. — 15, Inside Guard. — 16. Outside Guard. — 
 
 ! 
 
BROADSWOED. 
 
 231 
 
 17. Guard. — 18. Prepare for thrust in first position ; repulse as in Figure 
 8. — 19. Second Thrust : receive it in first position. Eepulse as in Fig- 
 ure 9. 
 
 Fig. 8. 
 
 The beginner must remember that in all the exercises 
 the cuts and thrusts should be given from the position of 
 " on guard'." Figure 10 shows the seventh cut and guard. 
 
 These exercises should always be practiced at first with 
 the single stick or wooden basket-hilted sword, in order to 
 avoid the dangers which would be inevitable if the sword 
 were used. The stick can be an imitation of sword, the 
 only difference it being a little lighter. 
 
232 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 Practices. 
 
 Positions as in Figure 11. The practice with broad- 
 sword of cuts, guards, thrusts, etc, you have by this time 
 attained ; you. also have some confidence in the use of the 
 weapon, Now try with an opponent, and go through the 
 same exercises, each taking the attack and defense in turn. 
 Both must be provided with a stout wire mask, which de- 
 fends the face and part of the neck ; alsjp over the head, in 
 order to guard against the seventh cut. Never practice 
 without the masks, as neither party would otherwise be 
 able to cut or thrust with proper confidence. 
 
 Fig. 10. Fig. 11. 
 
 A good practice at first is for the opiDonents to stand 
 opposite each other at just such a distance that when per- 
 fectly erect each can touch the hilt of his adversary's sword 
 with the point of his own. At the word, No. 1 will thrust. 
 No. 2 guard, and the reverse alternately. Practice all the 
 motions with great care in this form, and when you have 
 them to some perfection you can thrust and guard, by 
 springing forward to thrust, and back to guard. 
 
BEOADSWOED. 
 
 233 
 
 This should be continued for some time, and at each 
 practice more rapidly. If No. 1 is quick and active upon 
 his feet, and No. 2 should cut at the leg, it would be proper 
 for No. 1 not to oppose the cut by the guard, but to draw 
 back the leg quickly, and cut six or seven, at the neck or 
 head, as in Figure 12. 
 
 Fig. 12. 
 
 When two persons engage without following any word 
 of command, but cu.t, thrust, and guard as best they can, 
 both take their position on guard as in Figure 11, because 
 from this they can either advance or retreat as they choose, 
 or spring in or out with equal ease. With good active 
 swordsmen it is often a feature to j^ut the right leg more 
 in advance than it should be, in order to induce the adver- 
 sary to make a cut at it. Wlien he does so, the leg is 
 drawn back quickly, the cut passes harmless, and the 
 striker receives from his opponent a cut on head, neck, or 
 shoulders. 
 
234 MANUAL or PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 Forte and Feeble. 
 One-half the swordhlade next the hilt is called the 
 Forte, from the fact of it being the strongest place on which 
 the cut of an adversary can be received. Always guard 
 and parry with the " Forte" of your sword, for if yoa try 
 to guard a cut with the Feeble, which is the weak part of 
 the blade, your guard will perhaps be forced, and the cut 
 take effect. 
 
 Words of Advice. 
 
 Remember that the great point in this exercise, as in 
 fencing with the foil, is to gain time. Endeavor, therefore, 
 to advance your point nearer your adversary than his is to 
 yon. 
 
 N"ever look at your own sword, but watch the eye and 
 sword-wrist of your opponent. 
 
 Always spring back to the proper position after deliver- 
 ing a cut or thruBt. 
 
 Begin the assault at a distance, so that neither party can 
 complain of being taken by surprise. 
 
 Keep the line of direction carefully, or you will leave an 
 open space for the adversary to cut or thrust. 
 
 Last, and most important : donH lose your temper. 
 
SALUTES. 
 
 235 
 
 CHAPTER XY. 
 
 SALUTES. 
 
 The " Salute" with foil, if the movements are correct, 
 and done with time and precision, exhibits to the specta- 
 tor much grace, skill, and beauty. 
 
 Fig. 1. Fig. 2. Fig. 3. 
 
 
 
 No. 1 and 2 will take their positions opposite each other, 
 nine feet apart, both standing as in Figure 1, each looking 
 at the other. Both will raise the right hand to the head, 
 and bring it as in Figure 2. Bring the foil quick up over 
 the head, and salute first to the left. The foil will next 
 make a circle around the head, and salute to the right, as 
 in Figure 3. Now bring it in front, and come on guard, as 
 in Figure 4 of Fencing. No. 2 will take the position- we 
 see in Figure 4. 
 
236 
 
 MANUAL OP PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 No. 1 will now lunge out, the point of his foil touching 
 No. 2's breast. No. 2 will raise his foil on guard at the 
 same time, stamping the right foot. No. 1 will lunge in 
 
 Fig. 4. 
 
 Fig. 5. 
 
 Fig. 6. 
 
 Fig. T. 
 
 simple or straight thrust, No. 2 striking No, I's blade, 
 and holding for fiye seconds the positions seen in Figures 
 4-5. Six thrusts and the same number of parries are made. 
 
SALUTES, 
 
 231 
 
 The thrusts are the first six m the School of Fencing ; when 
 these are gone through, each will re- 
 sume the position of Figure 3, and go 
 through the same motions as at the 
 commencement. 
 
 Now No. 2 will lunge at No. 1, go- 
 ing through the same motions, only- 
 No. 2 lunges, while No. 1 parries. 
 At the conclusion of the sixth lunge, 
 salute left and right, and bring the 
 hand as in Figure 7, dropping the 
 hand as in Figure 8, which concludes 
 ^'s- s- the salute. 
 
238 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 SPHERING OR BOXIKG. 
 
 This manly exercise has no necessary connection with 
 the brutal and disgusting exhibitions of the " Prize Ring." 
 An accomplished sparrer is, as such, no more a vulgar 
 bruiser than an elegant penman is a forger or counterfeiter, 
 or a clever gymnast, who can climb a ladder " hand over 
 hand," is a burglar. I treat this subject simply as a 
 physical exercise : one which more than almost any other 
 develops and brings into play the best qu^alities of our 
 compound nature — quickness of perception m the mind, 
 and quickness of action in the body. Sparring is in phys- 
 ical exercise what Chess is in sedentary games. Some one 
 has said that the man who can play a good game of chess 
 has all the mental requisites necessary for a great general. 
 I say that the man who can spar well has attained the 
 highest point of physical development. If he can do this, 
 he can do any thing which lies within the compass of a 
 well trained body. Good sparring requires the simultane- 
 ous action of almost every organ. The eye. must be alert 
 to detect and even anticij^ate the movements of the oppo- 
 nent. Every nerve and muscle, from those of the remotest 
 extremities to those which lie close to the citadel of life, 
 are brought into simultaneous action at the command of 
 the brain. Cut off a great toe or a thumb, and a man 
 could never spar well. A good sparrer must have good 
 lungs and a good heart, good legs and good arms, good 
 hands and good feet, and moreover a good temper. 
 
SPARRING OR BOXING. 239 
 
 I urge the study and practice of this art upon the high- 
 est sanitary, aesthetic, and moral grounds. Of its sanitary 
 henefits I need hardly speak ; all that I have said hereto- 
 fore respecting the healthfulness of athletic exercises ap- 
 plies to this. As to its aesthetic recommendations, what 
 more graceful sight can be presented than that of two gen- 
 tlemen in the attitude of sparring ? Their eyes keep pace 
 with their hands ; every nerve and muscle is braced to its 
 utmost tension; the whole man, body and soul, is alert 
 for offense or defense ; to give a blow at the adversary, 
 and to ward off the blow which he may give. Now phys- 
 ical-grace consists wholly and absolutely in the most free 
 exercise of the body. Dancing is graceful just in the de- 
 gree in which the body moves naturally. Fencing is 
 graceful, and m a higher degree, because it calls into play 
 more mental power. Sparring is graceful beyond either, 
 because it demands all the body and more of the mind. A 
 person may dance well while his thoughts are far from the 
 ball-room. The body can dance without the employment 
 of the mind. A person can fence well without the use of 
 his eyes. I have known some maitres (Tarmes whom, blind- 
 fold them and put a foil in their hands, it would be hard to 
 hit. But I think that no man can spar at all without the 
 exercise of eyes, body, and limbs. As to moral requisites, 
 no man can sj^ar well unless he has his temper in j^erfect 
 control. A man may indeed fight fiercely — kick and gouge 
 when maddened into a wild beast. But I do not speak of 
 such brutal exhibitions. I speak only of sparring, an ex- 
 ercise which any gentleman may take, with the assurance 
 that it will be of physical benefit, and can produce no in- 
 jury to him or his opponent — for the blow with the gloved 
 hand, no matter how well delivered, can do no harm. 
 
 Every gentleman should learn to spar. I will go fa-r- 
 
240 
 
 MANUAL OP PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 ther, and say that every body should also be taught this 
 graceful and healthful exercise, I see no reason why a 
 gentleman and lady should not spar togethei'. The greater 
 size and strength of the one would be balanced by the su- 
 perior quickness and alertness of the other. I do not find 
 that in waltz or polka, in the Lanciers or the German, gen- 
 tlemen outdance ladies ; and I greatly doubt whether they 
 would be able to outspar them. At any rate, I can find 
 no good reason why so magnificent a branch of physical 
 training as sparring should by implication ever be aban- 
 doned to the vulgar brutes A^ho, under the name of " prize- 
 fighters," disgrace human nature. 
 
 Fig. 1. 
 
 Fig. 2. 
 
 First Position. 
 
 Place the left foot from sixteen to eighteen inches in 
 advance of the right, the feet forming something less than 
 a right angle ; the right heel on a line with the left ; the 
 body well set on the hips, with its weight mostly resting 
 
SPARRING OE BOXING. 241 
 
 on the right leg ; the left and right arms m the position as 
 seen in Figure 1. 
 
 Exercise: — First Motion. 
 
 Two jjersons to stand in position as in Figure 2. (I will 
 mark them One and Two.) No. One will strike the left 
 hand straight at the head of No, Two ; this will be stoj)ped 
 or guarded by Two with the right fore-arm or wrist. Re- 
 peat this a number of times, slowly at first, but after you 
 imjDrove in hitting and stopping, then increase the quick- 
 ness. No. Two, in striking with the left hand, must be 
 careful to keep the elbow close to the body, and at the in- 
 stant of striking, throw the weight of the body on the left 
 leg, bending the knee slightly, and extending the right leg 
 as much as possible. Remember that in this, the first of 
 the exercises, both must keep their positions ; that is, they 
 must not move out of distance. This is simply practice for 
 the arms, or what is called the " hitting and stopping" ex- 
 ercise. The action upon the feet is taken when the begin- 
 ner is farther advanced. Now alternate the first motion 
 in this form : No. One, strike — No. Two, stop ; then No. 
 Two strike. No. One stop : slowly and carefully at first. 
 In hitting, reach well forward in order to touch the object j 
 and in stopping, throw the greater portion of the av eight 
 on the right leg. 
 
 Exercise : — Second Motion. 
 Standing in the first position. No. One leads ofi" with the 
 left, quickly followed with the right — both hits aimed at 
 the head, which are stopped by No. Two, first with the 
 right arm, then with the left. This motion requires con- 
 siderable practice in consequence of the difiiculty of hitting 
 and stopping well with the right hand. Now alternately : 
 
 L 
 
242 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 first No. One leading off, No. Two stopping, tlien No. Two 
 
 leading, and No. One stopping. Thus you will observe you 
 
 learn to stop every hit from your opponent that you make 
 
 at him. 
 
 Third Exercise. 
 
 Standing in first position. No. One will malse three 
 straight hits at the head of No. Two, first left, then right 
 and left. No. Two must stop with right, left and right. 
 Now alternately, No. One leading. No. Two stoppmg. 
 It should be understood that in every case in the simjjle 
 exercise No. One is to lead first. This prevents any mis- 
 takes. 
 
 Fourth Exercise. 
 
 Standing in first position, No. One will strike the left at 
 
 the head, and the right at 
 the body, the glove touching 
 the guard above the hips ; 
 No. Two will stop the left 
 at the head, as all the jjre- 
 vious left hand hits, and stop 
 the right by throwing the 
 left arm down, catching the 
 hit upon the large part of 
 the arm near the elbow, as 
 in Figure 2. In stoj)ping a 
 body blow the muscles must 
 be strongly set, the arm well 
 bent, and the hand inclinmg 
 toward the chin. Now al- 
 ibis- 3. ternately. 
 
 Fifth Exercise. 
 Standing in first position. No. One will hit — the left and 
 
SPARKING OR BOXING. 243 
 
 right at the head, then the left at the body. No. Two 
 will stop left and right at head in the same manner as 
 in the second exercise. Then throw the right arm well 
 across the hody, and catch the hit on the strong part of 
 the arm. Bear in mind not to relax the muscles, for in 
 that case your own arm will come against your body. 
 The left hand hit at the body from an opponent generally 
 comes near the pit of the stomach. It is therefore neces- 
 sary, in order to stop it fair while only exercising, to bring 
 the right arm well over the hand, inclining toward the 
 left shoulder. In an active set-to you evade this hit by 
 springing back ; but it is better that you should practice 
 well how to stop it, in case, when sparring, there is not 
 room enough to jump back. Now alternately, in one — 
 two — three order. 
 
 Sixth Exercise. 
 
 Standing in first position, No. One will hit at the head 
 of No. Two, without regard to the number of sti'ikes. This 
 is a very difficult exercise for the stopper ; but with some 
 practice he will be enabled not only to catch the action 
 of the oj)ponent's eye, but also the movements of his 
 shoulder and hand. The hits should be made in the order 
 of one — two — three — four — five, in rapid and quick suc- 
 cession, provided No. Two has had sufficient practice to 
 stop well ; if not, commence slpwly. The arms of the 
 striker should be extended to their full length at every 
 hit, and No. Two. should guai'd close and sure. Noav re- 
 verse the exercise by letting No. Two hit, and No. One 
 stop. 
 
 Seventh Exercise. 
 
 Taking the first position. No. Two will for the first time 
 lead off — the left at the head. The instant No. One stops 
 
244 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 the hit, he must strike with his left, getting it back in- 
 stantly, to stop the body blow from No. Two's right hand. 
 Next change, No. One leading off! This should be prac- 
 ticed with great care and caution. After this a fourth hit 
 is added : starting from your left stop. You have stopped 
 your opponent's right at the body ; now straighten your 
 left quick, and strike at the head. These motions must be 
 done in the following order : First, left at head ; stop left 
 at head. Second, right at body ; stop left at head ; alter- 
 nately in leading off . 
 
 EigMh 'Exercise : — Simultaneous Motion. 
 
 Standing as in first position, you willboth now practice 
 what is termed the " counter hit," which, in the opinion of 
 the best boxers, is the most effectual hit in sparruig. It is 
 not only troublesome to learn in exercise, but difficult to 
 execute in practice. Both standing within distance. No. 
 One will call — one, and at the same instant strike with 
 the left hand at the head of No. Two, takmg care to 
 guard well his own from the left of No. Two. The arms 
 of both must move together, hitting and stopping at the 
 same time. This requires much practice before it can be 
 brought to any perfection. The boxer who can counter 
 well will always make a fine set-to with any expert sparrer. 
 
 I might multiply the number of motions for exercise, 
 but I think those alreadj^ given will suflSce. The manner 
 of making the " cross counter," " double hit," etc., will be 
 fully explained hereafter. 
 
 It is now ]D resumed that you have taken sufficient prac- 
 tice with the arms in hitting and stopping, to have some 
 confidence in being able to hit with precision, and stop 
 with the same amount of jiidgment ; if so, we will ad- 
 vance to the next exercise, which is 
 
SPAERING OE BOXING. 245 
 
 First Exercise upon the Feet. 
 Standing in the first position, (l) raise yourself up on 
 the ball of your feet, retaining a perfect balance of the 
 body. (2.) The same exercise, except when you raise the 
 heels from the floor, strike out straight with the left 
 hand. Be careful the balance of the body is not lost by 
 overhitting. (3.) The same as the preceding, except as 
 you come back to the first position, you raise the right or 
 guard hand as in the act of stopping ; the first motion of 
 raising on the toes or fore part of the foot, and the straight 
 hit forward should be long. (4.) Standing in first position, 
 you turn on the right heel, facing either to the right or 
 left. Care must be taken that the feet are in the proj)er 
 position which ever way the body faces. If the toe of the 
 left foot is on a direct line with the left hand, it is correct. 
 (5.) In the same position you raise the heels slightly from 
 the floor and spring to the rear ; then to the front ; again 
 to the rear, and so on. Practice will enable you to jump 
 from six to nine feet. I know one gentleman who can 
 spring with great ease the latter distance. You must not 
 forget that in this exercise the arms should be kept in 
 their proper position for hitting or guarding, and that 
 when you alight you do so with a perfect balance of the 
 body. 
 
 How to Avoid heing Sit without GxMrding. 
 
 This can be done either by the backward spring, or by 
 dodging to the right, left, or ducking. 
 
 Manoeuvring. 
 
 By "manoeuvring" is meant any movement by Avhich 
 one gains an advantage over the other. The sparrer who 
 is remarkably quick and active upon his feet, generally 
 
246 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 outmanoeuvres one who is slow, although the latter may 
 he considered a superior hoxer. Quickness now is one of 
 the principal arts of sparring. 
 
 Feints. 
 
 These are movements made in order to deceive your op- 
 ponent. You try, if possible, to make him helieve you are 
 going to hit when you are not, or you feint at one point 
 and strike at another. This you do that he may guard 
 the former, and leave the latter exposed. A feint is often 
 made by a quick movement of the eye, or by a sudden ac- 
 tion of the feet ; but the most perfect executed feints are 
 performed by the arms in the following manner : Standing 
 within distance, you start the left hand at your opponent's 
 head, and as it is on its way, for an instant hold it, and 
 then strike the real blow. Another way is to feint at the 
 face and drop it on the body, or feint at the body and 
 reach the face, or feint with the left at the head, and drop 
 the right on the body, or the reverse. It is quite unnec- 
 essary for me to enumerate all the feints, for they can be 
 made with either hand as often as the sparrer pleases, and 
 at any part of the body, or at the face. 
 
 Now assuming that you have gone through the mo- 
 tions as directed, at least six different times, you should be 
 capable to practice the art of sparring, or a 
 
 Set-to. 
 You now put into practice all that you have acquired 
 in the preceding exercises. The eyes, arms, and legs move 
 or act offensively or defensively, as the case may be. The 
 whole object is to touch your opponent as often as possible, 
 and to prevent him from touching you. In order to do 
 this you must watch constantly his eye. This will enable 
 
SPAEEING QE BOXING. 247 
 
 you to detect any movement of the shoulders, for your eyes 
 take in all those parts. Care must he taken that the dis- 
 tance is exact, so that when you hit, the blow will either 
 touch or he stopped. A good sparrer seldom, if ever, 
 strikes when out of distance, except it is done as a feint, or 
 for the purpose of drawing a return hit from the opponent, 
 that he may get an opportunity of putting in the second 
 with more effect. 
 
 The first set-to is almost always difficult. You can not 
 well discover each other's intentions, and consequently 
 hardly know in what way to guard or parry the hits. But 
 with a little practice, it will become more easy than the 
 first exercise. The quickness of the eye will be improved. 
 The action with the arms, and activity upon the feet, to- 
 gether with increase of strength, rail combine to give ease 
 and grace to the sparrer. At the commencement of the 
 practice I would advise you- to use only those hits that you 
 have learned in the first exercises. When within distance, 
 pay strict attention to the guard, so that your opponent 
 may not touch you if he strikes ; and when you are not in 
 the act of hitting or stopping, you should keep the arms 
 in motion, but not out of their position. This tends to give 
 them quickness, and enables you to hit when least expect- 
 ed ; for your opponent may mistake one of those arm move- 
 ments for a natural hit. If the arms are kept perfectly 
 still, then there is little trouble to detect when a hit is about 
 to be made. By manoeuvring and the quick movement 
 of the arms and feet, you so confuse him that he can not 
 tell when or where you will strike. 
 
 Be careful, when a hit is made at you, not to shut your 
 eyes. You must constantly look in the eye of your oppo- 
 nent. When you make a hit, do it with quickness, pre- 
 cision and full reach, holding the head well back, but 
 
248 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 throwing forward the left shoulder. Hitting short only 
 exposes the striker to quick returns from his oj)ponent, and 
 it is apt to be said of him, as it has been of many others, 
 that he is " shoulder-bound." There is really no such thing 
 as being " shoulder-bound." It is nothing but a habit the 
 beginner falls into at the commencement of the exercise, 
 but when once acquired takes time to remove. 
 
 Short hits should only be used as feints, first movement 
 tor the double hit, drawing out, or to keep your ojDponent 
 from closing. In striking, the arm must not be drawn back 
 beyond the side, except in what is termed " half-arm hit- 
 ting." If the arm is drawn too far back in " out-sparring," 
 you show your opponent your intention, and he will be 
 prepared to stop, and perhaps counter you. 
 
 If you practice well the exercise, it will enable you in a 
 very short time to hit quick and hard blows, without draw- 
 ing the elbow behind the line of the back. When you are 
 sparring with one who stoj)S you with little effort at 
 straight hitting, you miist take action on the feet, spring- 
 ing to the right and left, in and out. These movements 
 may possibly draw him out, in which case you can suddenly 
 stand and pop- him as he comes in. 
 
 In leading off, should your opponent bend back so that 
 it would appear hardly probable for him to again regain 
 his position, or spring out of distance, follow him up quick- 
 ly, and the advantage is all yours. Every hit should be 
 perfectly straight. Such hits are much more difficult to 
 stop, having two advantages, that of the guard being too 
 low or too high. 
 
 It is best in almost every case to lead off with the left 
 hand, the right acting as the guard to protect yourself 
 Some few sparrers can detect when an ojjponent is about 
 to hit with the left hand, and counter him. That is, instead 
 
SPAEKING OK BOXING. 249 
 
 of the hitter hitting, he is hit. The one who can make this 
 hit with a certainty, will ever he a successful boxer, pro- 
 vided he is quick upon the feet to break away from any 
 return that may be made. 
 
 rig. 4. 
 
 The best sparrers at the present day are those who are 
 noted for their quickness upon the feet. The feet assist 
 the hands, in springing forward in order to execute a hit at 
 long range, or backward, to avoid being hit. If the hands 
 and feet act as they should — together, it imparts ease and 
 grace to every movement, and you are always ready to act. 
 The active sparrer avoids many hits by his quick motions. 
 
 In this exercise, good humor should ever prevail, the 
 object being to make the exercise a pastime of pleasure, 
 and at the same time to fix in the mind a proper element 
 of courage and confidence, instead of timidity in time of 
 danger. In order to do this you must keep cool, and not 
 at any time lose self-command and presence of mind. 
 
 L * 
 
250 
 
 MANUAL OF PHTSICAIi EXEECISES. 
 
 Each turn or round, at first, should continue not over 
 five mmutes, for there are few exercises that try the mind 
 more than quick sparring. But frequent practice will im- 
 prove it, as it will also impart to you a more perfect knowl- 
 edge of the science. 
 
 Tlie Counter Hit. 
 
 This is certainly the most important hit in sparring, and 
 is made in the following manner : you strike at the same 
 instant your opponent strikes. To execute it well, and 
 make it efiectual, watch your opponent, and the instant he 
 strikes, you strike at him, avoiding his blow, either by 
 stopping it with the right, or throwing the head slightly 
 over the right shoulder. This is almost always a very hard 
 and efiective blow, from the fact that it is received at the 
 moment that your opponent is coming forward. 
 
 Fig. 5. 
 
 Tlie Cross Counter. 
 This is when two opponents hit at the same instant, one 
 with the left and the other with the right hand. 
 
SPARKING OB BOXING. 251 
 
 
 
 Double Hit. 
 
 This is often successfully made by striking two blows 
 at the head ; the first being stopped, the second taking ef- 
 fect. But the most perfect double hit is the one spoken 
 of in the exercises. In either, the right arm must guard 
 well your own head. 
 
 MeinarJcs. 
 
 In ofiering these few suggestions on the healthful and 
 invigorating practice of sparring or boxing with the gloves, 
 and on the art of attack and defense as practiced at the 
 present time, I beg that I may be acquitted of assuming 
 to myself any superior knowledge, either theoretical or 
 practical, from those who have taken the exercise and felt 
 a pleasure in it, or derived a benefit from it. The motions 
 and exercises that I have given are generally understood 
 by many who spar ; but at the same time I entertain a be- 
 lief that by afibrding to the beginner some insight into the 
 first principles of the art, it will enable him to acquire more 
 readily an acquaintance with its scientific advantages. 
 That a man can be made a perfect sparrer, any more than he 
 can acquire a perfect knowledge of fencing, or dancing, or 
 any other bodily accomplishment, by means of only book: 
 instructions, experience has shown to be at least j)roblem- 
 atical ; but it can not be denied that a previous acquaint- 
 ance with the rudiments and general character of those 
 accomplishments is desirable, as it afibrds facilities toward 
 subsequent improvement. 
 
 It is frequently urged that from books mistaken im- 
 pressions or objectionable habits may be taken : but even 
 under such circumstances, the instructor is enabled, by com- 
 parison and illustration, to exhibit the value of the perfect 
 over the imperfect system. With this view I have given. 
 
252 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 to the best of my ability, thoU exercises, and I trust they 
 will not be without their utility ; but to excel, it must be 
 borne in mind, a competent teacher is indispensable. For 
 a man who has a mere superficial acquaintance with his 
 subject, however he may astonish the ignorant, when he 
 comes in contact with a clever tactician, will find himself 
 lamentably at fault, and more especially in the art of which 
 I have treated, and therefore it is that I would recommend 
 theory to be followed by practice. 
 
 It has been argued by some as a ground of objection to 
 the knowledge of sparring, that it leads men to be pugna- 
 cious, and that they are more ready to seek than to evade 
 a quarrel, in order that they may display their superiority. 
 To this I do not assent, for I have almost invariably found 
 (except with persons who can not command their temper, 
 and if this be the case, whatever be their acquirements, 
 they will be equally without control) that the conscious- 
 ness of power inclines men to be less prone to quarrel, and 
 more forbearing toward an opponent. Calmness of dis- 
 position, joined with perfect self-possession, is in fact one 
 of the most valuable attributes of man, and one of the best 
 tests of true courage. The great end of this exercise is to 
 instill into the mind a manly and honorable bearmg, com- 
 bined with ]3ersonal confidence in the hour of danger. I 
 have no apprehension, therefore, that the knowledge of it 
 will lead to the abandonment of those principles of self- 
 respect which are alike estimable in the minds of the hon- 
 orable. The knowledge of sparring, independent of its 
 uses as a means of self-defense when assailed by lawless 
 outrage or vulgar impertinence, has the additional recom- 
 mendation of being one of the most healthful exercises by 
 which the vigor of the human frame can be imjoroved. 
 The whole body partakes of its beneficial consequences 
 
SPAEEING OE BOXING. 253 
 
 when heartily pursued. The muscular conformation is 
 brought into action, and the latent energies of the system 
 gradually but effectually developed. As the health of the 
 mind is influenced by the health of the body, additional 
 stimulants to its pursuit are offered ; and as it can be en- 
 joyed at all seasons and at all hours, in the most confined 
 as well as the most extensive localities, by the old as well 
 as by the young, by the weak as well as by the powerful, 
 it is in fact one of the best of atUetic exercises, and should 
 be universally encouraged. 
 
Cwining. 
 
CHAPTER SVII. 
 Tkaining, ok How to Remove CojjPtrLENOE ^ 25T— 283 
 
TRAINING, OR now TO REMOVE CORPULENCY. 257 
 
 CHAPTER XVn. 
 
 TRAINING, OR HOW TO REMOVE CORPULENCY. 
 
 To the question — What is Training, and what is it in- 
 tended to do ? — I will answer : It is to put the body, with 
 extreme and exceptional care, under the influence of all 
 the agents which promote its health and strength, in order 
 to enable it to meet extreme and exceptional demands 
 upon its energies. The ordinary agents of health are Ex- 
 ercise, Diet, Sleep, Air, Bathing, and Clothing, I place 
 them here in the order of their importance. My purpose 
 here is to examine some of those agents. 
 
 First^ then, what is Exercise ? We have some notion 
 of what food is, and of the manner in Avhich it nourishes 
 and sustains the body. We see it — taste it — swallow it ; 
 and we feel while doing so that it is essential to life and 
 health and strength. We need no reminder. of the neces- 
 sity of air, for the great benefit of this ^ve experience every 
 moment of our lives. Nightly we feel that sleep is a ne- 
 cessity also to life and health. The same may be said of 
 bathing, as a cleanser and bracer of the skin, and all know 
 how clothing afiects health in this climate, by the sudden 
 changes and its requirements. 
 
 Exercise will hasten the decay and death of all fatty 
 tissues, and replace it with fresh and better material : it 
 will increase the size and power of the vohmtary muscles 
 emiDloyed ; it will promote the health and strength of the 
 whole body by increasing respiration and quickening the 
 
258 MANUAL OP PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 general circulation. These being the results of exercise, I 
 will now proceed with the manner of taking or perform- 
 ing it. 
 
 When a corpulent man eats, drinks, and sleeps well, 
 complains of no pain or any organic disease, he is apt to 
 think that every thing is about right. He forgets that 
 that very ease may carry him off without a moment's 
 warning. Can there be any thing more distressing than 
 obesity and the evils that accompany it ? My desire»here 
 is to impress upon the mind of all such, that by following 
 strictly the rules laid down, good health will be enjoyed, 
 and life will be prolonged. The impression appears to*ex- 
 ist in the minds of fleshy people, that to prevent or remove 
 corpulency, all business pursuits or hours of pleasure must 
 be entirely given up. This is not wholly the case, al- 
 though it necessarily must be to some extent. I have no 
 doubt there are numbers who would like to reduce their 
 flesh and weight if they were satisfied it could be done with- 
 out materially interfering with their other pursuits of life. 
 Let me here say to all such, that all that is required is to 
 know how it should be done, and the will to do it. Every 
 man, woman^ and child grows stronger by exercise, and 
 in my system of reducing the weight the strength is in- 
 creased, and much of the bulk is turned into muscle and 
 sinew, while at the same time the respiratory organs are 
 being enlarged and freed from impurities. 
 
 Heretofore, when men found they were growing too 
 fleshy and sought to check it, or when they desired to be- 
 come lighter, they would resort to Turkish or Russian baths, 
 and place themselves under strict diet, but unfortunate- 
 ly, the very kind that would tend to make fat, not remove 
 it. The baths are very good in their place — for cleansing 
 pui^poses only. If taken for the purpose of removing the 
 
TRAINING, OE HOW TO EEMOVE CORPULENCY. 259 
 
 fat, it must be repeated often, and this will soon weaken 
 the constitution. I have known persons that have tried 
 this system of steaming the fat off, as I might call it, but 
 gave up ia despair, although for removing colds, rheuma- 
 tism, and such ailments, they thought it might be good. 
 jSTow one of the means has failed — the steaming process 
 — next let us see what the diet has done. The man has 
 changed his food and been living upon what he calls light 
 diet, composed of farinaceous food — the very thing that is 
 used to fatten nearly all kinds of animals. Fat is what is 
 termed hydrocarbon, and is found distributed all through 
 the tissues of the body. Now this being the case, we re- 
 quire a certain amount of oxygen and nitrogen to arrest 
 its formation, and give life and vigor to every organ in 
 the whole system. Farinaceous food will not do it ; there- 
 fore it must not be taken. Articles of food are often 
 eaten in early life which agree with the stomach, although 
 in after years, if the same kind was taken, it might prove 
 any thing but beneficial. 
 
 Now when a person is corpulent, let him abstain from 
 taking any thing that tends in the least to create fat, such 
 as milk, beer, potatoes in large quantities, fresh bread, but- 
 ter, sugai', and every kind of vegetable except occasional- 
 ly tomatoes. Hot cakes or hot bread should never be 
 taken. The food should be as follows : 
 
 For breakfast, from six to eight ounces of good beef or 
 mutton, or a small piece of broiled chicken, with dry toast 
 or hard biscuit and a cup of tea not too strong (without 
 milk or sugar). 
 
 At dmner, beef, mutton, chicken, venison, partridge, or 
 quail in reasonable quantity and cooked plainly. No 
 vegetables except, perhaps, one good mealy potato, or a 
 small quantity of fresh tomatoes; hard bread or toast. 
 
260 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 Abstain from all spirituous liquors or ales. If any wine is 
 taken it should be sherry or Madeira ; • but a cup of tea is 
 much more beneficial. 
 
 For supper^ a thin cut of roast beef or wmtton, with tea 
 and toast. This meal should always be light, from which 
 a good night's rest will be obtauied. Eight hours' sound 
 sleep will be quite sufiicient ; but where the rest has been 
 broken, ten hours I think is not too long to remain in 
 bed. 
 
 On rising in the morning, wash the mouth and teeth 
 with cold water, and if the strength in your legs will per- 
 mit you to walk, go out into the air and walk until you 
 feel slightly the exercise. On your return, if there is any 
 perspiration — and no doubt there will be — remove the 
 damp garments and put on dry ones. The knees will feel 
 a little weak, the ankles stiff, and you will no doubt jauff 
 and blow like a grampus the first few times; but you 
 must not get discouraged. The diet will soon give you 
 strength, and the exercise make you lighter. I would 
 recommend an increase of exercise in proportion to the in- 
 crease of strength. It is astonishing how rapidly man im- 
 proves in health and strength under a good system of diet 
 and exercise. In fact, it has been praistically illustrated in 
 England that man can endure more severe exercise and to 
 a greater advantage than any known animal. But, upon 
 the other hand, none shows the difference between health 
 and its absence to such a degree. 
 
 When a man is brought to know what to eat and drink 
 that is healthful and that which agrees with him, I can 
 hardly imagine he will ever experiment with his stomach 
 after. There is scarcely one in a thousand who supposes 
 that he must ask leave of his stomach to be a happy man. 
 In many cases the difference between happy and unhappy 
 
TKAINING, OR HOW TO EEMOYE CORPULENCY. 261 
 
 men is caused by their digestion. Oftentimes the differ- 
 ence between hopeful men and melancholy ones is simply 
 the difference of their digestion. Believe me, the founda- 
 tion of all earthly happiness is physical health ; and yet 
 men scarcely ever value it till they have lost it. If men 
 would only become better acquainted with themselves, 
 there would be much more health and comfort, and very 
 many might be saved from premature graves who die 
 from apoplexy or heart disease. 
 
 Corpulence. 
 
 Dr. Mott says that corpulence, although it gives no 
 pain, still presses with undue violence upon the bodily 
 viscera, loading or driving one part upon another, and 
 stoj)ping the free action of all. I am confident that hun- 
 dreds who are suffering from extreme corpulence would be 
 relieved and greatly benefited by following the course of 
 treatment here laid down. All I ask is a fair trial for forty 
 days, and at the expiration of that time I am confident you 
 will state to your friends that you feel like a new man, 
 and that nothing could induce you to go back to the old 
 method of living. It is the great charm of the diet and 
 exercise that, when once relieved by it, it becomes estab- 
 lished, and you never again feel like giving it up. 
 
 In regard to the above system of diet, I am able to say 
 that I have recommended it to many who will testify to 
 the great benefits derived. There aje many men of seden- 
 tary employment who can not spare time for a thorough 
 course of trauiing, but who desire to remove the fat that 
 is every day clogging the muscles and preventing free 
 action. All they have to do is to follow the simple rules 
 here laid down, and my word for it, they will never regret 
 it. • 
 
262 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 It is an old saying that " Practice makes perfect," and 
 " Use is second nature ;" but how often those sayings are 
 repeated without realizing the truths they express. We 
 all believe in their promise, but do not appear always to 
 comprehend the cause of their literal fulfillment. The re- 
 sults of the working of the law are sometimes seen before 
 the nature of it is understood, that the functional ability 
 of every organ in the human system is in relation and pro- 
 portion to its activity. 
 
 I have i-eceived a statement from one of the first physi- 
 cians in this city in regard to the proportioned difference 
 that should exist between weight and stature. His calcu- 
 lations were made upon the quantity of air passing in and 
 out of the lungs, by which means he could give some esti- 
 mate as to the health of the various bodily organs. His 
 statement is as follows : 
 
 5 feet 2 inches should be 120 lbs. 
 
 6 " 4 " " 130 " 
 5 " 5 " " 136 " 
 5 " 6 " " 140 " 
 
 5 " 7 " " 145 " 
 
 Weigut. 
 
 6 feet 8 inches should be 155 
 
 9 
 10 
 11 
 
 160 
 168 
 172 
 175 
 
 This tabular statement is made from an average of 
 3,019 perfectly healthy men. 
 
 I^ements of Food. 
 
 Some articles of food have no carbon, others no nitrogen ; 
 some have both in varying proportions. All kinds of food 
 have water or waste from five to ninety-five per cent. The 
 following table shows the result of the researches of one 
 of the ablest chemists of the present age : • 
 
TKAINING, OR HOW TO REMOVE CORPULENCY. 263 
 
 One Hitndked Parts. 
 
 Beef, lean and fresh. 
 
 Mutton, lean 
 
 ChicKen 
 
 T7 „ "I the yolk.... 
 
 ^SSS, I the white... 
 
 rish 
 
 Oysters 
 
 Bread 
 
 Potatoes 
 
 Eice 
 
 Arrowroot 
 
 Butter 
 
 Beef Tea 
 
 Milk of cow 
 
 Oat Meal 
 
 Corn Meal 
 
 Wheat 
 
 Eye 
 
 Cherries 
 
 Peaches 
 
 Gooseberries 
 
 Pears 
 
 SolibokNutei- 
 TiVB Matter. 
 
 Watee. 
 
 Cabbon. 
 
 26 
 
 74 
 
 10 
 
 241 
 
 75i 
 
 8 
 
 23 
 
 77 
 
 — 
 
 45 
 
 55 
 
 — 
 
 20 
 
 80 
 
 — 
 
 18 
 
 82 
 
 — 
 
 13 
 
 87 
 
 36 
 
 66 
 
 34 
 
 31 
 
 24 
 
 76 
 
 11 
 
 78 
 
 22 
 
 — 
 
 82 
 
 18 
 
 36 
 
 83 
 
 17 
 
 66 
 
 4 
 
 96 
 
 — 
 
 13 
 
 87 
 
 — 
 
 92 
 
 8 
 
 — 
 
 86 
 
 14 
 
 — 
 
 84 
 
 16 
 
 39 
 
 80 
 
 20 
 
 37 
 
 24 
 
 76 
 
 — 
 
 20 
 
 80 
 
 — 
 
 18 
 
 82 
 
 — 
 
 16 
 
 84 
 
 — 
 
 Nitrogen. 
 
 Amateur Trainmg. 
 
 \_Professor Stari-'s Experience.'^ 
 The following descnj)tion Iby Professor William Starr 
 (the eminent linguist at the head of the Polyglot Bureau 
 of this city), of the modus operandi pursued by him in 
 training, in order to reduce his weight without incurring 
 the severe physical labor which professionals, be they pu- 
 gilists, pedestrians, oarsmen or jockeys, have to undergo, 
 will be found interesting, inasmuch as it demonstrates the 
 facility with which persons of sedentary and literary pur- 
 suits can restore the body to its normal condition by sim- 
 ply adhering faithfully to a natural system of abstinence 
 and gentle physical exercise : 
 
264 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 Polyglot Bueeatj, 71 Nassau Street. \ 
 New Yokk, April 9th, 186G. j 
 Wm. Wood, Esq., 
 
 Deak Sir : — In compliance with your request, based upon the assur- 
 ance that a succinct account of my actual personal experience in the 
 reduction of adipose or accumulated false flesh, by means of judicious 
 dieting and light exercise, would enhance the interest of the vafuable 
 M'ork which you contemplate publishing, I will endeavor to briefly de- 
 scribe the system followed by myself and its results on two occasions. 
 
 Shortly after my arrival in Montreal, Canada East, upon my return 
 from Europe in the spring of 1859, 1 first experienced a feeling of appre- 
 hension caused by a rapid and abnormal accumulation of fat, especially 
 in the throat, stomach, and in the region of the heart and lungs. At 
 the period referred to I had just completed my 22d year, and the sudden 
 growth of so much false flesh (my weight then being 220 pounds) 
 alarmed me and induced me to resort to some means whereby to reduce 
 my body to a natural and proper weight. A fear of being a victim to 
 apoplexy or dropsy of some vital part, produced the resolution to rid me 
 of the superfluous fat at almost any saciifice of appetite and bodily com- 
 fort. After taking various preparations recommended by my physician 
 without gaining relief from my semi-comatose condition, and without 
 getting rid pf any quantity of the superfluous fat which, owing to my 
 sedentary ixirsuits, had accumulated on my frame, seriously obstructing 
 the free action of the vital organs, I set to work and made a common- 
 sense diagnosis of my case, in result of which I prescribed a regimen of 
 dry, nutritious food, as little liquid as possible, and a mild course of 
 sweating, to be produced by gentle exercise, carefully avoiding muscular 
 strain through injudicious gymnastic efforts. As the accumulation of 
 flesh had come gradually, I thought the only safe and efficacious system 
 to pursue would be such a one as would ensure a gradual decrease. 
 
 My daily routine may be briefly described as follows : Up in the morn-, 
 ing between 6 and 7; sponge bath of water, saturated with bag salt. 
 One mile walk in fine weather, or half an hour's exercise with 5 pound 
 clubs or 8 pound dumb bells. Breakfast at 8, consisting of one cup of 
 black tea, half pound of beefsteak or mutton-chop under done, varied 
 say twice a week by the substitution of three poached eggs, two pieces of 
 dry toast, or two hard crackers. Between breakfast and dinner, exercise 
 from one to two hours -with clubs, wood-sawing — dry pine — walking and 
 short runs, pulling light weights, etc., varying the exercise as much as 
 possible. Dinner at 1 of beef or mutton, with cracker, and occasionally 
 
TRAINING, OK HOW TO REMOVE COBPULENCT. 265 
 
 # 
 a slice or two of raw tomato, ,or a leaf of lettuce (but no other vegetable 
 whatever), half a pint of old ale or pure water colored with the tincture 
 of gentian. In the afternoon, generally at 3, a walk from 6 to 12 or 12 
 miles, -well encased in the " sweaters," swathing the neck and stomach 
 well with strips of flannel cut for the purpose, having on three or four 
 loose flannel overshirts, and three heavy o-vfercoats,* leaving the hands 
 bare, and with light, easy shoes on the feet. My general plan was to 
 run or rather "jog along" at a sort of Indian trot until the chest became 
 oppressed or the head too highly flushed, when I would slacken my pace 
 to a walk ; never stopping entirely or resting by the way while the per- 
 spiration was going on. I took care also upon returning to my quarters 
 to peel ofl" the sweaters gradually, walking up and down the room during 
 the disrobing process, and having my attendant rub me dry before sponging 
 with the bag salt water. After the^ath, I allowed myself one or two 
 raw eggs, in a half tumbler of sherry, and then remained quiet until tea- 
 time, 6 o'clock. This meal was the fac simile of breakfast, except that I 
 limited myself to a smaller quantity of animal food. At say half past 8 
 or .9, I supped on a small glass of very old ale and a piece of dry crust or 
 toast. This last meal, iiowever, I dispensed with altogether toward the 
 close of the training. During this period I never once smoked tobacco, 
 although I occasionally indulged in chewing the weed. The use of to- 
 bacco, however, in any shape, during training, produces a very pernicious 
 effect upon the blood and nervous system. The result of this diet and 
 sweating, at the end of 21 weeks, was a reduction of my weight from 220 
 to 142 pounds. I had myself weighed regularly, and always in the same 
 clothing each week, but the record is not within reach at present. The 
 statistics of- a portion of a second course of training I give you below. 
 This reduction of 78 pounds of flesh in 150 days' time, being an average 
 of 34 pounds per week, or a little over one half a pound per day, in a 
 person like myself, unaccustomed to active physical exercise, remaining 
 in good health and spirits during the entire course, is an evidence of the 
 splendid physical condition in which men of more active profession and 
 habits might keep themselves by a judicious diet and regular exercise. 
 A very large proportion of the diseases which affect humanity may, in my 
 opinion, be traced to excesses and irregularities in food and drink, and to 
 overexertion of the body. Not a crumb or a drop in addition to the 
 quantities I have specified did I ever once allow to pass my lips during 
 the l^lpays that I was in training. 
 
 * The weight of the sweaters and clothing was 36J pounds. 
 
 M 
 
266 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 After resuming my professional pursuits, I soon experienced a pros- 
 tration and exhaustion of the system, owing to the waste being in excess 
 of the supply, so intimate and instantaneous is the connection between 
 the brain and stomach. Consequently, in order to supply the necessary 
 vigor, I was reluctantly obliged to resume a course of generous living, 
 and frequently to resort to stimulants and nervines in order to lend the 
 system an artificial strength. To show the necessity of this, I would state 
 that out of the 24 hours I could spare but 5 or 6 at the most for sleep and 
 rest ; .and often hour after hour during several days in succession, I have 
 dictated translations on opposite subjects in different languages to as many 
 as three writers at the same time. But the fine condition to which I 
 had restored my body enabled me to go through with this severe mental 
 and physical labor for many months without nervousness or any symptom 
 appearing of a tendency to relapsa|^nto my former almost dropsical con- 
 dition. Gradually, however, owing to my unremitting devotion to my 
 literary labors, and the utter absence of exercise, I felt a heaviness and 
 sluggishness creeping over me which increased until, upon weighing my- 
 self in the beginning of September, 1862, 1 found, to my partial surprJfee, 
 that my weight was a few ounces over 200 pounds. Being again alarmed 
 at this increase, I determined to put myself again in training, and as I 
 feared the eflFects upon the nervous system of too sudden a change of 
 living, I gradually reduced the quantity of my food and drink, taking 
 slight doses of salient medicine every day or two until the 22d day of 
 the month, when I commenced to train in earnest. The system followed 
 was similar to that already described, saving that I consumed from one- 
 fourth to one-third less nutriment, both solid and liquid. 
 
 The following is a record of my weight at various dates during this 
 my second course of training : 
 
 I,BS. LOSS, Luaifc 
 
 Sept. 22, 18G2 "Weight 197 
 
 " 29, " " 191 6 
 
 Oct. 6, " " 18T 4 
 
 " 13, " " 185 2 
 
 " 21, " . " 17S.^ &i 
 
 " 2T, " " 17G 2^ 
 
 Nov. 3, " " 170 6 
 
 " li, " " IGO 10 
 
 Dec. 1, " " 150i Qi 
 
 " 8, " " 145 5| 
 
 " 29, " " 137 8 
 
 Total loss 60 lbs. 
 
 Note. — The clothing, including shoes, etc., in which I wasjjlfeighed 
 on each occasion, weighed precisely 5 pounds, which is to be added to the 
 above figures. 
 
TRAINING, OR HOW TO REMOVE CORPULENCY. 267 
 
 During this course, occupying 101 days, or 3 days oyer 14 weeks, the 
 actual loss of flesh was 60 pounds, being at the rate of about 4f pounds 
 per week, or -| of a pound each day. The greater rate of reduction in 
 this course was* owing to the reduction in the quantity of nourishment 
 to which I limited myself, the exercise being of the same nature and du- 
 ration as in the first training. 
 
 Prom the same causes my weight has continued to increase since 1862, 
 and I now weigh 245 pounds, which is much more than I have ever 
 weighed before. 
 
 In a few days I shall enter upon a third course of training ; but this 
 time I shall extend it over a longer period, making the reduction as 
 gradual as will consist with my overwhelming professional labors. My 
 intention this time is to reduce my weight to 170 pounds, which will be 
 a loss of 75 pounds of flesh, much of which is more solid and muscular 
 than when younger. I take into consideration that my height, stripped, 
 is a trifle over 6 feet 2 inches, and that with my natural hereditary tend- 
 ency to fleshiness, and my sedentary profession and additional years, the 
 reduction I am about to make must be more gradual, so as not to shake 
 the nervous system. After reaching 170 pounds, it is my intention in 
 future to not allow my weight to extend over say 180 pounds, which my 
 physicians tell me would be the normal weight of a man of my frame 
 and height. In the hope that these details may prove useful to you as 
 the actual experience of an amateur, I remain, yours truly, 
 
 William Stare. 
 
 It must always be remembe]:ed that our bodies are 
 noiirished not by wliat we jEat, but by what we Digest, 
 and that the digestive powers are limited, and can dhly 
 operate fully and without injury to themselves upon a 
 given quantity and quality, for during health these powers 
 will ever be in relation to the wants of the body as evi- 
 denced by appetite. 
 
 It is generally well known that physical exercise should 
 be avoided immediately after eating, from the fact of res- 
 piration being circumscribed to ordinary breathing when 
 the stomach is full ; here again it will be seen nature is our 
 o'uide. 
 
268 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 As hunger is the warning voice of nature, telling us 
 that our bodies are in need of a fresh supply of nutriment, 
 so is thirst the same voice warning us that a,^resh supply 
 of liquid is needed to replace that which has been separated 
 from the body by perspiration and other secretions ; though 
 the sensation of thirst appears to be confined to the mouth. 
 and throat, the demand for fluid is in reality experienced 
 by the entire system. In cases of extreme thirst, the best 
 plan is first to cleanse the mouth and throat, either by 
 rinsing them with a mouthful of water as a gargle, or by 
 chewing a small piece of biscuit, and spitting it out when 
 lubricated, and then to swallow a few mouthfuls of the 
 liquid. Repeat this until the thirst has become allayed. 
 By this means, the water will be conveyed into the blood 
 almost instantly, leaving little, if any, remainmg in the 
 stomach. After a short space, the luxury, of a good driak 
 maybe enjoyed. I have myself followed this rule under 
 the fullest extremes of heat and thirst, and always with 
 increased comfort, health, and bodily j)ower. 
 
 Proper care must improve the general health. Men 
 often go through a course of training in order to perform 
 some feats where a combination of strength, activity and 
 endurance is required ; and if the condition is perfect on 
 th8 day, it will be performed with pleasiire to himself, and 
 with some advantage to his health. I would advise that 
 no one should ever attempt any contest where the above 
 qualities are required without first making such prepara- 
 tion as will enable him to do his work without feeling any 
 bad effects from it. " Gameness" in one who practices 
 athletic sports is a good thing, and is worthy of all praise ; 
 but I have knowii men to be injured by it. Gameness and 
 condition combined is hard to beat. There is not the 
 slightest trouble for the man who has lived regularly and 
 
TRAINING, OE HOW TO REMOVE CORPULENCY. 269 
 
 taken exercise, to go through a course of training ; to him it 
 is an easy task, and he really enjoys it ; but to the man who 
 has been an every-day drinker and smoker, it is quite a 
 different thing. When such a one commences work, he 
 must to a certain extent check these practices, but this 
 should be done with caution. It would neter do to sud- 
 denly leave off all stimulants. The smoking or chewing 
 can be dropped at once, and a small quantity of beer, wine, 
 or spirits, or what the man has been in the habit of drink- 
 ing, given each day, gradually lessening the quantity. The 
 very best stimulus is sherry wine ; the next good brandy, 
 two-thirds water. 
 
 Medicine should never be given unless absolutely neces- 
 sary. If the liver is healthy and active (which can be 
 known by examining the fmces), and if of a bright brown 
 or brownish yellow, all is well, and no medicine need be 
 taken ; but should they be of a j)ale clay color, you should 
 take one large table-spoonful of ground Turkey rhubarb to 
 three of rochelle salts, steeped in a gill of boiling water for 
 twenty minutes, strained off, and taken. Should the bow- 
 els be inclmed to act more than once each day, omit one 
 or two exercises, and change the diet a little. This I be- 
 lieve to be much better than to counteract th# medicine ; 
 but shoi\ld it assume the character of the diarrhoea, the aid 
 of a good physician should be obtained. 
 
 While training, the mind should at all times be occupied 
 and amused, for upon this a great deal depends. If it is 
 all work and no pleasure or enjoyment, the task will be 
 hard. This pomt is too often lost sight of by many who 
 train. With all bodily exercises, amusement must be in- 
 culcated ; without it exercise becomes a mere drudgery, 
 which tires, but does not lead to a restoration of power. 
 When exercising, give some mental excitement, and the fa- 
 
270 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 tigue is scarcely felt. I know of nothing that conduces 
 more to a successful prosecution of this plan than the mu- 
 tual agreement of two or more persons whose object is the 
 same, to assist each other in every possible way. When 
 two persons agree to restrain one another when tempted, 
 and also to amuse each other in walking, riding, fencing, 
 gymnastic exercises, or, in fact, any kind of athletic exer- 
 cise, the health and strength of both will be improved. 
 
 I can imagine but one kind of training for the man who 
 seeks for strength, agility and endurance. At the com- 
 mencement he must leave off injurious food and drink, 
 avoid chewing, smoking, and venery, and take just enough 
 exercise, joined with amusement, to tire, without prostrat- 
 ing the muscular system. The diet must be plain (this is 
 described in another place). I do not think it prudent to 
 put the person on rigid diet at first. Few persons could 
 stand it. This must be done by degrees. I can not speak 
 too highly of the use of cold water in the morning ; the 
 salt or sea water is much better if accessible. After the 
 bath, rub until a glow is produced, and dress warm with 
 flannel next the skin. 
 
 There is another class of men who sometimes are called 
 upon to go^^rough a course of training, either to improve 
 their health, or perhaps to try some feat where strength 
 or endurance is required. These are the Free Livers. 
 
 Now these are men who live high, eating from three to 
 six meals each day of rich seasoned food, and whose bodies 
 are wholly idle. They think only of gratifying their ap- 
 j)etites. With such men a very strong control is required. 
 It is seldom that men who have led such a gay life can 
 form a resolution and keep it. They are generally unable 
 to resist temptation. Such a man may be strong in body, 
 but weak of mind. He makes promises, and breaks them 
 
TRAINING, OR HOW TO REMOVE CORPIJLENCT. •271 
 
 twenty times a day. Such a one may be governed and re- 
 strained by a superior mind, but never can he control him- 
 self. 
 
 With such a one you must find amusement for the body 
 and mind. His former habits have led to a dislike of all 
 exercise, so at the beginning let it be light and gradually 
 increasing, but never so as to exhaust him. In this manner 
 this class of men can be restored'to health, or at least to 
 such a state as will fit them to do severe work, and under- 
 go the strict dieting which is required in traming. 
 
 To those following literary pursuits I Avould by all 
 means recommend exercise. Eight hours a day for study, 
 if one really works hard during that time, is all that the 
 mental powers can advantageously endure. This will 
 leave eight for sleep, and eight for meals, exercise, amuse- 
 ment, and so on. There is nothing gained by poring over 
 classical authorities or old musty books beyond the hours 
 named. How often is it that the strain upon the mind 
 has become so intense from study that it must be given 
 up entirely in order to restore the body. Very few men 
 of reading feel like giving it up until they are almost gone. 
 Now with such a one I would advise a relaxation from 
 study to exercise, commencing at 9 A. M., and concluding 
 at 5 P. M. — study two hours, and exercise twenty minutes 
 alternately. In this way the mind and body will be 
 strengthened mentally and physically. It should be re- 
 membered the diet should be simple but good, and the ex- 
 ercise gentle at first, and of an amusing character. The 
 bed must be sought at 9.30 or 10, and the sleep uninter- 
 rupted. Man leaves the bed after disturbed sleep often 
 more fatigued than when retiring. When the night's rest 
 has been good, the mind will feel refreshed as well as the 
 body. The studies can then be renewed with vigor. 
 
272 ■ MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 This is the way that the student or reading man may- 
 restore and preserve his Ibodily health ; hy pursuing this 
 course, he will he jDrepared at a moment's notice to go 
 into training for rowing, running, or any athletic exer- 
 cise. 
 
 Let me advise my young friends who reside in the 
 upper part of the city, and in fact in all cities and places 
 where the walking is good, to walk to and from their place 
 of business morning and evening. There is more than one 
 object in this : the first, improvement of health ; the sec- 
 ond, business ; the third, pleasure and enjoyment on re- 
 turning home where hearts and hands are waitmg to re- 
 ceive you. Thus you devote perhaps one hour or more 
 every day to at least one exercise, and this will go a great 
 way to keep you in good health ; if you would only sec- 
 ond this with a little exercise for the chest and arms, all 
 would be well. Remember the human frame can bear a 
 great deal, both mentally and physically, but when the 
 burden becomes too great it must give way. 
 
 The above directions are suited to all cases where the 
 health is such that studies or business can be employed to- 
 gether with exercise. But there are cases where the mind 
 and body are completely upset ; in such a case study and 
 business must for a time be set aside. Change of diet, 
 moderate exercise, agreeable society, together perhaps 
 with change of air and scene, will soon restore you to 
 health and hajDpiness. 
 
 Training for Walking. 
 
 A short walk and run before breakfast in order to em- 
 ploy the intestines and jorepare the stomach for the first 
 meal, which should be taken thirty minutes after changing 
 the dress, which should be made of flannel throughout. 
 
TRAINING, OK HOW TO EEMOVE CORPULENCY. 273 
 
 The walking shoes must he with thick soles, with one-half 
 pound of sheet lead in each, the U23pers of soft calf-skin ; 
 these may be changed for lighter ones as the condition be- 
 comes fine. For spurt running the soles sBould be very 
 thin, but for long distances they must be a trifle thicker, 
 or the feet will blister. At 10.30 the start should be made 
 and kept up two hours, never stopping for a moment dur- 
 ing the time unless some of the organs call for rest. This 
 will not appear long if you have one or more companions 
 that are agreeable. Upon the return, attend well to the 
 cleansing of the pores, and after thirty minutes' rest, take 
 dinner. Two hours rest should be taken after this meal, 
 after which another hour and -a half's walk must be taken. 
 
 It must be remembered that the amount of Avork done 
 should be in proportion to the distance that is to be 
 walked. If it is ^short, all that is required is to get in 
 good health and keep so until the day of the race. But if 
 the distance is to be ten or fifteen miles, then the powers 
 of endurance will be tested, and the training must be for 
 this and speed combined. 
 
 Something depends upon the mental powers. While 
 one is undergoing a course of training, the leisure hours 
 should be spent in reading some instructive book or paper, 
 and the conversation when exercising should partake of 
 the same character. 
 
 As the day approaches for the contest, the man should 
 be inspired with confidence, but.not made overconfident. 
 I believe many races have been lost by the anxiety felt 
 for hours and sometimes days before the contest. This is 
 of course the result of nervousness. Hence it is that such 
 a man should be encouraged by insj)iring confidence in his 
 powers. Such men often prove the very best after get- 
 ting to woi'k. 
 
274 MANUAL OP PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 Training for jRunning. 
 
 The principles of training for running are similar to 
 those for wallnng, excejDt that the latter are taken by all for 
 the purpose or to improve the general health, while the 
 former is adopted in order to perform some feat. The 
 man preparing for a short spurt should run four times each 
 day the distance named. When the distance is long, say 
 five miles, it should be gone <^ver twice each day ; and if 
 ten miles, once or something more. When the condition 
 becom.es fair, increase the speed, but not to such a degree 
 as to exhaust or feel weakened by it. 
 
 In every case where one is training for a long distance, 
 at least five hours of the twenty-four must be spent in 
 walking and running. But great care must also be taken 
 that the man is not ovei'worked; he should do all that 
 nature will permit, and the circumstances of the case de- 
 mand, and no more. Man however can bear severe work, 
 and in a wonderful manner, provided the apj^etite contin- 
 ues good and the sleep is not disturbed with dreaming, 
 twitching, or starting. If he can eat and sleep well, there 
 need be no fear but he will work well ; always providing 
 that the mind works with the body. 
 
 Men often run the first day as they would the last. 
 Rapid walking or Tunning under such circumstances had 
 better be left alone ; it but fatigues the limbs, and as re- 
 gards respiration, aggrav«,tes the very parts which it de- 
 signed to alleviate by gradual preparation. Few things 
 worth doing can be done suddenly. It is the gradual 
 increase of the exercises that improves the wind and 
 strength the quickest and without distress. 
 
TEAINING, OE HOW TO BEMOVE COKPULENCY. 275 
 
 Training for Moioing. 
 
 The boat race admits of more rivalry and friendly com- 
 petition than any of our national pastimes, except perhaps 
 base ball. The physique of the men who form racing 
 crews, the beauty of the boats, the splendid rivers upon 
 which to row them, gives to this sport the first place in 
 athletic and recreative exercises. 
 
 That there has been any. improvement made in rowing 
 in this country within the last thirty years I do not be- 
 lieve. The Whitehall Watermen of 1835; the Seamans 
 of New Jersey, 1840 ; the Ludlows, the Jennings, etc., etc., 
 had, in my judgment, all the skill and science that the 
 men of the present day possess. That we have made great 
 improvement in the model and build of boats, and also in 
 training men to row them, I will admit. 
 
 Men for boat racing should be selected for their health, 
 strength, and activity. The art of rowing Avill come by 
 practice. I do not suppose that every man can become an 
 accomplished oarsman, but I do believe that all can learn 
 something worth learning. The selection bemg made, the 
 next thing is to look at the previous habits of each man. 
 These habits should not be changed suddenly, but by de- 
 grees. By fixed habits I mean such as smoking, chewing, 
 drinking, sleeping, diet, etc., etc. Proper exercise will al- 
 ways create the demand ; food will yield the supply. 
 
 The importance of fresh air is acknowledged, but not 
 fully appreciated or acted on. It is presumed that every 
 man forming a racing crew will have sound lungs. Un- 
 less he has these, that is no place for him. The rowing 
 man's sleeping apartment must at all times be well ven- 
 tilated. Let any man sleep in a close room, and in the 
 morning he will wake flushed and hot, and often with 
 
216 MAKUAL OF THYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 headache. Go for a few minutes into the pure air, and 
 mark the change. The instant a man is awake he should 
 get out of bed, wash and dress, then open wide the win- 
 dows. Here you have the two great agents of health, 
 fresh air and fresh water. 
 
 In training, the bath must be steadily kept in view. I 
 have often heard men say that they preferred warm to 
 cold water. They forget that they are for different pur- 
 poses. Cold water is what a man wants when in training, 
 and the best time to take it is immediately after getting 
 out of bed. It is a mistake to think that the body should 
 be allowed to cool down before the bath is taken. Noth- 
 ing closes the pores but the shrinking of the skin, and to 
 do this by standing in the cold, you defeat the purpose for 
 which the bath is taken. All those jjoints have been well 
 observed by rowing men in training, and therefore may 
 be relied on. 
 
 Training causes the speedy removal of all waste, and 
 the hastenmg forward of fresh material for its replacement, 
 and in doing this it attains three distinct results : 1. It in- 
 creases the size and power of the voluntaiy muscles em- 
 ployed, 2. It increases the functional capacity of the in- 
 voluntary muscles employed. 3. And by far the greatest, 
 it promotes the health and strength of the whole body by 
 increasing respiration and quickening the general circula- 
 tion. 
 
 There are also many points that should be left to the 
 good sense and earnestness of the men themselves, such as 
 never to row while suffering from severe cold or any in- 
 flammatory affection of the chest or throat, or the slightest 
 indication of any irregularity in the action of the heart. 
 It is the duty of every man to be candid on those points, not 
 only for his own sake, but for the best interests of ro\fflog. 
 
TRAINING, OE HOW TO KEMOVE COEPULENCY. 277 
 
 I would advise all j^ersons, either in or out of training, 
 to leave " nostrums" alone. If they are sick, let them go 
 to a good physician — one in "vvhoni they have confidence — 
 and take what he recommends. 'There is nothmg so danger- 
 ous either to howel or brain as this constant self-physicking. 
 
 The requirements of the hody in summer and winter are 
 somewhat different; In winter, diet should be more gen- 
 erous, for the heat-]3roducing articles are more in <lemand. 
 Less vegetables should be taken, and a smaller amount of 
 liquid. The thin summer shirt with short sleeves should 
 give place to the loose flannel. 
 
 Too much care can not be taken in selecting men for 
 race rowing ; they should not be too young nor too old. 
 If young, they shoi^I be carefully drilled, holding as the 
 first princijDle the future health and Strength of the body. 
 A man should never be selected for his sujjerior skill, nor 
 from willingness alone, for there is many a young man who 
 possesses these qualities to an eminent degree, who has not 
 the plfysical power of development or endurance. 
 
 Exertion must not exceed the powers of recruitment fur- 
 nished by diet and rest, nor should any thing be done to 
 cause bodily fatigue immediately preceding rowing. The 
 walking, the running, the Indian club and dumb bell ex- 
 ercises, are taken to strengthen every available part, and 
 to assist the rowing power, so that the man as well as the 
 rower may be cultivated. No sound man need be afraid 
 to exert himself for fear of " taking out" of him ; all that 
 he loses in that way will be replaced with tenfold interest 
 by the A^ery process of extraction. 
 
 Sameness in exercise will certainly give precision and 
 dexterity ; but variety is essential to vigor and power. I 
 mean by this that the man training to row a boat race re- 
 quires the exercise named above. 
 
278 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEECISES. 
 
 The effect of the too rigid system of diet practiced by 
 many has, I think, a depressing effect upon the nutritive 
 organs and upon the natural appetite, which after all is the 
 expression of the body's wants — for however nutritive in 
 itself food may be, when eaten with distate it will not be 
 digested so fully or so perfectly as if it had been eaten 
 with relish and pleasure. 
 
 To eat or drink beyond the requirement of the natural 
 appetite is a great error, for every particle so taken be- 
 comes an encumbrance, a hindrance, and a loss. The di- 
 gestive organs will not convert more food into blood than 
 is needed to supply the actual wants of the body. It is 
 well for all men to know the proper kind and quantity of 
 food required, that which satisfies and no more. All men 
 know that intemperaftce and self-indulgence are incompat- 
 ible with health, strength, or activity, and that energetic 
 and regular habits, implying early hours of rest, early 
 hours of rising, good hair mattress beds and spare bed- 
 clothes, with frequent and abundant use of cold water, are 
 all agents in promoting physical power. These are the 
 means that men must adopt who are looking for physical 
 distinction. 
 
 In training, man must have perfect control over himself. 
 This implies not only restraint and direction, but bringing 
 into action the hidden and undeveloped powers, by which 
 means man controls man, and for the most important ends. 
 The want of this power is the common and special defect 
 not only of weak minds, but very often of the strongest na- 
 tures; it is indeed never perfectly attained, but is capable 
 of being made neai-ly so. The man without self-control is 
 like a high-mettled horse unbroken, which runs away with 
 or throws his rider. It is hard to overcome bad habits. 
 I have heard men say, " I know the habit is inji^j-ing me. 
 
TRAINING, OE HOW TO EEMOVE COKPULENCT. 279 
 
 but I can not give it up." What is there so noble in man 
 as the will, when directed by good judgment and right in- 
 tention ? The three great characteristics of success m life 
 are sagacity, integrity, persistency. Restraint comes hard 
 to most men; but think what good springs from it in 
 after life. The word " enthusiasm" ought to be compre- 
 hended in its original and noble import, then what man 
 did would be done well. 
 
 Sow to Memove Fat. 
 
 When commencing training, if the organs are all work- 
 ing well, no medicine should be taken. It is well known 
 that an overquantity of fat upon the human form inter- 
 feres with the due action of the muscles, and especially 
 Upon the inside, and in and around the region of the heart. 
 Now there are two ways to remove this : one natural, the 
 other artificial. The first is the only true way, for with it 
 you grow stronger as you grow lighter. 
 
 Natural sweating is simply to put on extra clothes — 
 from three to six thicknesses of flannel over those parts 
 that are loaded with fat. The neck should be encased in 
 a close wool shawl, and when thus clothed take a walk, or 
 if it is possible, a slow run, until you find yourself in a 
 good perspiration, which should be kept up for at least an 
 hour. This can be done Avith feather beds placed in front 
 of a good grate fire. Every part must be covered except 
 the eyes and nose. At the expiration of this time remove 
 the clothes, beginning with the upper part of the body, 
 and wash the neck, shoulders, chest, arms, and every part 
 of the body with hot salt and water. Sea water is best if 
 it can be obtained. Then rub dry with coarse towel. It 
 is well to use flesh gloves if the flesh will stand it ; the 
 body should be exposed to the air as short a time as pos- 
 
280 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 sible — the under-garments must be of flaBnel, and well 
 dried before putting on. This is the natural way of re- 
 moving the fat — the 
 
 Artificial sioeating is as follows : Strip the whole body, 
 and wrap around it a sheet wrung out of cold water ; then 
 around this wrap blankets, leaving nothing but the head 
 exposed. In fifteen or twenty minutes reaction takes 
 place, and a profuse perspiration breaks out. Sometimes 
 at this stage cold water is given. This is generally kept 
 up ^r one or two hours. Then the cloths are removed 
 and cold water thrown over the body, which is then 
 rubbed dry and clothed. This is artificial sweating, and 
 by many held in very high esteem. This is repeated three 
 times a week. 
 
 There is one other means by which fat can be removed, 
 but in my judgment it is very injurious to the general 
 health, as it leaves it subject at the least exposure to cold. 
 This is by 
 
 Sweating hy Medicine or Liqiiors. — When this means 
 is adopted, it is unsafe to use cold water at any time in 
 washing, and the body must never be exposed to the air. 
 Although this system has been resorted to by some of the 
 best runners in England, still it will never answer. For 
 the man who is to exercise all the muscular powers, the 
 artificial sweating is far better in every respect ; for it 
 leaves the man with lighter spirits and with less tendency 
 to stiflness of the limbs. 
 
 Natural sweating is the thing. All who try it will ever 
 after throw medicine, liquors, and artificial sweating aside. 
 In medicine sweating you take Dovei*'s powder at night; 
 the next night from one-half to one pint of whey made 
 with white wine, with thirty drops each of antimonial 
 wine and sweet spirits of nitre. This is a very powerful 
 
TRAINING, OR HOW TO REMOVE CORPULENCY. 281 
 
 means of sweating ; Ibut it leaves the stomacli unfit to re- 
 ceive food and the skin so delicate and soft that the 
 slightest chill gives cold. 
 
 Digestion of Food. . 
 
 In the year 1837 W. Beaumont, M. D., U. S. A., pub- 
 lished a work upon the Physiology of Digestion. Al- 
 though the term, digestion is sometimes used to mean all 
 the different processes attending the conversion of food 
 into blood, yet the sense in which it is more usually em- 
 ployed is limited to the process which actually takes place 
 within the stomach ; and all observations of the compli- 
 cated process of blood-making in the living human body 
 after the food has passed from the mouth, have been lim- 
 ited to this stage. 
 
 I say actual observations, for from an accident which 
 happened to an American, a wound in which a portion of 
 the side, and with it a portion of the walls of the stom- 
 ach were torn aAvay, actual observations were made ; an 
 aperture measuring two and one-half inches remained un- 
 closed after the wound in other resjaects had become com- 
 pletely healed ; and through this aperture the physician 
 was enabled to watch from day to day over a series of 
 years the process of digestion of almost every article used 
 as human food. 
 
 The following table is compiled from those of Dr. Beau- 
 mont. . These are facts showing the actual process and re- 
 sult in a living human stomach; yet it must be remem- 
 bered that it was but one stomach, and we all know how 
 greatly digestion varies with different individuals, and 
 how food that is most easy of digestion Avith one person 
 will be the very opposite with another : 
 
282 
 
 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 TABLE SHOWING THE TIME REQUIRED TO DIGEST CERTAIN ARTICLES 
 OP FOOD. 
 
 Kinds op Food. 
 
 • 
 
 How Peepaked. 
 
 Time op Di- 
 gestion. 
 
 "Beefsteak 
 
 Bi'oiled 
 
 DBS. 
 
 2 
 3 
 2 
 2 
 3 
 3 
 2 
 4 
 4 
 3 
 4 
 5 
 1 
 1 
 2 
 2 
 2 
 3 
 3 
 4 
 1 
 2 
 3 
 2 
 2 
 3 
 3 
 1 
 2 
 2 
 4 
 1 
 
 MIN. 
 
 40 
 
 a 
 
 Roasted...'. 
 
 
 a 
 
 Boiled 
 
 60 
 
 Mutton 
 
 Broiled 
 
 45 
 
 u 
 
 Boiled 
 
 
 li 
 
 Roasted 
 
 10 
 
 
 Broiled 
 
 35 
 
 Veal 
 
 Broiled 
 
 
 <( 
 
 Fried 
 
 30 
 
 Poi'ksteak 
 
 Broiled 
 
 40 
 
 a 
 
 Boiled 
 
 15 
 
 li 
 
 Fried 
 
 
 
 Broiled 
 
 45 
 
 Tripe 
 
 Boiled 
 
 10 
 
 
 Fried 
 
 15 
 
 Turkey 
 
 Boiled, 
 
 25 
 
 (C 
 
 Roasted 
 
 30 
 
 Chicken . 
 
 Broiled 
 
 
 (C 
 
 Roasted 
 
 
 Ducks 
 
 li 
 
 
 Fisli 
 
 Fried or Boiled 
 
 30 
 
 
 Raw 
 
 15 
 
 <c 
 
 Roasted or Stewed 
 
 15 
 
 Eofcra 
 
 Raw 
 
 
 (1 
 
 Soft Boiled 
 
 50 
 
 (C 
 
 Hard Boiled or Fi'ied 
 
 30 
 
 Bread 
 
 Wheat — Baked 
 
 
 Eice 
 
 Boiled 
 
 
 Tapioca 
 
 ( t 
 
 
 (( 
 
 30 
 
 Cabbage ' 
 
 Apples 
 
 IC 
 
 30 
 
 Raw 
 
 30 
 
 TABLE SHOWING THE AVERAGE AMOTTNT OF FOOD TAKEN BT "MEN OF 
 ORDINARY HEIGHT AND WEIGHT (SAT FROM 140 LBS. TO 160 LBS.) 
 UNDER DIFFERENT CONDITIONS OF EXERCISE OR ACTIVITY. 
 
 Amount op Exeecise. 
 
 Food in Oitnces. Watek in Ounces. 
 
 When not taking any I 18.7 
 
 When in modei'ate or usual exercise. 23 to 25 
 
 Undergoing a course of training 30 to 40 
 
 65 to 85 
 75 to 90 
 55 to 65 
 
TEAINING, OE HOW TO* EEMOVE CORPULENCY. 283 
 
 Much depends xipon the kmd and digestibility of food. 
 If indigestible food is eaten, much of it is lost by passing 
 out undigested by the bowels. 
 
7. 
 
 ttnitnrtj.. 
 
CHAPTEE XVIII. 
 Rules fok Peeseeving Health 287—290 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 MlBOELLANEOrS SUGGESTIONS VTO'^ HEALTH 291—306 
 
 CHAPTER XX. 
 Reookb of Time by Man, Animal, and Vessel SOT— 31G 
 
KULES rOK PBESEEVING THE HEALTH. 287 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 EULES FOE PEESEEVING THE HEALTH. 
 
 First. — Maintain habitual cheerfulness and composure 
 of mind, which can arise only from peace of conscience, 
 constant reliance on the goodness of God, and the exercise 
 of kindly feelings toward men. Peace of mind is as essen- 
 tial to health as it is to happiness. 
 
 Second. — Breathe as much as possible the clear air that 
 is perceptibly in motion, and conveys to you the idea of 
 freshness and purity ; that is accessible to the sun, or would 
 be were the sun . shining. Breathe deeply and quickly. 
 Just previous to a great momentarily muscular exertion, 
 breathe slowly and slightly, avoiding any unnecessary ex- 
 ertion while passing through an impure atmosphere, but 
 the moment you enter a pure one, then breathe fully, deep- 
 ly and quickly, mitil you have indemnified yourself for the 
 damage you may have just previously sustained. Breathe 
 usually with the mouth closed, head up, chest out, and 
 shoulders squai*e. 
 
 TJiird. — Keep a strict control over the appetite and 
 passions, with a fixed abhorrence of all excess and all un- 
 lawful gratification whatsoever. The person who would 
 enjoy good health must be temperate in all thmgs, and 
 habitually exercise the most rigid self-government, for 
 every sort of vicious indulgence is highly injurious to 
 health; first, directly, in its immediate efiects on the body, 
 and next, indirectly, in the perpetual, dissatisfaction of 
 mind which it invariably occasions. 
 
288 ■ MANUAL GF PHYSICAL EXEKCISES. 
 
 Fourth. — Sleep above the earth not less than five feet, 
 and above the floor not less than eighteen inches, in a room 
 or place where the snn and air may freely and abundantly 
 .enter. A good hair mattress is the h'ealthiest bed that 
 one can sleep upon. Keep the face uncovered and the 
 head slightly elevated, the mouth closed. One window 
 may be a little drawn down from the top ta admit the air. 
 
 Fifth. — Rise early ; and in order to do this eat a very 
 light supper, and g'o early to bed. The hour before bed- 
 time should be spent in agreeable relaxation, or in such ex- 
 ercises as only tend to compose the mind and promote in- 
 ward peace and cheerfulness. 
 
 Sixth. — Be careful of the skin. This is a highly-organ- 
 ized membrane, full of minute pores, cells, blood-vessels and 
 nerves. It imbibes moisture or throws it off, according to 
 the state x)f the atmosphere and the temjjerature of the 
 body ; it also breathes.^ as do the lungs, though less actively. 
 All the internal organs sympathize with the skin. 
 
 Seventh. — Observe simplicity, moderation, and regu- 
 larity with resj)ect to diet. Make a judicious selection 
 of the articles of food, carefully avoiding unwholesome 
 dainties and whatever has proved hurtful to the constitu- 
 tion. The quantity of food should be proportioned to the 
 amount of exercise a person undergoes. Sedentary people 
 should be rather abstemious. Their food should be nu- 
 tritious, easy of digestion, and moderate in quantity. Sel- 
 dom eat any thing between the regular meals. Strong 
 drinks, tobacco, snuff, opium, and all mere indulgences 
 should be avoided. 
 
 Eighth. — Refrain from both mental and bodily exertion 
 for a short time after the princijDal meal. If immediate 
 exertion be required, a slight repast should be taken instead 
 of the usual meal. Never eat a full meal when the body 
 
RULES FOE PRESEKVING THE HEALTH. 289 
 
 is heated by exercise. Wait until you are someAvhat re- 
 freshed by a short interval of repose. Drinking cold 
 water when the body is hot, and hot tea and soups when 
 cold, are productive of many evils. 
 
 Ninth. — Be very sparing in the use of wine and other 
 stimulants. They may sometimes be employed to advan- 
 tage in cases of extreme debility or extraordinary labor ; 
 but under any circumstances, if too freely or too frequently 
 indulged in, they will most certainly impair your health 
 and shorten your life. 
 
 Tenth. — Take your meals with as much quiet and corii- 
 fort as possible. Bustle, vehement discussion, bad news, 
 disagreeable companions, and all vexatious excitement, 
 should be excluded at meal-times. 
 
 Eleventh. — Eat very slowly, with a view to the thorough 
 mastication of your food. Rather forego a meal or take 
 but half the needful quantity than eat too fast. 
 
 Tv^lfth. — Practice occasional abstinence. Whenever 
 the system is feeble or disordered, diminish the quantity 
 of food, and allow yourself more time for exercise. In cases 
 of slight indisposition, a partial or a total fast will often be 
 found the best restorative. 
 
 Thirteenth. — Take no medicine unless it be absolutely 
 necessary. Learn if possible to keep well without it. In 
 case of real indisposition, consult a competent medical ad- 
 viser without delay, and implicitly attend to his directions. 
 Never risk your health and life either by neglecting serious 
 illness or by tampering with quack remedies. 
 
 Fourteenth. — Practice general ablution as often as twice 
 each week, or wash the body every other morning with 
 cold water by means of a sponge, and rub it dry with a 
 rough towel, or scrub the whole body for ten minutes with 
 
 flesh brushes. 
 
 N 
 
290 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 'Fifteenth. — Gentle or light gymnastic exercise should 
 be taken regularly at least thirty minutes each day, or one 
 hour every other day. . It must never be forgotten that 
 cheerfulness is an essential ingredient in all beneficial ex- 
 ercises. Mental relaxation in agreeable society should be 
 sought as often as due attention to business and other 
 important affairs permit. 
 
 Sixteetith. — The importance of cleanliness of dress and 
 person in every particular must not be overlooked. The 
 thorough ventilation of apartments, also an appearance of 
 neatness and orderly arrangement in every part of your 
 habitation, have much to do with health. 
 
 Seventeenth. — The secret of health is summed up in 
 these few words : moderation in eating and drinking ; 
 'short hours of labor and study; regularity in exercise, 
 recreation and rest ; cleanliness ; equanimity of temper, 
 and equality of temperature. These are the great essen- 
 tials to that which surpasses all w^ealth — health o^ mind 
 and body. 
 
MISCELLANEOUS SUGGESTIONS UPON HEALTH. 291 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS SUGGESTIONS UPON HEALTH. 
 
 At the risk of repeating much 4hat I have incidentally- 
 said in other places, I append a chapter of miscellaneous 
 suggestions in regard to the laws of health. In fact, I re- 
 peat designedly and of purpose ; for upon a subject like 
 this, which' comes home to the experience of every day, 
 hour, and moment, there needs Ime upon line and precept 
 upon precept. Next to a good conscience, good health is 
 the great element of human happiness. I know very well 
 that there are men — such for example as the great Robert 
 Hall, Avhose whole lives were passed in intense pain, and 
 yet happiness was the law of their existence. So we read 
 of martyrs exulting at the stake. But such cases, where 
 the mind so triumphs over the sufferings of the body Avith 
 which it is governed, are exceptions. Our Maker has 
 framed us while on earth of body and soul, the two consti- 
 tuting one Being. There are indeed cases of sound minds 
 conjoined with unsound bodies ; as there are of most un- 
 sound minds in sound bodies. But the general law is that 
 sound mmds and sound bodies go together. To secure 
 obedience to this law is and has been the business of my life. 
 In what I have here written, and in all that I have taught 
 in my profession as " Instructor in Physical Training," this 
 lias been my object. Every physical exercise is in my 
 view a means to an end ; and that end is to increase the 
 sum of human well-being and well-doing. 
 
292 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 The rules for the proper treatment of the various organs 
 of the human body are called the Laws of Health. God 
 has connected the reward of enjoyment with obedience to 
 those rules ; he has also created all that they may be hap- 
 py, provided they do right. He has given us reason and 
 conscience to guide and regulate our lives, so that when 
 we find by experience that any thing tends to injure us, 
 we know or at least ought to know that it should be 
 avoided, and we sin against God and ourselves when we 
 do not. Any person who knowingly violates the laws of 
 health, sins against God. 
 
 The first law of health is to take care that the stomach 
 has good healthy food, and that the lungs are fully supplied 
 with ]3ure air. Exercise the body at least thirty minutes 
 each day. The health and strength of the muscles depend 
 on the purity of the blood. If the stomach is supplied 
 with unhealthy food, or is loaded with more than is needed, 
 impure blood is the result ; and if the lungs are supplied 
 with impure air, the capillaries in all parts of the body lose 
 the life-giving oxygen which alone can purify the blood. 
 Whenever a muscle is exercised, the blood flows more 
 abundantly into it, in order to furnish an increased supply 
 of oxygen. If we use a number of muscles, and use them 
 strongly and quickly, the whole circulation will be affected. 
 The heart will receive blood faster and send it to the 
 lungs ; then the lungs work more quickly to supply the 
 oxygen required by the greater amount of blood; the 
 blood returns with greater speed to the heart, and the heart 
 sends it out with quicker action through the arteries to the 
 capillaries. In the capillaries also the decayed matter is 
 carried off faster, and then the stomach calls for more food 
 to furnish new and pure blood. Thus it is that exercise 
 gives new life and nourishment to every part of the body. 
 
MISCELLANEOUS SUGGESTIONS UPON HEALTH. 293 
 
 Light is essential to the perfect development of the 
 human body. Vegetables that grow in the dark become 
 pale and have a sickly look — and so do children when they 
 grow up in dark rooms and alleys of a city. 
 
 Care should be taken that the muscles of the trunk are 
 not weakened by means of long-continued unnatural po- 
 sitions of the spine. Tight articles of dress around the 
 neck, or legs, or arms, interfere with the full health and 
 strength of the muscles. It is perfect folly to exjject to 
 cure crookedness or round shoulders by corsets or braces. 
 The only sure remedy for such deformities is a proper train- 
 ing of the nmscles in pure air. There is perhaps nothing 
 that so strengthens and give^ comfort to the weak as 
 having the muscles rubbed, esjDecially when it is done after 
 a cold bath. 
 
 There is nothing so indispensable to beauty of form as 
 the j)roper exercise of all the muscles. It is rarely, if ever, 
 the case in this nation, that any care is taken in this respect. 
 Children in their sports do not fail, especially if they have 
 access to a well-ventilated room, or are allowed to run in the 
 country, to accomplish this. But how different it is with 
 most grown persons ; they confine their exercise to a small 
 portion of the body. In this way the perfect and rounded 
 form of childhood is rarely preserved to ^ature life as it 
 might be by proper care. Therefore take my advice, and 
 exercise through life the muscles of the whole body. 
 
 Pure Air is JEssential to Health. 
 There is perhaps no law of health so universally violated 
 by, I might say, all classes of persons, as the one which 
 demands that every pair of lungs should have fresh air at 
 the rate of a hogshead an hour. This is needed by each 
 one of us in order to secure the most perfect health and en- 
 
294 MANUAL 6r physical exercises. 
 
 joyment of life. The greater the number of persons in one 
 room, the greater is the necessity of increased ventilation. 
 Open fire-places that make a constant draught of the air 
 of a room upward and outward, insure to some extent a 
 supply of fresh air from the doors and windows. But with 
 stoves in the room and windows and doors closed, it is al- 
 most certain that the inmates will constantly breathe im- 
 pure air, which will act as slow poison in undermining the 
 constitution. And when the constitution is thus weakened, 
 diseases of all kinds find ready entrance. 
 
 The health of the* body is greatly dependent on the 
 kind of food taken, some being much more favorable to 
 health than others. The , two purposes of food are, first^ 
 to supply the nourishment that takes the place of the de- 
 cayed particles of the body ; and second^ to furnish the 
 fuel needed to warm the body. Is it not necessary, then, 
 to regulate the food with reference to quality and quan- 
 tity ? If an excess is taken into the system, all the organs 
 are overworked in throwing it oif. Good fresh food 
 makes the heart beat quicker, and all* the organs of the 
 body work faster. The most stimulating of all food, or 
 that which makes the most new bloOd, is the flesh of ani- 
 mals, from the fact that it contains more nitrogen than 
 any other. ^ 
 
 No person should be confined exclusively to one kmd 
 of food, unless it be one which combines all the elements 
 required in nourishing all parts of the body. Persons of 
 full habit and excitable temperament, in order to secure, 
 long life, should confine themselves almost exclusively to 
 a diet of bread, fruit, and vegetables. The diet of children 
 should be the same, with the addition of milk. This is far 
 preferable to stimulating animal food. 
 
 Remember that the state of health, especially of the di- 
 
MISCELLANEOUS SUGGESTIONS UPON HEALTH. 295 
 
 gestive organs, is to be regarded. When there is a tend- 
 ency to constipation, highly concentrated food should be 
 avoided, and fruits, coarse bread, and vegetables be taken. 
 When there is a tendency to diarrhoea, then rice, fine 
 flour, and such food must be sought, and fruits and the 
 like avoided. 
 
 Owing to habit or constitution, some kinds of food are 
 better adapted to the stomach of one person than to that 
 of others. Experience should be your guide. Let such 
 food as disturbs the stomach be avoided, of whatever kind 
 it may be. Take no food which you have found difficult 
 to digest. Nothing taxes all the organs of the body so 
 much as food that will not digest properly, and yet must 
 in some way be carried out of the body. Immediately 
 after eating a full meal, vigorous exercise of body or mind 
 should be avoided ; one-half hour at least should intervene. 
 
 There is no portion of the body so intimately connected 
 with the stomach and the liver as the skin. The custom 
 of physicians to examine the tongue results from the fact 
 of a sympathy which exists between the interior skin, and 
 the skin of the tongue, so that any diseased state within 
 the body extends more or less to the mouth, especially to 
 the tongu(^ Keep the outer , skin in perfect health, by 
 which means you secure a healthy stomach. 
 
 The health and well-being of all the organs of digestion 
 and nutrition greatly depend upon the daily evacuation 
 of the lower intestines. Regular habits in this respect 
 should be formed and carefully preserved. Never delay 
 when nature prompts to this necessary duty ; for such de- 
 lays tend to produce constipation. There is no rule of 
 health more important than this. Never place in the wa- 
 ter-closet for use paper which has printer's ink upon it ; 
 it has a tendency to injure the rectum. Pure cold water 
 
296 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 taken. in- moderation, instead of thinning, tends to purify 
 the blood ; it is also a remedy for constipation and inac- 
 tion of the liver. 
 
 A delicate person unaccustomed to expose the skin to 
 cold air and cold water, should begin to bathe in a warm 
 room and use tepid water at first, and follow bathing with 
 a good deal of friction. Then each day the water should 
 very slowly and gradually be reduced in temperature, and 
 the air of the room in warmth. It must be remembered 
 that while warm bathing tends to debilitate, cold bathing 
 draws off the animal heat, and may be carried to such an 
 extent as to undermine the constitution. Many young 
 persons have been seriously injured by bathing too often, 
 or staying too long in cold water. The animal heat is 
 thus drawn off faster than the powers of the body can su]d- 
 ply it, and the process becomes debilitating. 
 
 It is probable that most evils that are developed in 
 cutaneous eruj^tions result from excess in eating or from a 
 wrong selection of food.. 
 
 In climates that are unhealthy special care should be 
 taken that the skin be kept clean, and in moving among 
 contagious disorders the keej)ing of the skin clean and 
 warm, and properly nourished by simple and wholesome 
 food, is the surest preventive from disease. 
 
 In order to keep the mind and body in good health 
 periods of recreation are necessary. There must be some 
 amusement taken which will excite laughter. There are 
 a very important set of nerves called the " risible," and 
 they are included for use as much as any others. The 
 brain and body are both exercised by laughter, and all 
 who have attended to physiology and the laws of health 
 declare that nothing is more promotive of good health 
 than a full hearty laugh. I would recommend that in ev- 
 
MISCELLANEOUS SUGGESTIONS UPON HEALTH. 297 
 
 cry family some portion of each day should he devoted to 
 social and domestic enjoyments ; at least for those whose 
 minds are burdened by cares and duties. 
 
 The brain can be made to suffer as severely from inac- 
 tivity as from any other cause. The want of some noble 
 and engaging pursuit in life, leaving all the faculties and 
 affections without appropriate objects, is one of the most 
 serious evils suffered by man. The selfish pursuit of pleas- 
 ure soon grows wearisome, and the mind pines for some- 
 thing noble to relieve it ; and this longing is always pro- 
 portioned to the amount of sensibility of each mind. A 
 low and uncultivated mind can more readily become rec- 
 onciled to inactivity, or a life filled up with trifles, than 
 one of a higher order. God has given us no faculties of 
 action or feeling which he did not design to have duly ex- 
 ercised in securing enjoyment to ourselves and to our fel- 
 low-beings. 
 
 What is most needefl. with our people is that they 
 should learn something of the construction of their own 
 bodies ; the nature of different kinds of food ; and the laws 
 that should regulate their selection. "When this is known, 
 use judgment and common sense in this as in all other 
 matters. At the same time, habits of self-control and prin- 
 ciples of duty are needed to secure obedience to the dic- 
 tates of discretion. For want of this how many of the 
 young in our land are following a course which, in mul- 
 titudes of cases, leads to certain disease, and shortens 
 life. 
 
 The quantities of butter, molasses or sugar heaped on 
 hot cakes ; the gravies and fatty cooking ; the stimulating 
 condiments, and the candies and such stuff that abound, 
 are all so Aany sources of debilitation, disease, and death. 
 
 The time and manner of taking food should be regarded. 
 
 N* 
 
298 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 There should he a period of rest to the brain and muscles 
 before eating. Students and men of business forget this, 
 and often rush to the table with body and mind full of ex- 
 citement. In this way the stomach is hurried in all its 
 operations ; food is thrust into it half masticated. Again, 
 many persons, after eating their three meals a day, will load 
 the stomach just before going to bed, and thus keep up 
 the labor of the system during • the period when all its 
 powers should be at rest. 
 
 An enormous abuse of the stomach and digestive organs 
 is from the great quantities of quack medicines that 'are 
 taken in this country. The great objection to taking of 
 medicines, except when prescribed by a careful physician, 
 is that most of them are either poisonous substances or 
 strong stimulants that strain all the vital parts to discharge 
 them from the body, while their operations and results are 
 often a matter of mere chance and guess-work. What is 
 put into the stomach is quickly taken into the circulation 
 and carried all over the body, and if it does good in one 
 point of the wonderfully complicated organs, it may also 
 do as much harm to other jDortions. But notwithstanding 
 this, men, women and children are pouring down pills and 
 potions to an alarming extent, while vast fortunes are made 
 by ignorant quacks who succeed in poisoning their fellow- 
 creatures by slow processes. 
 
 Another part of the human form needs attention. That 
 is the feet. They need as much if not more care than any 
 other part of the form. The reason of this is that the cir- 
 culation is slower in the extremities, and the slightest in- 
 terruption there affects the whole body. And yet there is 
 perhaps no part of the jDerson which fashion so much ex- 
 cludes from needful warmth and protection as fce feet, es- 
 pecially among the most delicate and sensitive classes of 
 
MISCELLANEOUS SUGGESTIONS UPON HEALTH. 299 
 
 the community. Multitudes of foolish men and fashionable 
 ladies and young girls wear only a thin pair of shoes or 
 boots in damp and cold weather. Thus the circulation of 
 the lower limbs is impeded, and the blood accumulates in 
 the organs above to an unhealthful amount. Another 
 abuse is that shoes and boots are too often made without 
 the slightest regard to the form of the foot : a mere matter 
 of fashion. The want of width and fullness at the toes is 
 the great evil. This not only prevents circulation, but de- 
 stroys elasticity of the foot in walking. It is also a pain- 
 ful subject to one who has examined the general run of feet 
 with respect to a model for a sculptor among them. Keep 
 the feet clean and dry, and you will seldom be troubled with 
 cold. 
 
 A word of advice to the American women in respect to 
 bodily health and happiness will, I hope, be of some serv- 
 ice. When the wife and mother is suffering from the de- 
 bility and pain of ill health, it not only tends to end her 
 enjoyment of life, but a cloud of gloom settles over the 
 whole family circle. Hpw many of our ladies, by following 
 the custom and fashion bring on themselves sickness and 
 premature old age. Many a beautiful blooming bride at 
 twenty finds herself at thirty or thirty-five wrinkled and 
 care-worn ; unhappy as a wife, and unreasonable as a 
 mother. The young lady who Avickedly wastes her health, 
 and receives with scorn and indifference all advice and 
 caution in regard to health, little dreams of the bitter 
 tears she will shed when it is too late. The husband may 
 take great care to protect the fair one of his choice ; he 
 may fondly cherish the wife who is prematurely fading ; 
 still he has no helpmate to share his joys or lighten life's 
 labors. Some sick women grow selfish and forget that in 
 a partnership such as theirs, others sufier when they suf- 
 
300 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 fer. But one of the saddest features of evils from this cause 
 is the suffering of young children born from a feeble, sick- 
 ly, or diseased constitution. In the family where all are 
 healthy may be found joy and happiness, but how gloomy, 
 drear, and sad where sickness abounds. 
 
 Bilious comj^laints usually result from excess of eating. 
 It is the office of the liver to draw off this excess. When 
 the liver is overtaxed it ceases its work. Instead of 
 changing or reducing the food and selecting that which 
 has the least carbon, a dose of calomel is taken; then a 
 cathartic is taken to clear out the calomel. Now the 
 oftener this is done the sooner the constitution will be un- 
 dermined, till finally a chronic weakness settles on the 
 liver, stomach, or bowels ; the appetite fails, and the sys- 
 tem becomes so weak that a sort of dying half-life is the 
 result. Simple diet, sleep, and exercise, it can not be -too 
 often repeated, are the very best medicines. 
 
 Gymnastic exercises strengthen the intellectual facul- 
 ties, give courage, and produce independence and presence 
 of mind. If you wish to develoj) the mind, exercise the 
 body : both Avill be made healthy and strong. 
 
 Dyspejpsia. 
 
 Much has been written and said on this common but 
 lingering disease. The facts learned from experience by 
 my connection with dyspeptics may be useful to those 
 upon whom this disease has fallen. Different cases re- 
 quire different treatment, for it does not always originate 
 from the same cause. It is sometimes the effect of a dis- 
 eased and deranged liver, creating bilious symptoms ; 
 sometimes there is an irritation or inflammation of the coat- 
 ing of the stomach. And often it is caused by debility of 
 the nerves of the stomach, creating a peculiar sensation of 
 
misc:ellaneous suggestions upon health, 301 
 
 weakness across that organ, particularly after a hearty 
 meal ; and also when there is felt the want of food. , 
 
 There are genei'al rules of'diet which apply to each of 
 these different species (and will be found in another part 
 of this Avork). Every thing should be avoided that is not 
 of easy digestion, or that ]3roduces pain or distressing sen- 
 sations ; such as rich pastry ; fat meats ; hard-boiled eggs ; 
 puddings ; pies ; all kinds of vegetables except good 
 mealy potatoes and tomatoes. The meals should be taken 
 at regular intervals. The stomach should never be over- 
 loaded with food, but never allowed to feel the need of it. 
 Drinks weaken the powers of digestion, and should as 
 much as possible be avoided, particularly just before and 
 during a meal. The quantity should not exceed a small 
 glassful — less if the case is bad. Warm drink is far prefera- 
 ble to cold in preventing painful and distressing symptoms. 
 
 Dyspepsia produced by the first-mentioned cause is 
 generally obstinate, and depends as much if not more iipon 
 l^revention than cure. For this daily and active exercise 
 must be taken, accompanied wath fresh air, salt-water 
 bathing, hard rubbing, and hand friction. Good fresh 
 fruit, or stewed fr*iit, prevents the accumulation of bile, and 
 may be used with safety and benefit. The use of bran- 
 bread is good, especially if there is much costiveness. 
 
 A pill made of white castile soap two parts, ipecac one 
 part, with mucilage of gum arable, and of the ordina»y 
 size, taken three times a day before eating, greatly assists 
 digestion. 
 
 A decoction of hoarhound, ta^^sy, boneset, and worm- 
 wood, with saleratus dissolved in each dose as much as 
 will lie upon a three cent piece, may be taken three times 
 a day between meals, in doses of a small wine-glassful. 
 This stimulates the liver to a healthy action, cleanses 
 
302 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 the stomach, quiets the nerves, and is an excellent altera- 
 , tive. 
 
 Delicate persons, especially females, should avoid aloes y 
 while it coiTects the stomach, it produces some of the most 
 incurable and troublesome complaints to which their na- 
 tures are subject. Mercury in every form should be dis'- 
 carded. In all kinds and every form of dyspepsia it pro- 
 duces lasting injuries and destroys the nervous system. 
 
 Where dyspepsia is caused by an inflamed or irritated 
 state of the stomach, white castile soap dissolved in a little 
 warm water and taken three times a day, a tea-sj)oonful 
 at a time, in a little sweet milk, is an excellent remedy. 
 Every thing of a stimulating or heating nature must be 
 avoided. Gentle exercise and bathing the stomach with 
 tepid lye will be found highly beneficial. The diet must 
 be mostly .of good, sweet, well-baked bread — plain or 
 toasted — crackers or farina. As the symptoms abate, the 
 quantity and quality of the food may be increased, though 
 cautiously, and with close attention to its eflTects. 
 
 The last-mentioned species arises from different causes, 
 and is always attended with a distressing sensation of 
 weakness over the region of the stomachy and general loss 
 of strength. It is thought to proceed from a weak or dis- 
 eased spine in some cases. Whatever may be its oi'igin, 
 the patient is indeed a great sufferer. All powerful and 
 aative medicines must be entirely discarded, and the above 
 general rules of diet strictly adoj)ted. Nothing should be 
 put into the stomach but Avhat is of easy digestion, and 
 fully agrees with it. « 
 
 Prepared chalk gives relief and mitigates this disease. 
 This complaint can not bear any great quantity of liquid 
 without bad effects. The chalk may be obtained at any 
 druggist's, and can be used dry. Eat a small piece when- 
 
MISCELLANEOUS SUGGESTIONS UPON HEALTH. 303 
 
 ever the stomach feels uneasy or uncomfortable ; it will 
 save the patient from much distressing sickness. Prepared 
 chalk is an absorbent, and is also slightly astringent. Its 
 alkaline properties correct acidity without relaxing and • 
 weakening the stomach. As a family restorative among 
 children, there is no one remedy upon which dependence 
 may be placed with more confidence as a preventive when 
 the stomach is slightly deranged. 
 
 In all sj)ecies of dyspepsia, experience will eventually 
 teach the attentive mind what causes the gi-eat suffering ; 
 and lessons thus learned must be practical. Fresh air, 
 careful exercise not to overfatigue, with bathing and fric- 
 tion by towel, brush and hand, are to be constantly used. 
 These will produce a necessity for food. When the stomach 
 is empty, there often comes a feeling of faintness ; this may 
 be partially prevented by eating a piece of cracker or toast- 
 ed bread. 
 
 Recovering those Apparently Dead. 
 
 If apparently dead from Drowning. — For full directions 
 of the methods to be employed in such cases, see the chap- 
 ter on " Swimming," in a previous part of this work. 
 
 If apparently dead from Intense Gold. — (1.) Rub the 
 body with snow, ice, or cold water. (2.) Restore warmth 
 by slow degrees ; and (3) after some time, if necessary, 
 employ the means recommended for the apparently 
 drowned. In cases of freezing it is highly dangerous to 
 apply heat too early. 
 
 If apparently dead from Noxious Yapors. — (1.) Remove 
 the body into a cool fresh air. (2.) Throw cold water fre- 
 quently on the neck, face and breast. (3.) If the body be 
 cold, apply warmth as recommended for the apparently 
 drowned. 
 
 If apparently dead from Intoxication. — Lay the person 
 
 I 
 
304 . MANUAL OP PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 on a bed with the head raised; remove the neckcloth and 
 loosen the clothes. Obtain as soon as possible medical as- 
 sistance, as the treatment must be regulated by the state 
 of the patient, but in the meantime apply cloths soaked in 
 cold Avater to the head, and bottles of hot water or hot 
 bricks to the calves of the legs and the feet. 
 
 If apparently dead h-om Apoplexy/. — The patient should 
 be placed in a cool air, with the head well raised, and the 
 clothing loosened, jDarticularly about the neck and breast. 
 Cloths soaked in cold watei', spirits, or vinegar and water, 
 should be kept applied to the head. All stimulants should 
 be avoided. 
 
 In cases of /Sioi-stro/ce, the same means to be used as m 
 apoplexy. 
 
 JPrecaution against Lightning. — In a thunder-storm it 
 is dangerous to take shelter under a tree, to approach any 
 kind of metal, or to remain in a draft or near the fire-place. 
 The safest way is to remain in the middle of the room, or 
 if in the open air, to lie down upon the ground. 
 
 System of Measurement to Show the Mate of Groioth and 
 J)evelopment. 
 
 'Weight. — This should be taken in exercising costume, 
 and when repeated, should always be done at the same 
 time of day, and with reference to any circumstance which 
 might tend to effect its accuracy. 
 
 Height. — Position : heels together, the knees straight 
 and braced slightly back ; the chin raised, the head held 
 steady ; the shoulders square to the front ; the heels, hips, 
 shoulders and head touching the wall or the pillar of the 
 standard. 
 
 Chest. — Naked breast or skin measurement : — Raise the 
 arms slightly above a horizontal ; the tape should now be 
 
MISCELLANEOUS SUGGESTIONS UPON HEALTH. 305 
 
 passed around the chest in the line of the nij)ple, and 
 drawn close ; the arms dropped to the sides, and the girth 
 reckoned. The chest should not be inflated beyond its 
 due expansion during ordinary breathing. The tape 
 drawn as above will at once give the muscular as well as 
 the respiratory capacity. In selecting men for rowing, the 
 tape should be just above the ninth rib, in order to test 
 the expansion of the chest upon the fullest inspiration. 
 
 Fore- Arm. — The arm fully extended, with the hand 
 tightly closed ; the tape to be passed around the thickest 
 part of the arm, and its girth at that point given. In men 
 who take little or no exercise the largest part of the fore- 
 arm will be near the elbow-joint ; but with those who 
 have exercised, the greatest girth will be found from two 
 and a half to four inches below it. It is well to keep this 
 circumstance in view, for by that means you will be able 
 to make the actual increase. 
 
 Upper-Arm. — The hand tightly closed, but with the 
 arm bent at the elbow, and the hand brought toward the 
 shoulder. This must be slowly and gradually done, the 
 contractions beginning with the muscles of the palm and 
 clenching of the fist. The tape to be jDassed around the 
 thickest part of the arm. This will be over the prominent 
 muscle on the upper surface called the biceps. It is by 
 the contractions of this muscle that the arm is bent, and 
 with its antagonistic muscle on the obverse side of the 
 arm — the triceps — that it is again extended. When the 
 arm is fully developed, the difference in size between the 
 fore and uppe;^"-arm will be about two or two and a half 
 inches. I have invariably noticed that when the upper- 
 arm is feeble, the upper region of the chest will be feeble 
 also — a man with a chest of forty inches should have an 
 upper arm of from thirteen to fourteen inches. 
 
306 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 Calf. — The leg must be held stiff and straight; heel 
 raised from the ground, the toes pressed down, the knee 
 braced back. The tape to be passed around the thickest 
 part of the calf. The position of this line will vary with 
 different men, and often with the same limb in different 
 stages of development. In such case place the tape at the 
 point which shows the greatest girth. 
 
 Thigh. — The \q.^ placed as in the preceding measure- 
 ment. The tape to be passed around the largest part of 
 the thigh, and its girth taken. 
 
KECOKD OF TIME. 307 
 
 CHAPTER XX. 
 
 .EECOED OF TIME. 
 
 In this chapter will be found a brief record of the fastest 
 time known to have been made by man, beast, or vessel. 
 
 Walking. 
 
 Half-mile in 3 min. 18 sec, by C. Westhall, in England. 
 — One mile in 6 min. 42 sec, by Wm. H. Boyd, in America. 
 — Seven miles in 52 min., by Wm. Spooner, in England. — 
 Eight miles in 59 min. 39 sec, by George Topley, in En- 
 gland. — Ten miles in 1 hour, 14 min. and 49 sec, by George 
 Topley, England. — Twenty miles in 2 hours, 57 min. 2 sec, 
 by Wm. Spooner, in England. 
 
 Greatest distance walked in 24 hours, 102 miles, in En- 
 gland. — Wm. Wheeler walked 101 hours without rest or 
 sleep, in England. — One thousand miles in 1000 consecu- 
 tive hours, at Eaton and Ellsworth, England, by Capt. Bar- 
 clay. — One hundred miles in 19 hours, over a rough country 
 road, and part of the time through a heavy storm of rain 
 and wind, by Capt. Barclay. 
 
 Running. 
 
 One hundred yards in 9 sec, by George Seward, in En- 
 gland. — One-quarter of a mile in 48 J sec, by Henry Reed, 
 in England. — Half-mile in 1 min. 56|- sec, by McKinstery, 
 in England. — One mile in 4 min. I7i sec, by William Rich- 
 ards, in England. — One mile, -with four separate starts, 15 
 
308 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 min. between each, in 3 min. 52 sec, by Chas. Westhall, in 
 England. — One mile and a half in 6 min. 50 sec., by John 
 Fleet, in England. — Two miles in 9 min. 11 sec, by Lang, 
 in England. — Five miles in 24 min. 57 sec, by Wm. Jack- 
 son, better known as " the American Deer," in England. — 
 Ten miles in 51 min. 34 sec, by Jackson, in England.-r- 
 Eleven miles in 57 min. 20 sec, by Pudney, in England. — 
 Twenty miles in 1 hour, 58 "min. 18 sec, by Maxfield, in 
 England. — Twenty-one miles in 1 hour and 59 min,, by C. 
 Westhall, in England. 
 
 Greatest Distance in One Sour. — ^Eleven miles, three 
 hundred and ninety yards, by Jackson, in England. 
 
 Munning Jump. 
 
 Twenty-nine feet, seven inches, in one running jump, by 
 Howard Chester, in England. 
 
 Standing Jump. 
 Twelve feet, five inches, by Norman Bortles. 
 
 Throvnng JBase Hall. 
 
 One hundred and sixteen yards, two feet, by J. Hatfield. 
 This is the greatest distance thrown in public 
 
 Throwing Cricket Hall. 
 
 One hundred and twelve yards. This is the greatest 
 distance a ball has been thrown in public. By Adams, 
 in England. • 
 
 Skating. , 
 
 One mile in 1 min. 56 sec, by Wra. Clark. This is said 
 to have been beaten in January, 1 866, by Donheur, of New- 
 burg, he having performed the mile in 1 min. 52 J sec. — 
 Thirty miles in 1 hour, by George Seward. 
 
EECORD OF TIME. 309 
 
 Billiards. 
 Best run (61G) by Joseph Dion, in a match game, May, 
 1867. — Best time in a game of 1500 points, 2 hours, 40 min., 
 by Joseph Dion. — Were made 665 on the two reds around 
 the table, the ^alls at no time being "jawed," by John 
 McDevitt, July 15th, 1867. 
 
 Pigeon Shooting. 
 John Taylor, of Jersey City, N". J., in the great match 
 for $4000, against Kobert Newel, of Buffalo, N". Y., which 
 took place at Syracuse, N. Y., October, 1865, killed 98 birds 
 out of the 100, Newel killing 94. This great feat was ac- 
 complished with 50 double birds, 18 yards rise, 100 yards 
 boundary, 1^ ounce shot. — In a previous match at the same 
 place, between the same two persons, at 100 single birds, 
 21 yards rise, 80 yards boundary, 1\ ounce shot, Taylor 
 killed 94 out of the 100, Newel 92 out of the 100. This is 
 the best pigeon shooting upon record in any part of the 
 world. 
 
 Pistol Shooting. 
 
 Travis vs. Suydam.— In the great match between the 
 above-named crack shots, which took place in the city of 
 New York, in 1856, Travis hit the figure of an ordinary 
 size man, at the distance of ten jDaces, forty times in suc- 
 cession — the terms of the match being that each man 
 should fire 40 shots by word of command. On the word 
 " Fire — one !" as above stated, every shot took effect ; but 
 in consequence of not firing upon the instant the word was 
 given upon the ninth shot, the judges declared one " No 
 shot." Suydam, according to the judges' decision, missed 
 two shots. Travis in 1854-5 performed the wonderful feat 
 of shooting an apple from off the head, and also out of the 
 hand, of a living man. 
 
310 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEKCISES. 
 
 Lifting. 
 Twenty-seven hundred and thirty-seven and three-fourth 
 lbs. (2737^), with straps or harness, by Ambrose A. Butts, 
 of Auburn, Ohio. — ^Twelve hundred and i^ty lbs. (1250), 
 without straji^or harness, by Dr. Winship, of Mass. It is 
 said that Dr. Winship has lifted 2,600 lbs. with his harness, 
 but not in public. — One hundred and sixty (160) lb. dumb- 
 bell, the largest ever fairly put up with one hand, by W. 
 Thomson, at Chicago. 
 
 Horse Running. 
 
 Many and various have been the stories told of the great 
 speed of English race-horses in the olden times ; but as 
 there is nothing definite in regard to the distances or time 
 being correct, they must be taken with at least some little 
 degree of doubt. I fancy it would be difficult for any one 
 under the circumstances to vouch for the truth of all the 
 reports we have heard in regard to this subject. It is said 
 that a horse called "Firetail" in 1772 ran one mile in 1 
 min. and 4 sec. 
 
 Th*e celebrated horse " Flying Childers" ran over the 
 Newmarket Course, which is said to be by correct measure- 
 ment three miles, six furlongs, and ninety-three yards, in 
 6 min. 40 sec, and a few months after upon the Beacon 
 Course, a distance of four miles, one furlong, and one hun- 
 dred thirty-eight and one-quarter yards, in 7 min. 30 sec. 
 It is also recorded, that Flying Childers went one-half mile 
 in 20 seconds. In the race upon the Beacon Course, his 
 stride or leap was measured and found to be a trifle over 
 thirty feet — this upon a part of the course that was per- 
 fectly level. He was never known to cover less than 
 twenty-five feet at every stride when racing. 
 
EECOED OF TIME. 311 
 
 "Eclipse" is said to liave run a mile in one minute in 
 1741, at the Curragh in Ireland. 
 
 Mr. Wilde rode one hundred and twenty-seven miles in 
 6 hours, 21 min., employing ten horses in the performance 
 of the feat. 
 
 In 1 745, Mr. Thornhill rode from Stilton to London and 
 back, and again to London, two hundred and thirteen 
 miles, in 11 hours, 34 min. 
 
 In 1752, Ml-. Shaftoe, with ten horses, five of which were 
 ridden twice, accomplished fifty-eight and one-quarter 
 miles in 1 hour, 49 minutes. 
 
 In 1786, Mr. Hull's " Quibhler" ran twenty-three miles 
 upon the Newmarket Course or flat, in 57 min. 10 sec. 
 
 In 1831, Geo. Osbaldiston performed the most wonderful 
 task of riding two hundred miles in 8 hours, 39 min., using 
 in the feat twenty-eight horses, many of them two, and 
 some three times. 
 
 One mile in 1 min. 39 sec, by Gladiateur, iu England. 
 — One mile in 1 min. 42^ sec, by Henry Parritt, m America. 
 — Two miles in 3 min. 36J sec, by Berry, in America. — 
 Three miles in 5 min. 28 sec, by Brown Dick, in America. ■ 
 — Four miles in 7 min. 1P| sec, by Lexington, in America. 
 — One mile, two furlongs, seventy-three yards in 2 min. 
 10 sec, by Saunterer, in England. — Two miles in 3 min. 25 
 sec, by Inheritor, in England. — Three miles in 5 min. 21 
 sec, by Rataplan, in England. 
 
 Horse Leaping. 
 Over Wafer: 39 feet, by Chandler, in England. — Over 
 Hurdles: 34 feet, by Calverthorp^, in England. — Over 
 Stone Wall: 33 feet, by Lottery, in England. 
 
 Horse Pacing. 
 One mile in 2 min. 17| sec, by Pocahontas, in America, 
 
 % 
 
312 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 Horse Trotting. 
 One mile in harness, in 2 min. 16| sec, by Dexter. — One 
 mile in 2 min. 15 sec, by Ethan Allen, with running mate. 
 — One mile, under saddle, in 2 min. 18| sec, by Dexter. — 
 Two miles in harness, in 4 min. 50j sec, by Flora Temple. 
 — Three miles under saddle, in 7 min, 32J sec, by Dutch- 
 man. — Ten miles in harness, in 28 min. S\ sec, by Prince. — 
 Twenty-one miles in harness, in 58 min. 25 sec, by the cel- 
 ebrated horse. Captain McGowan. — One hundred miles in 
 harness, in 8 hours, 55 min. 53 sec, by Conqueror. 
 
 Steamships. 
 
 /Scoifia sailed from the stream opposite Jersey City, De- 
 cember 16, 1863, at 11 A. M. ; arrived at Liverpool 1.40 P. 
 M. on the 25th, making the passage in 8 days, 21 hours, 44 
 minutes. — San Francisco to Panama in 11 days and 4 hours, 
 by the Golden Gate. 
 
 • Miver Steamers. 
 
 New York to Albany, in 6 hom-s, 21 minutes, by the 
 Alida. — Greatest number of miles in the hour — in 1864 the 
 Daniel Drew made twenty-seven miles in one hour. 
 
 Sailing Vessels. 
 Under this head it may not be uninteresting to give the 
 following extract from an old English paper. It is some- 
 thing really worth knowing, as much for its historical im- 
 portance as for the singular notice that was takfh of the 
 sliip at the time, by one of the great leaders in the legis- 
 lature of that empire: 
 
 " House of Commons, Feb. 7th, 1783. — Mr. Hammett begged leave 
 
EECOED OF TIME. 313 
 
 to inform the House of a very recent and extraordinary event. Tlie 
 ship Bedford, Captain Moores, arrived in the Downs on the 3d of Feb- 
 ruary, passed Gravesend on the 4th, and was reported at the Custom 
 House the 6th. She was not allowed regular entry until some consulta- 
 tion had taken place between the Commissioners of the Customs and 
 the Lords of Council, on account of the many Acts of Parliament yet in 
 force against the Rebels in America. She is loaded with 487 butts of 
 whale oil, is American built, manned wholly with American seamen, 
 wears the Rebel colors, and belongs to the Island of Nantucket, Massa- 
 chusetts. 
 
 "This is the first vessel ^^hich displayed the Thirteen Rebellious 
 Stripes of America in any British port. The vessel lies at Horseley 
 Down, a little below the Tower, and is intended immediately to return 
 to New England." 
 
 After this, the first American vessel which appeared in a 
 foreign port, the following are the most noted swift pas- 
 sives: 
 
 James Dairnes, from Boston to Liverpool in 12 days, 6 
 hours. — Northern Lights from San Francisco to Boston in 
 V6 days, 8 hours. — Flying Scud made 460 miles in twenty- 
 four hours. This is beyond all doubt the greatest rate of 
 speed that has ever been known for a sailing-vessel to have 
 made.— American Yacht Henrietta^ December 11, 1866, 
 from New York to (Cowes) England, in 13 days, 22 hours, 
 and 46 minutes, in the great ocean race for a purse of nine- 
 ty thousand dollars. 
 
 Rowing. 
 All who take an interest in boating must regret exceed- 
 ingly that so little attention was paid in former years in 
 keeping correct time of the important regattas and match 
 races. I know at the present day there are many Avho 
 would take an interest in reading of these interesting 
 events, had we a correct guide in regard to distances and 
 
 O 
 
 m 
 
314 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEKCISES. 
 
 time. But it appears that in the early history of boating in 
 this country, that matter was entirely lost sight of, there 
 being no record kept. We must therefore content our- 
 selves with merely the notice of some of those of the most 
 importauce, where time and distance were known to be 
 correct. 
 
 Twelve miles — Eight oars, in 1 hour, 34 min. 30 sec, on 
 Charles River, Boston, Sept. 13th, 1855, by the Superior of 
 St. Johns, N. B. 
 
 Nine miles — Eight oars, in 1 hour, V min. 34 sec, on 
 Charles River, Boston, July 18th, 1855, by the Maid of 
 Eriti of Boston. 
 
 Six miles — Four oars, in 42 min. 14 sec, Sept. 20th, 
 1856, on Charles River, Boston, by the Neptune of St. 
 Johns, N". B. 
 
 Five miles — Four oars, in 34 min. 64 sec, turning two 
 stake-boats twice, or making four complete turns, by the 
 Win. H. Tarboss^ June 23, 1856, on Harlem River, N. Y. 
 
 Five miles — Four oars, in 32 min. 44f sec, making three 
 turns, by the Geo. J. Proton, Sept. 10th, 1860, on Harlem 
 River, N. Y. — Sept. 30th, 1865, at Pittsburg Regiltta, five 
 miles, won by Pittsburg boat Friendship ; time, 32 min. 
 26 sec 
 
 At the Beacon Regatta in 1858, Mr. R. F. Clark, an am- 
 ateur, won, rowing two miles in 14 min. 54 sec. In 1859 
 he is said to have rowed the same distance in 13 min. 52 
 sec. 
 
 Three miles — Single sculls, in 22 min. 30 sec, by James 
 Hamill. 
 
 Three miles — Six oars, in 17 min. 42^ sec, by the Yale 
 University crew, July 28, 1865. 
 
 It is recorded that Robert Chambers, in his match with 
 White for the championship of England, rowed over the 
 
 ♦ 
 
EECOED OF TIME. 315 
 
 usual course from Putney to Mortlake, which is called four 
 and a half miles, in 23 min. 25 sec. 
 
 Speed of Locomotives. 
 
 England. — ^The Duke of Wellington, in a special train, 
 was conveyed from Paddoclc to Slough, a distance of 18 
 miles, in 15 min. 
 
 New York. — In June, 1855, the locomotive Satnilton 
 Davis, on the N"ew York Central Road, with six cars, ran 
 14 miles in 11 min. 1 sec. 
 
 Pennsylvania. — An express train over the Pennsylvania 
 Central, ran 10 miles in 1 min. 30 sec. 
 
 Ballooning. 
 
 John Wise, the celebrated aeronaut, has moved in a 
 clear atmosphere at the rate of a mile in 42 sec. He repu- 
 diates the idea that hurricanes move with the. velocity of 
 one hundred miles an houi-, and states that he has often 
 sailed in currents above the storm, and invariably found sucli 
 current to be the greatest. 
 
 Wii. D. Banmistle, in 1855, sailed from Adrian, Michi- 
 gan, to Clarion county, Penn., a distance of 350 miles, in 4 
 hours.S 
 
 Moj^s. Goddaed moved seven miles in 5 min. 
 
 Gut Lussac, oun September 6th, 1804, from the city 
 of Paris, ascended in a balloon to the height of 23,00(yfeet. 
 
 Birds Flying. • • 
 
 Falcon. — A falcon, belonging to Henry IV. of France, 
 escaped from Fontainebleau, and in twenty-four hours after 
 was found in Malta, a distance of not less than 1300 miles. 
 Eider Duck flies at the rate of 90 miles an hour. 
 Sparrow about 30 miles an hour. 
 
316 MANUAL OF PHYSICAL EXEKCISES. 
 
 Sioallow flies at the rate of from 90 to 95 miles an hour. 
 
 Pigeon flies at the rate of CO miles an horn*. 
 
 Sound travels at the rate of from 800 to 900 miles an 
 liour." 
 
 Cannon Balls travel at the rate of from 1000 to 1100 
 miles an hour. 
 
 THE END, 
 
 * • 
 
 X 8 3 2 ,4 
 

 
 ' / 
 
 ■x^^- 
 
 
 ^-o